Grammar of Persian Jones

A
GRAMMAR
OF THE
PERSIAN LANGUAGE,
BY SIR WILLIAM
1
JONES,
OF UNIVERSITY COLLEGE OXFORD, AND OF THE ROYAL SOCIETIES
OF LONDON AND COPENHAGEN.
Jî
Cfj*
JUS
cr
^H
j\ JdJ
y
THE NINTH EDITION,
WITH CONSIDERABLE ADDITIONS AND IMPROVEMENTS,
AND SOME SPECIMENS OF THE FINEST PERSIAN AND ARABICK HAND WRITING,
FOR THE EXERCISE OF THE STUDENT,
BY THE REV. SAMUEL LEE, B. D.
D. D. OF THE UNIVERSITY OF HALLE : HONORARY MEMBER OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY
OF PARIS : HONORARY ASSOCIATE OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF LITERATURE :
,
MEMBER OF THE ORIENTAL TRANSLATION COMMITTEE, AND OF THE
ROYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY OF GREAT BRITAIN AND IRELAND : AND
PROFESSOR OF ARABICK IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE.
LONDON:
PRINTED BY W. NICOL, CLEVELAND ROW,
FOR PARBURY, ALLEN, AND CO.
;
S. BAGSTER
;
T. CUTHELL
;
JOHN RICHARDSON;
HAMILTON, ADAMS, AND CO. ; G. B. WHITTAKER
;
BLACK, YOUNG, AND YOUNG
J
HOWELL AND STEWART
;
W. MASON
;
AND HENRY STEEL.
1828.
.
THE
PREFACE
1 he Persian language is rich, melodious, and elegant ; it has been spo-
ken for many ages by the greatest princes in the politest courts of Asia
;
and a number of admirable works have been written in it by historians,
philosophers, and poets, who found it capable of expressing with equal
advantage, the most beautiful and the most elevated sentiments.
It must seem strange, therefore, that the study of this language should
be so little cultivated at a time when a taste for general and diffusive
learning seems universally to prevail ; and that the fine productions of
a celebrated nation should remain in manuscript upon the shelves of our
public libraries, without a single admirer who might open their trea-
sures to his countrymen, and display their beauties to the light
;
but if
we consider the subject with a proper attention, we shall discover a
variety of causes which have concurred to obstruct the progress of
Eastern literature.
Some men never heard of the Asiatic writings, and others will not be
convinced that there is any thing valuable in them ; some pretend to be
busy, and others are really idle
;
some detest the Persians, because they
believe in Mahomed, and others despise their language because they do
not understand it : we all love to excuse, or to conceal, our ignorance^
b
ii PREFACE.
and are seldom willing to allow any excellence beyond the limits of our
own attainments ; like the savages who thought that the sun rose and set
for them alone, and could not imagine that the waves, which surrounded
their island, left coral and pearls upon any other shore.
Another obvious reason for the neglect of the Persian language, is the
great scarcity of books, which are necessary to be read before it can be
perfectly learned, the greater part of them are preserved in the different
museums and libraries of Europe, where they are shewn more as objects
of curiosity than as sources of information ; and are admired, like the
characters on a Chinese screen, more for their gay colours than for their
meaning.
Thus, while the excellent writings of Greece and Rome are studied by
every man of a liberal education, and diffuse a general refinement through
our part of the world, the works of the Persians, a nation equally distin-
guished in ancient history, are either wholly unknown to us, or considered
as entirely destitute of taste and invention.
But if this branch of literature has met with so many obstructions
from the ignorant, it has, certainly, been checked in its progress by the
learned themselves ; most ofwhom have confined their study to the minute
researches of verbal criticism
;
like men who discover a precious mine,
but instead of searching for the rich ore, or for gems, amuse themselves
with collecting smooth pebbles and pieces of crystal. Others mistook
reading for learning, which ought to be carefully distinguished by every
man of sense ; and were satisfied with running over a great number of
manuscripts in a superficial manner, without condescending to be stopped
by their
difficulty, or to dwell upon their beauty and elegance. The rest
have left nothing
more behind them than grammars and dictionaries
\
and
PREFACE. iii
though they deserve the praises due to unwearied pains and industry,
yet they would, perhaps, have gained a more shining reputation, if they
had contributed to beautify and enlighten the vast temple of learning,
instead of spending their lives in adorning only its porticos and avenues.
There is nothing which has tended more to bring polite letters into
discredit, than the total insensibility of commentators and critics to the
beauties of the authors whom they profess to illustrate ; few of them
seem to have received the smallest pleasure from the most elegant com-
positions, unless they found some mistake of a transcriber to be corrected,
or some established reading to be changed ; some obscure expression to
be explained, or some clear passage to be made obscure by their notes.
It is a circumstance equally unfortunate that men of the most refined
taste and the brightest parts, are apt to look upon a close application to
the study of languages as inconsistent with their spirit and genius : so
that the state of letters seems to be divided into two classes, men of learn-
ing who have no taste, and men of taste who have no learning.
M. de Voltaire, who excels all writers of his age and country in the
elegance of his style, and the wonderful variety of his talents, acknow-
ledges the beauty of the Persian images and sentiments, and has versified
a fine passage from Sadi, whom he compares to Petrarch : if that ex-
traordinary man had added a knowledge of the Asiatic languages to his
other acquisitions, we should by this time have seen the poems and his-
tories of Persia in an European dress, and any other recommendation of
them would have been unnecessary.
But there is yet another cause which has operated more strongly than
any before mentioned towards preventing the rise of Oriental literature
;
I mean the small
encouragement
which the princes and nobles of Europe
iv PREFACE.
have given to men of letters. It is an indisputable truth, that learning
will always flourish most where the amplest rewards are proposed to the
industry of the learned
;
and that the most shining periods in the annals
of literature are the reigns of wise and liberal princes, who know that fine
writers are the oracles of the world, from whose testimony every king,
statesman, and hero, must expect the censure or approbation of posterity.
In the old states of Greece the highest honours were given to poets, phi-
losophers and orators ; and a single city (as an eminent writer* observes)
in the memory of one man, produced more numerous and splendid monu-
ments of human genius than most other nations have afforded in a course
of ages.
The liberality of the Ptolemies in Egypt drew a number of learned
men and poets to their court, whose works remain to the present age the
models oftaste and elegance ; and the writers, whom Augustus protected,
brought their compositions to a degree of perfection, which the language
of mortals cannot surpass. Whilst all the nations of Europe were co-
vered with the deepest shade of ignorance, the Califs in Asia encouraged
the Mahomedans to improve their talents, and cultivate the fine arts
;
and even the Turkish Sultan, who drove the Greeks from Constantinople,
was a patron of literary merit, and was himself an elegant poet. The
illustrious family of Medici invited to Florence the learned men whom
the Turks had driven from their country ; and a general light succeeded
to the gloom which ignorance and superstition had spread through the
western world. But that light has not continued to shine with equal
splendour ; and though some slight efforts have been made to restore it.
*
Aschani.
PREFACE.
v
yet it seems to have been gradually decaying for the last century
;
it
grows very faint in Italy
;
it seems wholly extinguished in France : and
whatever sparks of it remain in other countries, are confined to the closets
of humble and modest men, and are not general enough to have their
proper influence.
The nobles of our days consider learning as a subordinate acquisition,
which would not be consistent with the dignity of their fortunes and
should be left to those who toil in a lower sphere of life
;
but they do not
reflect on the many advantages which the study of polite letters would
give peculiarly to persons of eminent rank and high employments :
who, instead of relieving their fatigues by a series of unmanly pleasures,
or useless diversions, might spend their leisure in improving their know-
ledge, and in conversing with the great statesmen, orators, and philoso-
phers of antiquity.
If learning in general has met with so little encouragement, still less
can be expected for that branch of it, which lies so far removed from
the common path, and which the greater part of mankind have hitherto
considered as incapable of yielding either entertainment or instruction
:
if pains and want be the lot of a scholar, the life of an Orientalist must
certainly be attended with peculiar hardships. Gentius, who published
a beautiful Persian work called the Bed
of
Roses, with an useful but
inelegant translation, lived obscurely in Holland, and died in misery.
Hyde, who might have contributed greatly towards the progress of
Eastern learning, formed a number of expensive projects with that view,
but had not the support and assistance which they deserved and required.
The labours of Meninski immortalized and ruined him : his Dictionary
pf the Asiatic languages is, perhaps the most laborious compilation that
vi PREFACE.
was ever undertaken by any single man : but he complains in his pre-
face, that his patrimony was exhausted by the great expense of employing
and supporting a number of writers and printers, and of raising a new
press for the Oriental characters. M. d'Herbelot, indeed, received the
most splendid reward of his industry : he was invited to Italy by Fer-
dinand II. Duke of Tuscany, who entertained him with that striking
munificence which always distinguished the race of the Medici : after
the death of Ferdinand, the illustrious Colbert recalled him to Paris,
where he enjoyed the fruits of his labour, and spent the remainder of
his days in an honourable and easy retirement. But this is a rare ex-
ample : the other princes of Europe have not imitated the Duke of
Tuscany ; and Christian VII. was reserved to be the protector of the
Eastern Muses in the present age. .
Since the literature of Asia was so much neglected, and the causes of
that neglect were so various, we could not have expected that any slight
power would rouse the nations of Europe from their inattention to it
:
and they would, perhaps, have persisted in despising it, if they had not
been animated by the most powerful incentive that can influence the mind
of man : interest was the magic wand which brought them all within one
circle : interest was the charm which gave the languages of the East a
real and solid importance. By one of those revolutions, which no human
prudence could have foreseen, the Persian language found its way into
India ; that rich and celebrated empire, which, by the flourishing state
of our commerce, has been the source of incredible wealth to the mer-
chants of Europe. A variety of causes, which need not be mentioned
here, gave the English nation a most extensive power in that kingdom :
our India Company began to take under their protection the princes of
PREFACE. vii
the country, by whose co-operation they gained their first settlement
;
a number of important affairs were to be transacted in peace and war
between nations equally jealous of one another, who had not the common
instrument of conveying their sentiments
;
the servants of the Company
received letters which they could not read, and were ambitious of gain-
ing titles of which they could not comprehend the meaning
;
it was found
highly dangerous to employ the natives as interpreters, upon whose fide-
lity they could not depend
;
and it was at last discovered, that they must
apply themselves to the study of the Persian language, in which all the
letters from the Indian princes were written. A few men of parts and
taste, who resided in Bengal, have since amused themselves with the lite-
rature of the East, and have spent their leisure in reading the poems and
histories of Persia ; but they found a reason in every page to regret their
ignorance of the Arabick language, without which their knowledge must
be very circumscribed and imperfect. The languages of Asia will now,
perhaps, be studied with uncommon ardour ; they are known to be use-
ful, and will soon be found instructive and entertaining : the valuable
manuscripts that enrich our public libraries will be in a few years
elegantly printed; the manners and sentiments of the Eastern nations
will be perfectly known ; and the limits of our knowledge will be no
less extended than the bounds of our empire.
It was with a view to facilitate the progress of this branch of literature,
that I reduced to order the following instructions for the Persian language,
which I had collected several years ago; but I would not present my
grammar to the public till I had considerably enlarged and improved it
:
I have, therefore, endeavoured to lay down the clearest and most accurate
rules, which I have illustrated by select examples from the most elegant
viii PREFACE.
writers ; I have carefully compared my work with every composition of
the same nature, that has fallen into my hands
;
and though on so general
a subject I must have made several observations which are common to all,
yet I flatter myself that my own remarks, the disposition of the whole
book, and the passages quoted in it, will sufficiently distinguish it as an
original production. Though I am not conscious that there are any essen-
tial mistakes or omissions in it, yet I am sensible that it falls very short of
perfection, which seems to withdraw itself from the pursuit of mortals, in
proportion to their endeavours of attaining it ; like the talisman in the
Arabian tales, which a bird carried from tree to tree as often as its pursuer
approached it. But it has been my chief care to avoid all the harsh and
affected terms of art which render most didactic works so tedious and un-
pleasant, and which only perplex the learner, without giving him any real
knowledge. I have even refrained from making any enquiries into gene-
ral grammar, or from entering' into those subjects which have already
been so elegantly discussed by the most judicious philosopher,* the most
learned divine,+ and the most laborious scholar of the present age4
It was my first design to prefix to the grammar a history of the Persian
language from the time of Xenophon to our days, and to have added a
copious praxis of tales and poems extracted from the classical writers of
Persia ; but as those additions would have delayed the publication of the
grammar, which was principally wanted, I thought it advisable to reserve
them for a separate volume, which the public may expect in the course of
the ensuing winter. I have made a large collection of materials for a
*
See Hermes. + A short Introduction to English Grammar.
%
See Grammar prefixed to the Dictionary of the English Language.
PREFACE.
ix
general history of Asia, and for an account of the geography, philosophy,
and literature of the Eastern nations, all which I propose to arrange in
order, if my more solid and more important studies will allow me any
intervals of leisure.*
I cannot forbear acknowledging in this place the signal marks of kind-
ness and attention, which I have received from many learned and noble
persons ; but General Carnac has obliged me the most sensibly of them,
by supplying me with a valuable collection of Persian manuscripts on
every branch of Eastern learning, from which many of the best examples
in the following grammar are extracted. A very learned Professor f at
Oxford ,has promoted my studies with that candour and benevolence
which so eminently distinguish him ; and many excellent men that are the
principal ornaments of that University have conferred the highest favours
on me, of which I shall ever retain a grateful sense
;
but I take a singular
pleasure in confessing that I am indebted to a foreign nobleman
|
for the
little knowledge which I have happened to acquire of the Persian lan-
guage
;
and that my zeal for the poetry and philology of the Asiatics
was owing to his conversation, and to the agreeable correspondence with
which he still honours me.
Before I conclude this preface, it will be proper to add a few remarks
upon the method of learning the Persian language, and upon the ad-
vantages which the learner may expect from it. When the student
can read the characters with fluency, and has learned the true pronun-
*
See the History
of
the Persian Language, a Description
of
Asia, and a Short
History
of
Persia, published with my Life of
Nader Shah, in the year 1773.
f
Dr. Hunt, +
Baron Reviski.
x PREFACE,
elation of every letter from the mouth of a native, let him peruse the
grammar with attention, and commit to memory the regular inflexions of
the nouns and verbs ; he need not burden his mind with those that deviate
from the* common forms, as they will be insensibly learned in a short course
of reading. By this time he will find a dictionary necessary, and I hope
he will believe me, when I assert from a long experience, that, whoever
possesses the admirable work of Meninski,* will have no occasion for
any other dictionary of the Persian tongue. He may proceed by the
help of this work to analyse the passages quoted in the grammar, and
to examine in what manner they illustrate the rules : in the mean time
he must not neglect to converse with his living instructor, and to learn
from him the phrases of common discourse, and the names of visible
objects, which he will soon imprint on his memory, if he will take the
trouble to look for them in the dictionary
;
and here I must caution him
against condemning a work as defective, because he cannot find in it
every word which he hears ; for sounds in general are caught imperfectly
by the ear, and many words are spelt and pronounced very differently.
The first book that I would recommend to him is the Gulistan, or
Bed
of
Roses, a work which is highly esteemed in the East, and of which
there are several translations in the languages of Europe : the manuscripts
of this book are very common ; and by comparing them with the printed
edition of Gentius, he will soon learn the beautiful flowing hand used in
Persia, which consists of bold strokes and flourishes, and cannot be imi-
tated by our types. It will then be a proper time for him to read some
short and easy chapter in this work, and to translate it into his native
*
This was written before Richardson's Dictionary was published.
PREFACE.
xi
language with the utmost exactness
;
let him then lay aside the original,
and after a proper interval let him turn the same chapter back into Per-
sian by the assistance of the grammar and dictionary : let him afterwards
compare his second translation with the original, and correct its faults
according to that model. This is the exercise so often recommended
by the old rhetoricians, by which a student will gradually acquire the
style and manner of any author, whom he desires to imitate, and by which
almost any language may be learned in six months with ease and plea-
sure, When he can express his sentiments in Persian with tolerable fa-
cility, I would advise him to read some elegant history or poem with an
intelligent native, who will explain to him in common words the refined
expressions that occur in reading, and will point out the beauties oflearned
allusions and local images. The most excellent book in the language, is,
in my opinion, the collection oftales and fables called Anwari' Suhaili, by
Hussein Yaes, surnamed Cashefi, who took the celebrated work of Bidpai
or Pilpay for his text, and has comprised all the wisdom of the Eastern
nations, in fourteen beautiful chapters. At some leisure hour he may de-
sire his Munshi or writer to transcribe a section from the Gulistan, or
a fable of Cashefi, in the common broken hand used in India, which he
will learn perfectly in a few days by comparing all its turns and contrac-
tions with the more regular hands of the Arabs and Persians : he must
not be discouraged by the difficulty of reading the Indian letters, for the
characters are in reality the same with those in which ourbooks are printed,
and are only rendered difficult by the frequent omission of the diacriti-
cal points, and the want of regularity in the position of the words : but
we all know that we are often at a loss to read letters which we receive in
our native tongue
;
and it has been proved that a man who has a perfect
knowledge of any language, may with a proper attention decypher a
xii PREFACE.
letter in that idiom, though it be written in characters which he has never
seen before, and of which he has no alphabet.
In short, I am persuaded that whoever will study the Persian language
according to my plan, will in less than a year be able to translate and to
answer any letter from an Indian prince, and to converse with the natives
of India, not only with fluency, but with elegance. But if he desires to
distinguish himself as an eminent translator, and to understand not only
the general purport of a composition, but even the graces and ornaments
of it, he must necessarily learn the Arabick tongue, which is blended with
the Persian in so singular a manner, that one period often contains both
languages wholly distinct from each other in expression and idiom, but
perfectly united in sense and construction. This must appear strange
to an European reader ; but he may form some idea of this uncommon
mixture, when he is told that the two Asiatic languages are not always
mixed like the words of Roman and Saxon origin in this period,
"
The
"
true law is right reason, conformable to the nature of things, which
"
calls us to duty by commanding, deters us from sin by forbidding
;" *
but as we may suppose the Latin and English to be connected in the
following sentence ;
*
The true lex is recta ratio, conformable naturae,
"
which by commanding vocet ad officium, by forbidding a fraude de-
"
terreat."
A knowledge of these two languages will be attended by a variety of
advantages to those who acquire it : the Hebrew, Chaldaic, Syriac, and
Ethiopian tongues, are dialects of the Arabick, and bear as near a resem-
blance to it as the Ionic to the Attic Greek ; the jargon of Indostan, very
improperly called the language of the Moors, contains so great a number
*
See Middleton's Life of Cicero, vol. iii.
p.
351.
PREFACE.
xiii
of Persian words, that I was able, with very little difficulty, to read the
fables of Pilpai which are translated into that idiom ; the Turkish contains
ten Arabick or Persian words for one originally Scythian, by which it has
been so refined that the modern kings of Persia were fond of speaking it
in their courts : in short, there is scarce a country in Asia or Africa, from
the source of the Nile to the wall of China, in which a man who under-
stands Arabick, Persian, and Turkish, may not travel with satisfaction, or
transact the most important affairs with advantage and security.
As to the literature of Asia, it will not, perhaps, be essentially useful to
the greater part of mankind, who have neither leisure nor inclination to
cultivate so extensive a branch of learning ; but the civil and natural his-
tory of such mighty empires as India, Persia, Arabia, and Tartary, cannot
fail of delighting those who love to view the great picture of the universe,
or to learn by what degrees the most obscure states have risen to glory,
and the most flourishing kingdoms have sunk to decay
;
the philosopher
will consider those works as highly valuable, by which he may trace the
human mind in all its various appearances, from the rudest to the most
cultivated state ; and the man of taste will undoubtedly be pleased to
unlock the stores of native genius, and to gather the flowers of unre-
strained and luxuriant fancy.*
*
Want of encouragement, as the Author has already remarked, has made it
impossible that works of this kind could hitherto be produced to any consider-
able extent. Of late, however, a project has been set on foot, and carried into
execution, principally by the zeal and intelligence of Colonel Fitz Clarence,
by which every Oriental work of value and interest not yet published, is likely
to be brought before the British Public. See a Report
of
the Proceedings
of
the
first General
Meeting
of
the Subscribers to the Oriental Translation Fund, London,
1828. Editor.
[
xiv
]
THE EDITORS PREFACE.
Having been requested to superintend another Edition of this work.>
and having deemed it necessary to make some additions to its matter
5
as well as alterations in its arrangement, it is necessary here to state what
those additions and alterations are.
When I undertook to revise the last Edition, it appeared to me that
the application of the vowels to the Persian examples, and an abstract
of the Arabick Grammar, were absolutely necessary to insure a sound
and rapid progress in the learner. All I have seen or heard on this
subject since that period, has only tended to confirm the opinion I had
formed : and, the consequence has been, every thing then added has
now not only been retained, but augmented and in other respects
improved.
The additions made are these, viz. 1. An account of the changes
which occasionally take place in the letters. 2. Rules with appropriate
examples for the introduction of the
^
of unity, ascription
of
great-
ness, particularity,
fyc.
3. A more compendious method of deducing
the form of the Imperative and Aorist from the Infinitives of verbs, for
which I am indebted to the suggestions of an ingenious and learned
friend. 4. Some additional forms in the tables of the conjugation of
verbs, as well as in the derivation of the nouns. 5. An entirely new
tract on the Syntax, much more copious than that given by Sir William
Jones, and which, it is hoped, will be found more useful to the Student
THE EDITOR'S PREFACE.
w
6. An Introduction to the Prosody of the Persians, not more extensive
perhaps than that given originally by the Author of the Grammar, but
certainly more conformable with the usage of the Orientals, and perhaps
more easily reducible to practice. 7. A brief view of the principles
of the Arabick Syntax. This I have deemed it important to add, because
the Student will occasionally meet with entire periods of Arabick com-
position in the Persian books he may have to consult, and which he
will never be able to understand without such assistance ; and because
the Arabick and Persian Syntax will serve mutually to illustrate each
other : it being a fact that the Persians have now for some ages been
cultivating their own language upon the grammatical principles of their
neighbours the Arabians. Augmentations, too, will be found in almost
every page of the work; but those illustrative of the forms of the
Arabick nouns, triliteral and pluriliteral, may be pointed out here as the
most considerable.
The alterations made are chiefly these. 1. Instead of supplying every
vowel to the examples, as in the last edition, the system adopted by Mr.
Professor Shakespear, in his Grammar of the Hindustani, has been taken
as being the simplest and best hitherto proposed: because, as it dimi-
nishes the number of vowels to be printed, so does it also diminish
the number of errors of the press which might otherwise occur. It also
affords an opportunity for expressing the
fo
and ^b, termed
J^f*
majhul, which cannot be done in the other system ; and leads the
student in some measure towards reading without the vowel marks,
which he must sometime do.I may here remark, that although
the distinctions of
j\j
and
Jjfs^
Û just mentioned, do not appear to
be generally made in Persia, and need not therefore be regarded by
xvi THE EDITORS PREFACE.
persons who may have to reside in that country, they are nevertheless
in Hindustan, whether right or wrong is not for me to say : I have
on this account preserved them, as far as my means of informa-
tion would allow me. The learner, therefore, will be at liberty to
adopt them or not; just as he may think proper, or as his teacher may
advise.
Another alteration is a new and more literal translation of all the
examples ; another the application of numbers to all the paragraphs,
which has been done in order to facilitate reference : and another, the
removal of the Abstract of the Arabick Grammar to an Appendix, by
which the Student will be enabled to study either that or the Persian
Grammar without any interruption. In the last Edition I followed the
example of Mr. Lumsden : but, from my own conviction, as well as the
advice of some friends, on whose judgment I could rely, the present
arrangement has been adopted : and, for the sake of uniformity, the
Prosody, Praxis, and Vocabulary, form the three Appendixes following.
The works consulted in preparing this Edition have been : 1. The
elaborate and valuable Persian Grammar by Mr. Lumsden,* a work of
which the Student ought at some period to make himself perfect master
;
for, although I differ in opinion in some respects from its estimable and
learned Author, I have no hesitation in affirming, that it is the best work
on this subject, that has hitherto appeared in Europe, and perhaps in
the East itself.2. The Persian Grammar attached to the King of Oude's
Persian Dictionary, entitled the Seven Seas
[+J&
Lîfct). This work
*
A Grammar of the Persian Language, Calcutta, 1810, in two volumes, folio,
f
A Dictionary and Grammar ofthe Persian Language by his Majesty the King
of Oude, Lucknow, 1822, two volumes, large folio.
THE EDITOR'S PREFACE. xvii
contains some good remarks, with an extensive list of very valuable exam-
ples, of which I have occasionally availed myself. It also contains a good
tract on the Prosody, which appears generally to be copied from that of
Saifee,* and a very valuable and elaborate account of the different sorts
of Persian Poetry.
3. I have made the greatest use, perhaps, of a very

excellent Persian Grammar and Commentary, printed apparently at
Calcutta,t a few years ago, under the title of l-*J>jA\ jby>. **tS#a3
^j&.
The text is given in Persian verse from the pen of Shiva Ram, the Com-
mentary is by Hayder Ali. This is certainly the best Eastern produc-
tion on Persian Grammar that I have ever seen : and, although some of
its rules do not appear universally to prevail, it is highly deserving of
the attention of the Student, and I think of being reprinted, translated,
and illustrated, for the sake of Oriental Literature generally. Among
its rules, which appear not to be universal, are those copied into this
edition (at Artt. 154, 206), stating that the Izafat does not take place
before nouns ending in the L^~i ^b, and the termination dj\. This
is one of the instances in which Doctors may be said to disagree : but,
as this grammar was composed in Hindustan, it is highly probable that
these rules prevail there : I have on that account, thought it advisable
to give them. This work originally belonged to Mr. Lumsden, but is
now deposited in the Public Library of Cambridge, (under the class
marks Zz,
20,
38.) 4. Another work which I have occasionally con-
sulted, is a small Persian Grammar, written at Calcutta at the suggestion
*
A work on Prosody, of which some use was made by Mr. Gladwin in his
work on the Rhetoric and Prosody of the Persians.
f
The copy here referred to has no date or place mentioned.
d
xviii THE EDITOR'S PREFACE.
of Sir Gore Ouseley,* entitled Chihar Gulzar
(j\j&j^-).
This is a
valuable little work, and particularly in the short tract on Prosody,
which is appended to it.
5. I have also consulted the grammatical trea-

tise prefixed to the Burhani Katia (ÛS jta^), a Persian Dictionary
so called, as also a few of the Scholiasts, and the last edition of Meninski,
of which the Student will find some mention made as he proceeds. To
the remarks made on the former edition, particularly those by the Baron
de Sacy, I have paid every attention, and have adopted them, or not, as
their justness seemed to require. One of the readings, however, recom-
mended by M. de Sacy as proper to be inserted in the Praxis, namely,
1
yU- in the phrase
\y^
j^^
Jô,
to be translated,
perfuming the
sensorium
of
the Genii
Jr
I have not been able to admit; because, not
*
Printed at Calcutta in 1818.
+ Journal de S9avans for April,
1824, p.
203. There are a few other re-
marks in that critique to which I cannot accede, and which ought to be men-
tioned here
:
they are these. M. de Sacy says (at
p. 197) respecting the
Persian title found at the head of the title page,
K
II est singulier que ni W.
Jones, ni les editeurs qui lui ont succede, ne se soient aperûs qu'il falloit ecrire
L5*i>^
<jVj
y
5-
J^
et non
hf^
avec un
<-" *
remark, M. de Sacy is cer-
tainly right in stating that the
^
ought not to have appeared ;
and I confess
I am surprised that such an oversight could have been committed : still, it is
far from certain, whether even the kesrah ought to have appeared. But M.
de Sacy should have gone further : the word
jIjJ
ought not to have been
inserted :
ysT
can there mean nothing but the Syntax, 8cc. of Grammar, and
grammar can apply to nothing but language. For this reason it is, perhaps,
that jbj
j=^y
the Syntax
of
Language, never occurs in the Persian, as far as
THE EDITOR'S PREFACE. xix
only do I find no manuscript, printed edition, or even phraseology, to
sanction it, but the opinions of intelligent and learned Persians whom I
have had the opportunity to consult, directly against it.
I know : and, until I am informed to the contrary, I shall contend that M.
de Sacy left this phrase nearly as bad as he found it. But the phrase is in
other respects wrong; * is applied generally to the Syntax. To make
this title suit the work, therefore, we should have
^J^
j^j
t
*j*
j&f*
as
it has been given in this edition, and not
^j^
jVj
^J^
which is not
Persian phraseology. There is another trifling mistake in M. de Sacy's article,
which is in the measure he gives of some verses occurring in the Praxis,
(p.
ib.
202),
Gram.
p.
198. The measure he gives is ^L*liU ÂLc ^Leliu,
which will neither suit the verse in question, nor his own scansion of it as
given a little lower down ; viz. Ghulesch sira~[bi zabl zin-^\d#gham
}
where it
is impossible, as I conceive, to make deghanT, equal in measure to
^JuAs*o
9
i. e.
the quantity
w
--
equal to
"
---;
but this must be an oversight. There is
still another trifling mistake made by us both in the word^kc
(p. 203) which he
G
writes aUri, instead of it-ri,
(Jos.)
as given by Golius and the Author of the
Kamoos, and which I have corrected in this edition. We differ in one instance
more. It is the second example given at
p.
197 of the Grammar. The measure
G ^ ^ P sy G 9 *
fi ? G^
proposed by M. de Sacy is C^lcli
Ju*U^>
Îcli
J*iu,
which, I am sorry to
say, is like that proposed by myself, to be found in no treatise on the Persian
Prosody, although the verses in question may be scanned by either of them. The
proper measure is LlSheib
J.AcAi
CLJlcte
JyoU,
and is to be found in Mr.
Gladwin's work in
p. 124.
* I have in one place written, 8cc. u-ij\joj jJ,
which is not quite so good.
xx THE EDITOR'S PREFACE.
In the Arabick department, the Grammars of Mr. Lumsden, M. de
Sacy, and Martelotto, have principally been followed. The doctrine
here exhibited on the use of the tenses of the Arabick Yerb, given for
the first time in Europe in my Hebrew Grammar
(pp.
341-363) has
been taken from the native Commentators on the Arabick Grammar,
and cannot fail, it is presumed, very much to facilitate the acquisition
of that language, as also as to throw great light on the Persian, which
is cultivated on precisely the same principles.
The plates inserted in the last edition, through the kindness of Dr.
Wilkins will be found in this, with an additional one containing some
good specimens of Arabian writing, for which also he is entitled to the
thanks of the Public. With respect to myself, I will only say, that I have
spared no pains in endeavouring to render this work subservient to the
great end for which its admirable Author intended it, namely, public
utility: and, in the instances in which I may have failed (for I am
not vain enough to suppose, that the work is yet perfect) I must re-
quest the indulgence of the learned reader, assuring him, that any hint
offered either publicly or privately, by which it may be improved, will
be received with gratitude, and duly acknowledged, provided it come in
the shape and spirit which will entitle it to regard.
[
xxi
]
THE TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Of
the Letters; - . . page
1-4
Of
the Consonants,
- - -
- 4-9
Of
the Vowels,
- - - - 10-12
Of
the Orthographical Marks, - -
12-13
Numerical Values
of
the Letters,
-
- 13-14
Modes
of
Describing Letters and Words,
- - 14-17
Of
the Figures Tarkhim and Imalah, 17
Praxis on the Reading,
-----
17-20
Kinds
of
Writing,
- - -
- 20-21
Of
the Nouns,
- - - - 21-22
Of
Case,
-----
22-24
Of
Indefinite
Nouns, Nouns
of
Unity, S?c.
-
- 24-28
Of
the
ij of
Supplication, Endearment, 8?c.
-
- 28-30
Of
Numbers, - - - - 30-32
Of
Persian Attributives, - - - 33-34
Of
the Separate Pronouns,
-
- - 34-36
Of
the Possessive Pronouns, Inseparable,
tyc.
- 36-37
Of
the Reciprocal Pronouns, - -
- 37-39
Of
the Demonstrative
Pronouns,
- - 39-40
Of
the Relative Pronouns,
- -
- 40-41
Of
the Persian Verbs, - -
-
41-42
Conjugation
of
Abstract and Substantive Verbs,
-
42-49
Of
Forming the Tenses,
- - - 49-65
xxii CONTENTS.
General Paradigm Active Voice, - - page 65-69
Passive Voice, - - - 69-72
Of
the Causal Verb,
- -
- - 72-73
Of
the Composition and Derivation
of
Words,
- 74-81
Of
the Formation
of
Nouns, -
-
- 81-84
Of
Diminutive Nouns, - - - 84-85
Of
the Hasili Masdar, -
- - 85-87
Of
Nouns
of
Place, - - - - 87-88
Of
Compound Verbs, - - - 88-92
Of
the Persian and Arabick Numerals,
- - 93-95
Of
the Ordinals,
-
- - -
95-96
Persian Adverbs,
- - - -
96-97
Interrogatives,
- -
97-98
Conjunctions, Prepositions, Interjections,
-
98-100
Of
the Persian Syntax, - - 101
Of
Indefinite Nouns,
fyc.
- - - 101-104
Construction
of
the Numerals,
-
104
Of
Nouns Qualifying one another,
-
- 104-107
Of
the Comparative and Superlative Degrees,
- 107-108
.
Of
the Relative Pronouns,
- -
-
*
109
-
1 12
Of
the Subject and Predicate,

112-114
Of
the Concordance
of
the Subject and Predicate,
-
114-116
Of
the
Subject
of
Verbs,
- - - 116-117
On the
Government
of
Verbs,
-
- 118-120
CONTENTS.
xxiii
Of
the Term
of
Circumstance,
- - page 120-121
Of
the Noun
of
Discrimination,
- - 121-123
Of
Corroboration and Exchange,
- -
123
-
124
On the Tenses
of
the Verb,
- -
- 124-125
Of
the Present Tense, -
-
- 125-127
Of
the Simple Preterite,
-
-
- 127-128
Of
the Preterimperfect and Potential Tenses, - 128-130
On the Persons,
- 130-131
Of
the Particles,
- 131-132
APPENDIX I.
Ott *Ae Arabick Verbs and Nouns,
-
- 133-134
Paradigm
of
the 1st Conjugation Active Voice,
- 134-136
Passive Voice
of
the 1st Conjugation,
- - 137-138
On the Defective Verbs,
-
- - 138-140
General Paradigm
of
the Active Voice,
- 141
Of
the Passive Voice,
-
142
Remarks on the General Paradigm,
-
- 142-144
On Ababick Nouns,
...
144-145
ZVz&fe
of
Infinitives
of
-
145-147
Table
of
Pluriliterals
of
-
147-148
T6/c
of
Attributives, * 148
Ta&/e
of
Nouns
of
Excess,
- '
-
-
149
Table
of
Jamids,
... - 149
Table
of
Increased Jamids,
- -
150
Ttf&/e o/ Quadriliteral Jamids,
- - - 150
Ta^/e
of
Augmented Jamids,
-
- 151
xxiv CONTENTS.
Table
of
Quinquiliteral Jdmids,
- -
page 151
Table
of
Augmented Quinquiliteral Jdmids,
- - 151
Of
Masdars implying Unity
of
Action,
- -
151-2
Of
the Noun
of
Superiority,
-
152
Of
the Noun
of
Instrument, Time, and Place, 152-154
Of
the Noun
of
Excess,
-
154
Of
the Diminutive Noun,
...
154-155
Of
the Formation
of
the Feminine from
the Masculine Gender,
155-156
Of
the Relative Noun,
...
156-158
Of
the
Artificial Infinitive,
-
159
Of
Number,
....
159-161
Of
the Broken Plurals,
- - 161
Tables
of
Broken Plurals,
- - 162
Plurals
of
Paucity,
-
162
Plurals
of
Multitude,
-
163-165
Of
the Last
of
Plurals, - - 165-166
Of
the Declension
of
Nouns,
- - 166-168
On the Arabick Pronouns.
Of
the Separate Pronouns,
...
169
Of
the
Affixed
Pronouns,
- 169-171
Of
the Reflective Pronouns,
- 171
Of
the Demonstrative Pronouns,
-
- 171-173
Arabick Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions, Interjections, 173-175
Oh ê Arabick Syntax, - -
176
On the Combination
of
Words,
- - -
176-179
CONTENTS. XXV
The Concordance
of
the Subject with the Predicate, page 179-181
On the Objective Cases
of
Verbs, - - - 181
On the Use
of
the Tenses, -
- - 182
-
183
On the Terms
of
Circumstance and Discrimination, 183-185
Of
the Numerals,
....
185-186
Of
the Abstract Verbs, - - - - 186
Of
the Particles affecting the Terminations
of
the Present
Tense,
-
186-188
On the Passive Verb,
-
- - 188
Of
Particles Affecting
the Cases
of
Nouns,
-
188-189
Of
the Vocative Particles, - - - 190
On the Definite
Article
Jl,
- - - 190-191
APPENDIX II.
On the Persian Pbosody,
-
192
On the Quantity
of
Syllables,
-
- 192-195
On the Feet used in Persian Prosody,
-
- 195-196
On the Measures
of
the different
kinds
of
Verse,
-
196
Examples,
...
196-201
APPENDIX III.
Praxis. A Persian Fable with an Analysis,
-
202-228
Poetical and Prose Translations
of
a Persian Song, 229 -232
APPENDIX IV.
A Vocabulary with Advertisement,
- -
233-281
.
lJcs>
GRAMMAR
OF THE
PERSIAN LANGUAGE
OF THE LETTERS.
1. 1 he learner is supposed to be acquainted with the common terms
of Grammar, and to know that the Persians write their characters from
the right hand to the left.
2. There are thirty-two Persian letters.
ON THE ALPHABET.
EXEMPLIFICATIONS.
Final Final
Unconnect. Connect. Med. Init.
IV. III. II. I.
FINALS. INITIALS and MEDIALS.
Con- Uncon-
nected, nected.
\3,?r U
jV
M
L^-i
^ J
V
V
/*-
A
cl>L
u^-^ >*>
V
^JJ
ii^
J*
I? *
A
^
& r*
*4.
V
cb r
-
J*. J*
& t*
e*
>
oU &*a w
J
J
J*
ju-l^
>
r
J
> J*
/*
P
JV /
r-
jj
JK
Ji
1
,
^
ur'V lH
Jh**3
J*
J>V
U/"*J
A^.-j
i\i
Ûr
i/j
4**2J i\*Z
^jcU.
U**i
j*ar+- <xJ>
Con- Uncon-
nected, nected. Power.
A.
Name.
Oriental. English.
t TL
t C
t i
.=.
s
j"
^
A J A
J J -/
J J
J
A
A
A
/
u~ U"
MM.
A
u*
A
u* u*
1*3
u* u*
^d
J, -s
A u
1
a
J b
i
V
P
j*
t
th or s
.>.
J
V
ch
Cw h
kh
J d
J z
J
r
J
z
A
J
J
~1 s
A
sh
*> S
*e z
cJ)V
V*
or \>
^
ti
U
*
15
fSf
u5T (*r
^
u.
<>
u.
Jb
J^
<>
1;
^j y
s?
!>
o^
CK^
jU
oU
alif
ba or be
Pe
ta te
tha, the, or se
. (
jim
chim che
ha he
kha khe
dal
thai or zal
ra re
za ze
zha zhe
sin
shin
swad
zwad
ON THE ALPHABET.
IV. III. II.
EXEMPLIFICATIONS.
Final Final
FINALS. INITIALS and MEDIALS.
Con- Uncon- Con- Uncon-
Unconnect. Connect. Med. Init. nected. nected. nected. nected. Power.
(
_
SsU- or L>
JhJ
fjp
.^_.
Name.
Oriental. English.
,
A_
^W3 lais- Ja3 &
jV
Jta
S (^
u-J
a&mi
cr
4^- ^
o
L
^"
J*.2>-
r
;
L>

v
lb lb jtf
la
t
t
J
J
r r
or
1
>
t t
li z
t
i gh
i f
jf k
=> k
i
g
hard
! 1
*5 m
J n
J
v, w
& h
.
y
1 la
o
ud
to
U
cili
lib
USUI
to
zo
ain
ghain
fa fe
kaf
kaf
gaf
lam
mini
nun
waw
ha he
ja ye
lam-alif
3. The second and fourth columns of these letters, counting from the
right hand
?
are used only when they are connected with a preceding
letter ; as, &*s? Muhammad. Every letter may be connected with
l
4 ON THE ALPHABET.
that which follows it, except these seven
;
\ alif, j dal, J zal,
j
re,
j
ze,
j
je, and
j
waw, which are never joined to the following letter, as will
appear from the words L-Tj barg, a leaf; uyU>
davari, a dominion.
Though the true pronunciation of these letters can be learned only
from the mouth of a Persian or an Indian, yet it will be proper to add
a few observations upon the most remarkable of them.
OF THE CONSONANTS.
^
<_v>-
9 *
ST
4. The consonants \
,

,
and
^j,
occasionally become quiescent, as will
be explained hereafter. )
,
when a consonant, is said to be a slight as-
pirate like our h in humble, hour, #c.
j
has the power of v
9
or w
;
and
ij,
that of
y.
5. These letters, are, in words purely Persian, occasionally changed
for others : e.
g.
\ alif for
^
ye, as
J^c\
armaghan or
j\***A
yarmaghan,
a present ; so,
^
for c->, l->, and uJ
;
as, 4&JLy nawishtah or a:JLJ, a
writing ; A or
fl>
warn or pam, a debt ; *jl> or Ai\j yavah or yafah,
obscure. Alif \ too is often omitted in the beginning of words
;
as, Jj*
shikam, for Jj\ ishkam, the belli/
;
so in English, stablish or establish.
c
This alif is termed
J-*j
J.\ alifi was.l, alif of
connection. The letters,
1
, j
, and
t/,
will occasionally coalesce with the preceding vowels, so as
entirely to lose their power as consonants.
6. The letter c_> is pronounced like our own b. It will occasionally
ON THE ALPHABET. 5
change in Persian words to u_j, or
j
;
as ^lij zuban, or jlsj zufan, the
tongue; c-^3 nahlb, or
^3
nahlv,
fear.
7. The l-> has the power of our
p,
and is occasionally changed into
cJ ; as
J-w
pll, or Jui fII, aw elephant.
8. ci? is the dental of the French and Italians. Arabick nouns ter-
minating in this letter (which generally has the form if in that language,)
sometimes take silent
*,
when used in the Persian. It is occasionally
redundant, as c^-iilj for î)^, balisht for balish, a pillow.
9. lLj has the power of th in thin, but is often pronounced like s,
in sin.
10. -. has the sound of our
j.
It is sometimes changed into c^,
;
,
J
,
ij*,
or CJ: as izfijs tarat, for JjIj taraj, spoil
; y^>-
chuzah for <&>-*>-
chujah, chicken
;
fi
kazh for J> kaj, crooked
; ^JX.
kash for \ kaj,
would! cJ-*i*M or
f^H,
akhshik, or akhshij, contrary.
11. -* is pronounced like our cA in church, and occasionally changes
with
J,
j',
^jor^; as,
C*~^ pichishk, or CJ^j pizishk, c physician;
^&
kach or
j^
kazh, a pine tree
;
^^kachi, or
^Js^
kashi, a vessel, so
called
;
c/
^>- chin, or
c
~*s sin, wrinkle.
12.
^
is a very strong aspirate, and may be expressed in our charac-
ters by h (with a dot under it, to distinguish it from *), as
JU*
foal, a
condition. The letters k>
ru
a
^
l?l?9
j
occur only in words
originally Arabick.
6 ON THE ALPHABET.
1 3.
is formed in the throat, and produces that kind of inarticulate

vibration which is made in preparing to expectorate. The Germans
have the sound, and express it by ch; we use kh as its substitute; as,
^jU- khan, a lord. This letter changes into
9
, j,
or
*,
as,
g-~^
satikh
or ^x-j satigh, an arrow
/
Û.srf- chakhmakh, or jUiff- chakmak, a
Jlint ; c-Û- khak, or t-j'lfc hak, an egg.
14.
j,
answers to our d, except that it is dental ; i. e. is pronounced
with the tip of the tongue against the fore-teeth. When preceded by
a vowel, it is occasionally written and pronounced like the following J,
as *Xôr &xJ gumbad or gumbath, a tower. It is sometimes changed to
cl>, as -.\jd duraj, or ~-jJ turaj, the name
of
a certain bird.
15. j. This letter, which the Arabs pronounce like th in the word
thine, is sometimes pronounced like
J
z. For this reason, perhaps, they
write
tI/
Li3^ or
J^J>
guzashtan, to pass.
16.
j
re, has the power of our r, and is sometimes changed into
J
lam,
as JJjl\ alwand, or Xjjj\ arwand, a mountain, so called.
17.
J
ze, has the sound of our z, as
j\j
M lalahzar. It is occasionally
changed into
,-.,
y*,
or
; as
j*j
roz (or ruz), or
~.$j
roj, the day
/
j\j\
ayaz, or ^Jj} ayas, a proper name
; jij*
gurlz, or
^,j>
gurigh,
flight.
18.
j
j,
This letter has the sound of our s in the word pleasure, trea-
sure
;
and corresponds precisely with the soft
g
of the French in gens,
or
j
in jour. It may be expressed in our characters by
j
with two
ON THE ALPHABET. 7
dots, as d\j jalah, dew. It occasionally changes into ~., asjK kaj, or
~& kaj, squinting.
19.
(j-.
sin, is our s, as *^Lj salim, Salim. It changes into
*,
î,
or
**
as
^j^
khurus, or
^Jj*"
khuruj, coc#
;
te^s finstah, or Aî
firishtah, an angel
;
Û1 amas, or sU! amah, swelling.
20.
^p
shin, is pronounced like our sh, and changes into p^,or^,
as
J&
kash, or K kaj, would
;
^jlfcb pashan, or ^Wl> pachan, sprink-
ling
j
jU shar, orjL sar, a ford so called.
21. jjfl s yfl i* k t k 2. These four letters are pronounced by the
Arabs in a manner peculiar to themselves
;
but, in Persian, they are con-
founded with other letters.
^
differs little from
^
as^t) <Xa sad dar,
the name
of
a Persian book
;
and L has nearly the same sound with
CD as .kc fcitr, essence
;
a word often used in English, since our con-
nexion with India, to denote the precious perfume called otter
of
roses.
The word is Arabick, as the letters
^
and L sufficiently prove, ô and
\p differ very little from
J
;
as
^^3
Nii'ami, ê wcwze
of a poet
/
.*A>-
Khikar, the name
of
a prophet in the eastern romances.
22. 9 and j- gh. These two letters are extremely harsh in the pro-
nunciation of the Arabs. The sound of
g,
says Meninski, est vox vituli
matrem vocantis It is an extremely deep guttural, without any audible
aspiration ; but, as no letters can convey an idea of its force, we have,
in imitation of Meninski, used the Arabick form in combination with the
8 ON THE ALPHABET.
Roman and Italick characters, as in the word l-Jj&
tarab, the Arabians
;
cr
^. tayn, a fountain. As to
_,
it is pronounced something like our
hard gh in the word ghost, as aIc ghulam, a boy, a servant ; approach-
ing the sound which is produced in gargling. This letter is occasionally
changed into
jj
or L-i, as b\ ayagh, or j$l>! ayak, a cup
;
*U! ligham,
or *IJ ligam, a bridle.
23. uJ fe, has the sound of
fin fall, as
Jli
fal, an omen. It occa-
sionally changes into
j,
as *li fam, or A warn, cfe.
24.
j
kaf LL$ kaf.
J
is another ljarsh Arabick letter, sometimes con-
founded with cJ, which has the sound of our k, as jU/ or ^jUy
karman, the province
of
Carmania. It is pronounced before
j
re with
a slight admixture of i, as
j^
kiard, not kard. This letter sometimes
changes into ~ or
,
as Ûllshamakchah, or aÛU shamakhchah,
woman's breast-band
; j^
kazhkav, or
j^^
ghazhghav, o species
of
bullock.
25. L-^gaf. When l-/ has a small stroke over its upper member, or
three points above it, the Persians give it the sound of
g
in the word
gay, as jl-~if gulistan, a bed
of
roses
;
they occasionally pronounce it
with a slight admixture of i, as in the last, as
^J
guird, not gard. The
upper stroke, however is very rarely found in the manuscripts. The
letter
g,
without any mark, is its natural representative. This letter is
found to change with \ ,
<>,
~,
_,
and
J
, as ^L-fgustakh or
W
ustakh,
ON THE ALPHABET. 9
or
f
ll~J bustakh, proud
;
L-Jjt awg, or
>\
awj, the summit ; &j
gu-
lulah, or dljii ghululah, a bullet
; ^j*
sargin, or
^j^
sarkln, dung.
26.
J
lam, has the power of our / : it occasionally changes to
j
,
as
Jj
zalu, or
jjj
zaru, a leech.
27. a mini, is pronounced like our own m : it is sometimes changed
into
j,
as a\j bam, or ^h ban, an upper Jloor.
28.
j
nun, when commencing a syllable, takes the sound of our n
;
terminating one after a long vowel, it takes a scarcely perceptible nasal
sound, which may be represented by h : before L-f, and ending a sylla-
ble, this sound is quite audible, as in our word king; but, when
preceding c->, similarly situated, it is pronounced like m, as
<Jj^**j
sumbul, a hyacinth. Nun, with this nasal power, is termed a^c
jy
nunay
ghunnah.
29. * he, is a slight aspiration, as injl^ bahar, the spring; in this
case it is termed
j^<
muz
:
har, i. e. apparent. At the end of a Persian
word it is often unaspirated, as t& keh, which has the same pronuncia-
tion as the Italian che, what. In this case it is termed
(
1>- khafi, /J&ss*
I
mukhtafi, hidden, or <aisr mukhaffaf, made light. In the first case it
may be represented by h, in the second by h. When it has two dots
over it, thus if, it is pronounced as c^ t. This letter interchanges with
\
y

,
or -, as g-^> hich (or hech), or &!] ich (or ech), any
;
*L mat,
or Û maj, the moon
;
j+b hlz, or
j
tf
. hiz, a coward.
10 ON THE ALPHABET.
The Vowels. aiJ&jsL (motions.)
30. The short vowels are expressed by small marks, two of which
are placed above the letter, and one below it ; as,Lj lj c
>.*
These marks, viz.
(
' ) called &s
5
fathah, or
j'j
zabar
; (
) XjJ>
kesrah, or^jj zayr; (>) <u* z'ammah, **> zam, or
JLu
t
paysh, not followed
by either of the letters
]
9
j,
or
^,
represent the short vowels
,
',
and u
respectively
;
thus, <_-> forms the syllable ba ; <-_>, bi, (or be)
;
and, c-?,
bu. In this system, however, the consonant must always begin the
syllable. But, if t,
j,
or
<_,
be found to follow the marks (
")
fathah,
(') z'ammah, or (-) kesrah, respectively, the syllable so formed will then
be long; as \j ba (occasionally bu),f
y
bu, and
^j
bi. In this case I,
^,
and
lj,
are said to be quiescent and homogeneous with the vowels pre-
ceding them.
31. When, however
j,
or
^J,
follows fathah (') not being homogeneous
with either of them (Art. 30),
the syllable so formed will be a diphthong
;
thus,
y>
bau or baw, where aw is sounded as ow in cow,
^j
bai, where
at has the sound of i in bite.
32. When \ commences a syllable, and is accompanied by either of
*
According to Erpenius
(
) and () will, when over the last letter of words,
or over the letters
_, ;.,
ô, ô, ]&, )a
%
9,
fj
be pronounced as a open, or o
obscure, respectively : when over any other letters, the () will take the sound
ay in day
;
the
(-) the obscure o of the Dutch and Italians.
+
That is, when a
j
follows ; as,
j\j
nun or nan, bread:
but this is rarely
heard except in Persia.
ON THE ALPHABET. II
the vowel marks, the combination thus formed will be equivalent to our
a, i, or u, respectively ; as \ a, \ 1, \ vl.
33. The vowels are, in this case, often accompanied also by an ad-
ditional mark called
(
*
) Sj*& hamzah, which is only another form of
alif, as V
s
-
or
j ,
a ; t* or
'>,
i ; f , or -;, ti. Whenever a syllable is con-
cluded, and by the accidence of the Grammar it is necessary to add
another, beginning with a vowel, the hamzah
(
*
) must be prefixed, in
order to enounce such accidental vowel ; as,
$&\
bad-i, badness
;
{J
^j
ra-Is, chief, jjlj da-ud, David. In this case, the kesrah may be placed
either above or below such word, provided it be beneath the
(
* ) hamzah
;
as, ^Jj or ^jS). This mark, when softened in the pronunciation of a Per-
uJ 9 C
sian, is termed AjuLc *Xja& hamzahay mulaiyinah, softened hamza.
34. When the vowel marks are doubled thus,
(
s
) or (")
(?) (,)
they
take the sound of un, an, or in, respectively. This is called ^yJ tanwin,
or nunnation.
35. When^ or
^j
is preceded by (') z'am, or
(J
kesrah, respectively,
the first will sometimes take the sound of o, the second of ay, as in the
9
words
jjj
roz, day, and
y&
sher, a lion; where the o and ay are pro-
nounced, the first as o in rose, the second as ay in day. These sounds
9 ^
of
j
and
ij
are unknown to the Arabs, and are therefore called ^bj
j\j,
9C^
J^s?
waw and ya unknown. In the other cases they are termed
uJjjX^y or known.
12 ON THE ALPHABET.
36. The sounds to be given to the English vowels in these examples
are, a, as u in bun pun
;
a, as a in all ; u, as oo in good ; u, as oo in
boot
y
i, as i in fo'c?
y
I, as ee in gree* ; ai
9
as t in bite
y
ay, as ay in
ctey
y
and aae>, as ow in cotp.
37. There are, moreover, some cases in which the letter
j
entirely
loses its sound. This happens when it follows
,
having the vowel fathah,
(and sometimes kasrah or z'am), and is succeeded by t, which is also
followed by either l->, j
, j,j, ^, ^p, j,
^
or
*,
quiescent, (i. e. having
jo o
no vowel). In this case it is called aLjuc*jl. waway matdulah, or aUÎ ^tj
waway Ishmam : as, (Ay>- pronounced khab, not khwab, sleep
y
^l^
khan, a table. According to some the
j
is slightly sounded.
38. The mark
(
c
) called ^jL* sukun or iU^ jazmah, placed above
any consonant, shows that the syllable ends there, as ^JoSî* Sa-mar-
kaw-di, a native
of
Samarcand.
39. The other orthographical marks are medda (Îjteshdld ("),and
wa.slah
(-).
40. Medda is only another form of \ alif,* as
J!
for
J\\
an.
41. Teshdld (*) which is nothing more than an abridgment of the
* The ancient Syriac form of alif is
Vl,
which, leaving out the stroke
/j
becomes *"%
is still preserved in Medda. Hence words given in the native
dictionaries
with two alifs, as jXoll, are always found written in other books
with
\
alif and medda; thus T, which amounts to the same thing.
ON THE ALPHABET. 13
word *J* strong, shows that the consonant, over which it is placed, is
S3.?
to be doubled, as xjb turrah, a lock
of
hair.
Waslah
("*)
is only an abridged form of the word &* conjunction,
(the l lam being omitted, and the * taking the form
**
, which it
often does), is used in the Arabick only, for the purpose of connecting
the last vowel of any word, with the initial syllable of the following one :
thus, aU! C/lfcc âfaka'llah, Godforgive thee; where the fathah, with
which the former word ends, is joined by was.lah to the succeeding ! lam
;
so that the intervening \ alif becomes entirely mute, and the two words
are read as one.
42. As the vowels will not all be given in this edition, it is necessary
here to inform the reader how he is to supply them. First, every Per-
sian word will end in a quiescent consonant, i. e. a consonant followed
by no vowel. Secondly, jor
j,
following any consonant, and having no
orthographical mark, will be read as o in rose, or ay in day, respectively
;
i. e. they will stand forj or
^
majhul (Art. 35).
-
In the next place,
every consonant, (except these last-mentioned) having no orthographical
mark, will be read with a (') fathah. Sufficient exemplifications will
presently be given.
43. The letters of the alphabet have also numerical values, which are
frequently used in dates and books of science. The following arrangement
14
ON THE ALPHABET.
forms a sort of memoria technica, and gives the letters in the order in
which they are numbered.
Ox J^ 00 bO
>--
OOOO O <C> GC ^TO^Cn 4*.
00 tO i
*
xJj^j> A.S: JyS ÂX**
O^DGO
-vj
Oi Cn 4^ GO tO
i
OOO OOO OOOO COOO-vjos
OOO OOO OOOO OOOO
44, The method of combining the letters together according to their
values, as here given, is called
J^>-
4_>L^, of which the following is
an example;
.pg c 9 f b
<>
p
cc
^V. c^t" kj?J
^
j^ j^
f
j^*
*L*>-
-^^
j^
L2^.jj
c
The assemblage of every excellence, Bu f^ll
sina, in Shajat, (373
of the Higera) sprung from non-existence into life : in Shasa (391) he
studied all the sciences ; and in Takaz (427)
he bade the world fare-
well."
Lumsden's Grammar, Vol. I. page 38. For the several sorts

of composition of this kind, see the Grammar attached to the King of
Oude's Persian Dictionary,
p.
I T C.
45. As the vowels are seldom written in either Persick or Arabick
manuscripts, and as those points which serve to distinguish several of
the letters are often omitted by the transcribers, recourse has been had
to the following method, in order to preserve the correct pronunciation
of words.
ON THE ALPHABET. 15
46. When a word occurs, the true pronunciation of which it is im-
portant to retain, the writer first gives the word, and then describes every
letter and vowel in it. In the Burhani Kati_ (a Persian dictionary so
called), for instance, in the section commencing with &&, we have <jLj
<da&
^
Jld
bjlj akai
a
+L j&
*sJLi>, i. e.
"
The eighth description, on
(words with) a pointed shin \]jk) with unpointed dal (j)."
The first example given is Ai,, which is thus described
; jj*j
J^
*^
JIj. The first letter with am, the second with sukun : the word then,
is to be pointed &&, and pronounced shud.
47. We shall now notice the methods usually employed by the lexi-
cographers and scholiasts of Persia and Arabia, by which they designate
the various letters. It will be seen that several of the letters differ only
in having, or not having, points ; or, in the different position and num-
ber of the points. Those which have no points, but are similar in form
to others which have, are -
J
j ^ J
L *. These are, therefore, said
to be *U^,
'ikflx* Jîj
<fck&3
^j
or the like. Those which are similar
to others in form, but differ in having points, as
~
, &c. are said to be
Aas**, <fckj&&>>, or
J\d
42&.
48. Other letters which are peculiar to the Persians only, asy,
.,
)<i
t
,
are called ^^jli or ^.s?, i. e. Persian
;
others, which are com-
mon to both the
Persians and Arabians, are termed
^ft
or ^jS. i. e.
Arabick.
16 ON THE ALPHABET.
Those, again, which differ from others only in the number and situa-
tion of the points, as c->, c^>, lD
9
&c. may be described either by
mentioning the word of the
J^sr! (or memoria technics Art. 43,) in which
they are found, or by a description of the number or situation of the
o
s. s. s.
points
;
<__>, for instance, may be termed either
&zf\
^b, ^jb ^b, ^b
^jijC or s**-yo ^b , i. e. The ba
of
Abjad, the Arabian ba, or the ba
C^ y 9 S-
with one point. The lU may be described by ^by ei>b&^ ^b*. The clj
having two points above it, or
c>-*/S t^b,
tf/ie CD
of
the class
c^
J?
and so of the rest ; excepting uJ
j
and
*,
which are usually designated
simply by their names, or by that of the word in Abjad
y
in which they
occur.
49. The letters of the alphabet have been divided by the Arabian
grammarians into several classes. The four following only, need be
noticed in this place : viz. 1. The radical letters (<ul^). 2. The servile
(joljj). 3. The solar letters (<U~*->) ; and 4. The lunar letters (r
4j).
The radical letters, may be any letters of the alphabet ; but of these,
9 9*
those contained in the words -JjZ\&j tjX**Ju may occasionally be servile
;
that is, they may be employed in forming some part or other of the con-
jugation of the verb, or of the derivative nouns. In searching for a root,
therefore, if a word exceed three letters (generally), and one or more of
these letters occur in it, it is usual to strike them out.
50. The letters termed solar are c->, cU,
j,
J,j,
j, ^, ^p,
ô, <jo
y
ON THE ALPHABET.
IT
k
5
^
5
J
, and
^
. This distinction is to show, that when any one of
these happens to follow the Arabick definite article
J^
,
the
;
the
J
of
the article loses its own sound, and takes that of the solar letter which
follows it ; so that the solar letter is considered and pronounced as being
doubled; as
{-r
^JLli AsAsAamsu, the sun. The remaining letters of the
alphabet are said to be lunar.
Of the Figures*
t^j*
Tarkhim and aiU! Imalah.
51. By the first, a
j
may be cut off from the beginning of any word
;
as, l-^j^
for w^îj ; by the second, an \ alif, preceded by (-),
may be
read as
$
preceded by
(7),
for the mere purpose of rhyming with some
other word, as, l~*+su for u-?Ui. These take place only in poetry.
52. I would advise the learner not to study the parts of speech until
he can read the Persian characters with tolerable fluency, which he will
soon be able to do, if he will spend a few hours in writing a page or two
of Persian, in English letters (following the system of orthography used
in the following example), and restoring them after a short interval to
their proper characters by the help of the alphabet. In reading, he
should be careful not to take more than one syllable at a time, which he
will easily do by observing where the () sukun is placed. I shall now
close this section with a piece of Persian poetry written both in the
18
OF THE FIGURES.
Asiatick and European characters : it is an ode by the poet Hafiz 5
a
translation of it will be inserted in its proper place.
9 9 b o c /<<
Agar an turkay Shirazi badast arad dilay mara
Bakhalay hindavish bakhsham Samarkan-do Bukharara.
L^-JL>
fj^^
1
LÔc*- jb>
t
Js\j
^jC
JsLi
XAJ
* / c <*? 9 c 9
Bidih saki ma-ay baki kih dar jannat nakh'ahi yaft,
Kana-ray
a-bay ruknaba-do gulgash-tay musallara.
it
s LP yCy C C9 9
\jU*
g\ J&J
*
J3
j\jf
JJJyJ jU*-
Fighari kin luliya-nay sho-khay shiringa-ray shahr ashub
Chunari burdandi sabraz dil kih turkari kh'a-ni yaghmara.
o
Zi Ush-kay natama-may ma jama-lay ya-ray mustaghnist
Ba abu ran-gu kha-lu khatt chih hajat ro-ay zibara.
CO ^ Cx- 9 <* 9 *
+ 9 o 1,
9 9
O
OF THE FIGURES.
19
Hadlthaz
mutri-bu may go wa ra-zay dahray kamtar jo
Kih kes
nag'shu-do
nag'shayad bahikmat in mufcammara.
JuJta &&\*
-*-ji
^
<#/*'
JJ^ cr*^ J
1
Li' c/*
Manaz an hus-nay roz-afzuri kih Yusuf dashti danistam
Kih dshkaz pardah-ay tismat birun arad zulikhara.
O O ? S 9
ceo ^ ,
Nasihat goshay kun jana kihaz jan dostitar darand
Jawana-nay saCadatman-day pan-day pi-ray danara.
''
o C"
UU*- X&
J*l
c-^S
îy**
jf*
mU*-
Badam gufti wa khursandam tafakallah niku gufti
Jawa-bay tal-khay mizibad la-bay lat-lay shakar kh'ara.
Ghazal gufti wa durr sufti biya u khush bakh'ari hafifc
Kih bar naz-may to afshanad falak tikday thuraiyara.
53. In this specimen of Persian writing the learner will observe a few
combinations of letters, which he must by

no means forget ; the most
difficult of these are formed with
-,,,-,
or
,
which have the singular
20
OP THE FIGURES.
property of causing all the preceding letters to rise above the line,
/
*
c
..
as
\JJ.
bukhara, j*sF? nakhchir,
^^
tahih. The letters that precede
1%
m, are also sometimes raised. And, as the vowels are here applied
according to the rules of prosody, he will find a few vowels lengthened,
as well as some contractions made, not hitherto accounted for. In future
examples the prosody will be disregarded. Some of the contractions,
however, should be explained ; *
,
for example, is often pronounced
in connection with the preceding word, asj jcj,**} samarkan-do; for
which, perhaps, no better reason can be given than, that facility of
pronunciation requires it to be so. The \ in jl, also receives its vowel
from the preceding word ; because it has no proper vowel of its own.
In this case \ is called the conjunction alif. (Art.
5.)
54. The Arabick characters, like those of the Europeans, are written
in a variety of different hands ; but the most common of them are, the
^^csr^ Niskhi, the
J^Jju
Tatlik, hanging, or common place
;
and the
C
<&~X& Shikestah, or broken. Most books are printed in the Niskhi
hand, and all Arabick manuscripts, as well as many Persian and Turkish
histories, are written in it ; but the Persians write their poetical works
in the Tatllk, which answers to the most elegant of our Italick hands.
As to the Shikestah, it is very irregular and sometimes very inelegant
;
it is chiefly used as the cursive hand for business and correspondence
:
OF THE NOUNS, &c.
21
but this hand, however difficult and barbarous, must be learned by all
men of business in India, as the letters from the Princes of the country
are seldom written in any other.
OF THE NOUNS, ull
and First of Genders,
u****.
55. The reader will soon perceive with pleasure a great resemblance
between the Persian and English languages, in the facility and simplicity
of their form and construction
;
both have no difference of termination
to mark the gender, either in substantives or adjectives : all inanimate
things are neuter ; and, animals of different sexes, either have different
names, as
^~j
pisar, a son, a boy
;
j+!s
kaniz, a girl
; lJ^>\
asp, a horse
/
jbjU madiyan, a mare
;
or are distinguished by the words
y
nar, male,
and * jU madah,/ema/e
;
as
y
j+J* sheray nar, a lion
;
ajL
j+& sheray
madah, a lioness
;
these particles, however, are usually applied to irra-
tional beings.
56. Arabick words indeed are often made feminine by receiving a
silent
(
i> Art. 29) final
*,
as jjlx* ma&shuk, a friend; amicus, tij^**
matshukah, a mistress
;
arnica, as in this verse :
The rose in my bosom, the wine on my palm, and the beloved is to my
desire.
57. But, if such noun do not signify a rational being, they consider it
22 OF THE NOUNS, &c.
as neuter, and change the final * into cu, and drop the
(
ff
) tanwin, as
S o c
<U*j niynatun, a
benefit,
ij^sAxj : and, indeed, nouns ending in <Jl>, are,
for the most part, borrowed from the Arabs.
Of Case, c->\j&\
58. Persian nouns have no variety of termination corresponding with
the cases
"
of European Grammars ; but, when it is necessary so to
construe them as to give a sense equivalent to these cases, we may either
use a particle, or add the vowel kesrah to the preceding word. This
kesrah is generally termed
^Ju^y
*&j~, the kesrah of description.
59. An equivalent to a nominative will stand in need of no such ad-
dition. A genitive will be obtained, either by adding the kesrah, as
above, or by using a particle, as \ (\>-
&j*
marday khuda, a man
of
God
;
or
j\
\\ L&h*-
khatamay az zar, a seal
of
gold
;
where
j\
is equivalent
to
of
or out
of:
or
^j
^l-^J aspra zln, the horse''s saddle
;
where
\j
is
equivalent to to, or
for.
60. But if the preceding word end in silent
*,
( Art. 29 ) kesrah, when
added, must receive the soft hamzah ( Art. 33
)
as
^y^
*<UJL>- chashma-
ay haiwari, the fountain
of
life. If, however, such word terminate in
the aspirated s ( Art. 29
),
then the kesrah will be added, as before :
b
e.
g.
jLcb
*j
rahay baghbari, the path
of
the gardener.
61. If the preceding word end in either t,j, or
^,
quiescing in its
homogeneous vowel, respectively (Art. SO), the soft hamzah will also be
OF THE NOUNS, &c. 23
used, but will be followed by the
Jj^s*
^l> (Art. S5
)
o?-jt^ <J^J*
maywaha-ay shirin, sweetfruits
;
a
*>
\j^j
ru-ay man, myface ;
W
L
^-J
naykl-ay khuda, the goodness
of
God. But, if
j
have a
(
'
) fathah pre-
ceding, or be doubled, the kesrah will be added as before (Art. 59),
e.
g.
U-i
j)^
partaway shuma, yowr light. But
^,
in this case, will re-
ceive hamzah; as,
?2\f
' r*c ma-ay bakl, the remaining wine.
62. The force of a dative case may be given, either by prefixing the
particle & bah, to,
for,
&c. or, by adding
\j
ra ; as,
^
aj , or, more
usually, j~+i bapisar, or \jj~i, pisarra, to, ox
for,
the hoy.
63.
That of an accusative, by adding
\j
only ; as,
)jj^
,
the boy,pue-
rum* In this case the particle^* is sometimes also prefixed
;
as,
\sj\j*
*&>& mar ora didam, I saw him. Of this, more hereafter.
64. A vocative is made either by placing
^1
ay before any word,
Ox-
or poetically, by adding
\ alif : e. g.^w
_?!
ay pisar, or
^
pisara, O
boy. The following is an example from Safcdl
:
JSnwg, O Nightingale, the tidings
of
spring;
leave the bad news to
the owl.
The next is from Hafiz
:
.
JL&
*
J&,
Jf
JL,
HaU
* ** * " *
*'
Cupbearer, bring the wine,
for
the season
of
the rose is come, that we
may again break four vows of) repentance in the midst
of
the roses,
Hafiz,
thou desirest, like the nightingales, the enjoyment
of
the
rose : make ( thy ) soul the ransom
of
the dust
of
the path
of
the
garden-keeper
of
the rose.
1 shall in this manner quote a few Persian couplets, as examples of
the principal rules in this Grammar ;
such quotations will give some
variety to a subject naturally barren and unpleasant, will serve as a
specimen of the Oriental style,and will be more easily retained in the
memory than rules delivered in mere prose.
65. An equivalent to the ablative case will be formed by placing the
particle
j\ ,
from, by, &c. before any noun
;
as,
j~j
j\ ,
from
the boy.
i Of Words that are Indefinite, Expressive of Unity,
Greatness, &c.
66. Persian nouns being, for the most part generic, and being defi-
nite in their significations, may be made indefinite, or to express unity,
by adding the
J^^
10
i^V.
(Art. 35.) Example of the first case :
9 O O 9 C
(On) A morning I went into the garden that I might pluck a rose
;
suddenly the voice
of
a nightingale came to my ear.
Of the second, or unity.
For, one vexation (only) upon the mind
of
Kings,
Desolates the happiness
of
a (whole) world.
67. Without this
<_?,
such words would either remain definite or take
their generic signification ; as,
J
JM\ J>j
\jSi.
^
Call
for
the wine, and scatter the flowers.
68. If, again, any noun be first introduced in the indefinite form, and
be again referred to, it will then retain its original form ; as,
&c. X&j> ^JaJ ^blJ
*Jj lA^J^
***!
l^^*^ is*teJ*
A certain Darvesh arrived at A-place ..... the Darvesh having
traversed the way
of
the desert, &c.
69. If, however, any qualifying word be added, this
^
need not be
used; as,
*Jui-l \jjfj\j *Udb
/ ât>e foard
0/ ê sow o/* a King.
Q6 OF THE NOUNS, &c,
c
Here the word sb>jb qualifies the word*j]j, which therefore becomes
definite to a certain extent.
3- C GO
70. Nearly allied to this, is the xj&\ ^b,
v****^'> (jî^** ijt^y
^?
b
and uâ*^ ;
for, if we can suppose unity to intimate any thing rare or
uncommon, we can also suppose it to intimate, notability
',
peculiarity,
greatness, smallness, endearment, reverence, or the like
:*
and such
seems to be the character of the examples usually given under these
heads,
i-
1st. Xj\*A ^b THE
\J
OF INTIMATION.
Pu s- $
71. This also is a
J^-s-"
t^b, and is sometimes termed i^Jl* ^b,
the
yj of
description, at others, the jam ^b *ê occult
^j9
and then
said to be equivalent to the word jt , that, such,
fyc.
It is always fol-
lowed somewhere in the sentence by & that, which is then termed
.-*Ju uJKj ê u/ o/" explanation. This
^
may be attached to nouns
either singular or plural :Example with a noun singular :
/ o o o
The remembrance
of
such a meeting, (or of the meeting is such) that
* So the Arabick noun of unity <ulc, a singularly learned man; <LJo-, a
peculiar mode
of
sitting.
the heart has been unmindful
of
absence : between this desolated body,
the wall (of partition) remained not.
With a noun plural
:
e>^! fLa\
<Xa'sL< <uLfi i^jiyc && /j>bj-
Relations such, that upon them (our) original object depends.
In the first case, A meeting so singularly happy,
fyc.
; in the second,
Relations so uncommon, or singular, that, 8?c.
Of THE **&*J
j (J^f^S
c$b,
THE
^
OF PARTICULARITY, AND OF
ASCRIPTION OF GREATNESS.
9 O
72. This
ij
will, like the preceding
J^s^
5
?
be attached to nouns
either singular or plural ; as,
o 9
The [particular) garment which women put on their heads*
With a plural noun
:
c to
Upon the whole
of
those (particular, or great), Imams, who carried on
religious warfare, may the mercy
of
the true (
God
)
flow.
OF jJLsi ^b THE DIMINUTIVE
t_.
Example
:

Where, according to the King of Oude's Grammar, the
^j
attached
c s- G
4
S-
to the first word, is the ++iax> ^b; that to the last, the^.si cjb. The
translation will, therefore, be;
A great hawk hunts a little fly.
OF THE \SJ Û, THE
u?
OF SUPPLICATION, AND THE
{^*>j
t/V.

THE ^5
OF ENDEARMENT.
f o
The
^5
is, in each case, u-i^ô (Art. 36). In the first, it is found
attached to one word only; viz. *H,
GW. Example of the first
:
^ ^
(Gracious) God ! open ôw ê #wc? o/* Aojse.
Of the second :
Light
of
(my) eê
/*
o s.
73. Besides the uses of
^
here enumerated, we have also the u^~) ^l>>
the Jjlj
^.5
the cîUt ^b, the ^Jus* ^b, an^ tne
^^ t-*V/
74;. The c^-s-J ^b, or
_$ of
relation, is nothing more than the Ara-
bick patronymic, of which some account will be given hereafter.
75. It may be necessary here to state, that this
^j
is lJjjX* (Art.
36)
;
*
Some analogy may perhaps be perceived between this and the English
Deary, Tommy, and the like.
OF THE NOUNS, &c.
29
and, that it will be retained in the construction termed l^sW
;
as,
_$jJb
jj*,
an Indian man : but, in this case, the first word will not
take kesrah (as in Art. 59) : and, that after the silent
*,
(Art. 29),
it is
sometimes represented by hamzah; as in the word te~j,
embroidery
;
*<&~j , belonging to embroidery
;
at others, it changes the * into lS;
as, djU-, a house
;
^pl^j belonging to a house.
76. The dj\j ^b has no vowel, and is found attached to words end-
ing in \ or
j
quiescent, for the sake of euphony only; as, U- or
<_5^,
9 9 CO 9 t
a "place ;
\jw> or
ls\&^,
God;
^J^^-.
for UJ~, forgive;
^
or
<_}*?
tor, &c.
77. The l^JUJ
f\i
has been noticed in Article 59. The
^
x<*c ^b
and u^-oU, will be noticed hereafter.
78. It must be remembered, that, in all these cases, whenever the pre-
ceding word ends in any quiescent or silent letter, hamzah must be used
9 h 9 9
9 s. O
before this
^s%
as,
U&-,
God,
<J>\&>~;
jj,
the
face, tijj;
&\, uJ^
?
bad,
badness
;
except in the case of silent * where L-f happens to take its
place. (See Art. 75.)
79. Any word ending in silent *
,
and receiving
^
by *, and coming
before
c^J ,
will require that this word be written \^~*A
,
taking the
C O
vowel of the preceding word ; as, c^wl *ukiT aftabah-ayst, there is a
vessel.
30 OF NUMBERS.
*
9 S.
80. We often find mention of a JjU ^b, #
^ of
the
first
person, in
the native Grammars ; as in
^&
A3 ,
my place
of worship ; meaning
s
9
my father.
Where
$
is supposed to have this
power; so,
^16
\**>
9
o
fi
U * 9
my only deity
;
'mL<>, my friend
; ^j^jj]^,
my Lord, &c.
OF NUMBERS, ftS&f.
81. The Persian plural is formed by adding
jl or lfc to the singular
:
bat these terminations are not wholly arbitrary ; on the contrary, they
are regulated with great precision. The names of animals generally
form their plural in jl ; as,
lSgurg, the wolf
^l^fgurgan, wolves.
L-i> palang, the tiger.
Jî
palangan, tigers.
82. But, words which signify things without life, make their plurals
for the most part by adding the syllable l&> ; as,
Jb
bal, the wing. \^Jb balha, wings.
J.>-Li
sahil, the shore. lÛ-U sahilha, shores.
Both these
plurals occur in the following
elegant distich :
* 9 6 9 0>
Tê wigfa 15 dark
;
the
fear
of
the waves, and a whirlpool, so dreadful
!
How should those, who bear light burdens on the shore,
know our situation ?
OF NUMBERS. 31
83. There are, however, a few exceptions to these rules : the names
of animals sometimes make their plurals in la>, as well as in
^\
;
as,^xS-
shutur, a camel ; \it>jxZ shuturha, and ^Sj^Z. shuturan,, camels
;
and, on
the other hand, the names of things sometimes have plurals in
^\
,
as
c-^1 lab, a lip
;
jU! laban, lips,
84. Substantive nouns, or attributives used as such, ending in \ or
j,
form their plurals in ^b
;
as, \}\6 dana, a learned man; j\\i\d danayan,
learned men
;
jjljy,
fairy-faced, pi.
. cAtjjitji*
Those which end in
silent s, signifying rational beings, are made plural by changing that
letter into ^l^,
as &*g, bachah, an infant;
J&.
bachagan, infants
;
sometimes written separately ; as, tlLjS farishtah, an angel
;
Îf i^Ljt
farishtah gaii, angels.
But if such word end in the aspirated
*,
(Art.
29),
the termination
^\
G C
or \i&, will be regularly added; as, *lijt
?
the king
;
jUl^jb, kings;
o
If, however, a noun signifying any thing irrational end in silent
*,
this letter
will be rejected in forming the plural; as, <tfU-, the house
;
l#iU-,
houses.
85. In some modern Persian books, as the life of Nadir Shah, and
others, the plural often ends in iu\
;
or, in cpU, if the singular has a
silent final *.
32
OF NUMBERS.
Sing. Plur.
utyy
nawazish, a favour,
cAfcjIy nawazishat, favours.
<ulji kaltah, a ctfsJ/e. cÛ*^ kaltajat, castles.
which may, perhaps, be considered as attempts to imitate the feminine
x
plural of the Arabs, which ends regularly in c^l.
86. It must not be omitted, that Arabick substantives frequently haye
two sorts of plurals ; one formed according to the analogy of the Persian
G-x
nouns, and another after the irregular manner of the Arabians ; as, <-*-&
<<<
h xx
<*
fcayb, a vice; \*+z caybha and L^ly: tawa-ib, vices ;
A*Ji kaltah, a
castle; l^Ji kaltaha and %U kilafc, castles; c-ôli na-ib, a viceroy;
plur. i>\y
nuwwab, a Nabob. This may be termed a plural of respect.
c
So \jbjj\
,
serpents, for, a great serpent, in the Persick. We occasionally
Gx
have the Arabick dual termination,
^
9
as well as those of the plural
^
and
^
; even when the composition is not purely Arabick ; as, ^JW-,
both sides
;
^â or ^sfL, holy men. This is one argument out of
a great number to prove the impossibility of learning the Persian lan-
guage accurately without a moderate knowledge of the Arabick
;
and, if
the learner will follow my advice, he will peruse with attention the Ara-
bick Grammar of Erpenius, before he attempts to translate a Persian
manuscript.To avoid the trouble and expense of referring to that
work, an abstract of the Arabick Grammar has been inserted in the first
Appendix of this.
OF PERSIAN ADJECTIVES, &c.
33
Of Persian Adjectives or Attributives, cÛ*?.
87. The Persian adjectives, when used as such, i. e. for the purpose
of qualifying other words, admit of no variation, except in the degrees
of comparison. The positive is made comparative by adding to it
y,
and superlative by adding
^
p
;
as, i_.^ khub,
fair
;
jî^ khubtar,
fairer
; ^.Ju^
khubtarln, fairest. Arabick attributives, when applied
to the Persian language, frequently form the comparative and superlative
degrees in the same manner ; as, ^^s^c
, difficult
,
JS
u-*^^, more
diffi-
cult;
a
ijj
c-^*<*?, most
difficult.
These are termed
Ju*a&?
j\a~>\.
88. But, when these attributives are to be construed as substantives,
which is often the case, they form their plurals just as the substantives
do: e.
g. lJw ^tay, or
,^-j,*
will signify good men. The same
holds good with compound epithets; as,
<jV..?J ^fji
> ê
fairy-faced
(ones). This is also the case with the demonstrative pronouns
J\
9
that
3
and
^1,
fAi*.
89. Our ^w, after a comparative, is generally expressed by the pre-
position
j\
az; as,
*
So in the English, a good tnan, or good men
;
but, when good is used as
a substantive, we say, in the plural, goods.
34 OF THE SEPARATE
PRONOUNS.
?
The whiteness
of
thy
face
(is) more splendid than the cheek
of
day :
the blackness
of
thy locks (is) darker than the darkness
of
night.
O
9 $.9 C
9
^^^3f JziJ y t-?JJ
<Jj
0**>}*J #b
L^-)jj\ y>ys-A
y
*
<Jj
e^^sjjsij
j^
TOe moow is beautiful, but thy face
is more becoming than it; the
cypress is pleasing, but thy shape is more pleasing than it.
Examples of attributives used as substantives :
9 i
(The damsels with)
faces like fairies, are dejected at that cheek
;
the
jessamine-scented (nymphs) were disconcerted at that curl.
OF THE SEPARATE PRONOUNS,
tLsZ>
J\<u.
90. The Personal Pronouns are the following:
First Person, ACzsqj+a*.
y*i man, /.
Sing,
^j*
man, /. Oblique, \j*c mara, me.
Plur. U ma, we. IjU mara, us.
OF THE SEPARATE PRONOUNS. 35
Second Person^ c-^kUr*
^*^.
y
to, thou.
9
Sing.
y
to, thou. Obi.
\jy
or
\j
t5ra, thee.
? 9
Plur. jb" tan, or U.S- shuma, yow or ye.* \j\aJ shumara, you.
Third Person^ c-^jU^-u^.
j\
o,
^j
wai, or
^
oy, ê.
Sing.^1 o,
^1
oy,
]
Obi.
^
ora,
]
or
^
wai,
J or
L>4&
waira
Plur, îUj! ayshari,]
\
ylL>\ ayshanra,]
Ithey.i Uhem.
or jU, shan, J or
\jj&
shanra,
J
Examples
:
o o ^ o
jU^XAJ Ju/j JtfjJ***
o c- It 9
I went, and beat their brains
;
I made their beautiful faces
void
of
form.
*
jl> U and ^jUUA ,
are sometimes found as plurals of the pronouns of the
first and second persons, but never in any good author.
+ Occasionally, but rarely jlwjl, which, however, is used only when the
persons spoken of are absent.
ÛjJ
is perhaps a compound of Â
and jll
;
d&j\
of
j\
and
J&.
36
OF THE POSSESSIVE
PRONOUNS.
When the
world-possessing king showed his face,
(the general) kissed
the ground, and went before him, Firdausi.
91. After the preposition l_> in, the letter j is sometimes inserted to
prevent the hiatus, asjjj bado, for^ta ba-o, to him
;
the same may be
observed of
J\&s
badan, for jU ba-an, to that
/
^Jj badin, for ^b
92. The Possessive Pronouns are the same with the personals, and
are distinguished by being put after their substantives
;
or, they may be
represented by the forms *
or *1,
c^ or CD),
J*
or
^1,
respec-
tively; as,
a\ <uU- my garment, or J<J, or^
J
J, my /?ear.
cj! iU.
^y
garment, or
l^^j
or
y J
J
>
*A?
tor*
^
<ul> to, &c. or
jjjj,
or
j^
Jj
dili 5,
or
^ J
J, to or her heart.
Plur. lc
\J^*<>
our hearts.
jl; or Ui-
u^j,
jôw hearts.
^li, or ÛjI
c/^j
ê* r hearts.
It will be seen, that the occurrence of the silent * in some cases, occa-
sions an
alif
being prefixed to these pronouns : this is done for the
OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 31
purpose of enouncing the vowel proper for the pronouns, which the silent
x is incapable of doing.
The latter forms never occur in a separate state. With nouns, there-
fore, they must necessarily be possessives
;
with verbs, objective cases
;
and they may then be followed, if necessary, by the particle
\j,
(See
Art. 63).
93. These pronouns may be joined to any word in the sentence which
the poet finds convenient ; thus, in the following couplet, the pronoun
(Ju
it, is added to
JljJ
;
and in the next distich, c^ thee, is placed
after the conjunction
gar,
if
Joy (be to) Shiraz and its incomparable situation ! O Lord, preserve
it
from
decay!
CO C 9 ,. c
Tinge the sacred carpet with wine,
if
the senior
of
the magicians bid
thee
;
for the traveller should not be ignorant
of
the rule and cus-
tom
of
the inns.
C 9 h>
Reciprocal Pronouns, dJsJL*
j\*a.
94. Our reciprocal
pronouns own and self
are expressed in Persian
38 OF THE RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS.
by the following words, which are applicable to all the persons and
sexes ; as,
Nom. khud, Jj>- or
(j^j^
c
khlshtan, ^îi^ or jLy
or yt
Thus we may use
*j*
o*>
1 myself.
6y
y
, thou thyself.
9
j*>-
j\
, he, his or herself
Oblique,
\>cf^^
or
[>lM^
j>j>- L, aye ourselves.
9 9
4y>- U-S
,
you yourselves.
^P~ C>
. ?
ê
y
themselves.
&
is also joined, like the Latin ipse, to every person of a verb ; as,
Plur.
*f&<*\
df>-
ipsi venimus.
jjiXoT Jj tptf venistis.
Jjj^t j^. ipsi verierunt.
Sing.
.?
.?
^J^T J*s- epse venisti.
9
J^T J*>- 2^56 tJe/2^.
Example :
9U9 09
Dost thou know what that early nightingale said to me ? (as to)
"
You yourself, what man are you, that you are ignorant
of
love
?"
When t3j>. is used as a pronoun possessive, it answers to the Greek
T(j)rs0-, and signifies my, thy, our, your, his or her, and their,
OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 39
according to the person and number of theprincipal verb in the sentence,
as in this couplet of Hafiz
;
9 s- o s o
' S * *s
b^
C
J U^h) {*<$ <J?
LT^
(As to) a confidant
of
the secret
of
(my) own afflicted heart, I perceive
not the person to be (either)
of
the nobles, or the populace.
95. The Demonstrative Pronouns, *>U>! iÛJ, are the following:
^
in, this.
c
Sing.
^J
this. Oblique cases.
\j}j\
Plur. j\uj\ these, (rational beings.)
|yW
or \#j\ (irrational.)
or \j\Â
j\
an, that.
Sing.
j\
that.
Oblique cases. lyT
Plur. jl3! those, (rational beings.)
IjUT
%*

or lyt (irrational.)
or l^T
When
gfi
in, is prefixed to a noun, so as to form one word, it is fre-
quently changed into
p\
im
; as, c-^JLcl imshab, to night.
v^JL1 ^jIjJj
J^f\j
jôT t&
May God be exalted! What
fortune have I to night!
for
this night
is my beloved come unexpectedly
!
40
OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
Ci
and
jj<<\
imroz, to-day
;
o c ^ ; Oy
y4 efay
of
mirth and joy, and the holy-day
of
the fast
is this day :
the desire
of
the heart (is) obtained
/
and times are to (my) wish
to-day.
96. The words <jl and
JTji,
prefixed to pronouns personal, change
them into possessives, and are read with a short vowel,
yj\
ani to, or
y
&\ j\
az ani to, i. e. thine
;
as,
9 coo c
Moow
of
Canaan ! (O Joseph), the throne
of
Egypt is thine !
97. The relatives
(J^*^
Û^), and interrogatives (JÛ Û-ol),
are supplied by the invariable pronouns && keh and &>- cheh, of which
the former usually relates to persons, and the latter to things : in the
oblique cases of these pronouns the final and silent
*,
is absorbed before
the syllable
\j
;
as,
Norn. t& who. Oblique.
\
whom.
te>- which. \
j*- which.
98.
i$
kl and
^j>-
chi, are interrogatives, and are very often joined
to the verb i^l*d , as
o~~
who is it ?
o
^>- ^0 m *7
OF THE PERSIAN VERBS. 41
<-; ;
o t
O heaven ! whose precious pearl, and whose inestimable jewel, is that
royal moon-faced, venus-foreheaded (damsel) ?
\<& kudam (properly which, whether ?) is also an interrogative pro-
noun
;
as,
C fi G O J> O
Wine-bibers, wanton and dissolute are we, and with open eyes
;
but,
who is that person in this city, who is not so ?
99. Our soever is expressed in Persian by
Jt>
har, or ^lyb haran, pre-
fixed to the relatives ; as,
aj& or jj\j&
whosoever.
<t>--J& or Asil^Jb whatsoever.
OF THE PERSIAN VERBS,
JUit.
100. The Persians have active
(od^), and neuter
(f}\
verbs like
other nations
;
but many of their verbs have both an active and neuter
sense, which can be determined only by the construction. They have
also a species of derivative verbs, which may be termed causals, (also
^SxXo)
. These verbs have properly but one conjugation, and only two
42 OF THE PERSIAN VERBS.
changes of tense, the aorist, and the preterite; all the other tenses
being formed by the help of the particles
^
nil or ^te harm, and the
auxiliary verbs ^^l^Sb hasten, or ^dg budan, to be, and ^JLo^ kh'astan,
to desire, will, or be willing. The passive voice is formed by adding
the tenses of the substantive verb jw\.l shudan, to the participle preterite
of the active ; as, <x> *jJlyJ kh'andah shud, it was read. The inflexions
of these auxiliaries will be here exhibited.
*
uJî* jjwa^) variable masdar, or Infinitive
^jjj
budan, to remain,
or 6e.
101. The present tense of this verb is irregular, but very easy
;
it
should be carefully remembered, as it is the model for the variations
of
persons in all tenses.
Indicative Mood, Present Tense,
JU-
*&kxa.
Sing. Plur.
J am, / am. +A aym, we were.
*
or
J
I, thou art. Jol ayd, ye are.
s
*>
O O
>\ ast, he is. jj\ and, they are.
*
If this infinitive be formed upon a word taken from any other
language, as
jJuJi?, to seek, from the Arabick word L-Ji, to request, it is then termed
^1*5*. jJu^^c, aw artificial infinitive.
This tense joined to nouns, pronouns, or adjectives, often coalesces
with them, and then loses the inital short \ alif : e.
g.
with pronouns.
Sing.
fi~o
manam, ego sum.
^jy
to I, . tu es.
c^-jjI ost, ille est.
102.

With adjectives,
ajl& shadam, I am glad.
^jl^ shadi, thou art glad.
i^-olSi shadast, he is glad.
Plur.
*;Jl< maaym, nos sumus.
x.jU^ shuma-ayd, vos estis.
<xJU.jJ ayshanand, Mi sunt.
wjb- shadaym, we are glad.
<x> jll shadayd, you are glad.
Jujll shadand, they are glad.
is
103. The negatives are formed by prefixing ti nah or
^
na ; as, a\ ti
,
or *J, / am wo, &c. but <*^s! *3 is commonly written
e>
^
, #
o
/
as,
o o c
O GO G/*_ f C/v_
7%e jralA o/ fot>e m .?#c# jÂ to 27 âs wo boundary : there,
except that (men) g?ue wp Ae sow/, is no remedy. Hafiz.
104. Present
tense
JU
of the defective verb, ^p-Jfc hasten, to be
i
remain, ox exist.
44
OF THE PERSIAN
VERBS.
Sing.
Plur.
t*
c
* *z~Jt> I am.
(*r-~&
we are.
(juJ* ôw art.
JujLj& you are.
C C c
*
e^w& ê 2S. j^JuJi êy are.
Simple Preterite, jiL* Û.
^
Jjj
J was.
>jjy
aye zyere.
t^Jjj
tfôw owsJ.
*ty)j ^
ow zyere.
jjj
he was.
^^
ê
^
&yere.
C C
S-
Preterite Imperfect, ^yiJUt Û or -Uj.
ôJ^j or aJjJ j^c,
t/^jJ or
t^^
^j*,
-5^
or
^
l5*?
&c*
.e.
Compound Preterite, t-ô>> Û.
Sing. Plur.
m\
*j>jj / have been.
J\ *l>*j we have been.
^J\
xjj or *#jjj 2Aow hast been. jl>1
*jjj
j/ow ^#ae 6eew.
e>**1 *j>jj
ê /?as 6eew. Jul
&ty
they have been.
*
The difference between this verb and *\
,
(Art. lOl), is, that this signifies
/ exist) whereas the other is mostly used as the logical copula, to connect the
extreme terms of a proposition, as also to form the preterite tenses of other
\erbs, &c.
OF THE PERSIAN VERBS.
45
Future, JjJiJL~*.
Sing.
Plur.
4jt *b\j. I will be.
ty *?*V"
we wi
^
be-
>
p
ty
^Jb^ thou wilt be. Jjj xj&^> you will be.
j^j
dd&^ Ae tetf// be. Jj) *x*fe^ Mey aoi7/ be.
Imperative,
^1,
or Precative, t^lct).
s9
J*\j ^c, or *-lb, or
*jj
/e me &e. *^-*b
^
or
f^-*b
^ w5 ê*
y 9
jjib
^,
or /^b, or
jj
6e Aow.
*V*b
<_*>
or
*V*^
ê
y
e%
jy&U
j<,
JulU , dLf,
^jb or jb /e fam 6e. du*b
^,
or JOwlb /e jAew be.
Subjunctive, or Aorist, jUu.
r
^,or^b,l ôr^bJ
'
r 1 be, or may be.
' l
f
ape be, may be, &c.
or
a->Vl5*J
or
ft^b^J
j,
/
^L.*^, or ^b, ^jji thou beest, &c. &c. X^b, J^ you be, &c.
JkJbbjô, or xib,
j^
he be, &c. &c. Juulb, Jujj *Aey 6e, &c.
CO* o
Conditional or Potential, ^jj\j*x~>\ Û, or
J^-i.
> 9 f
f
j
j!
l**>
or
L5*
J
J-
J might, would, &c. 6e. *.>
jy
-c o?e would, &c.
#e.
/ i> ^
&c.
c5*^
thou wouldst, &c. 6e. i\> JjJ
<<
or uf<^,OjJ
,ye would, &c. 6e.
&c.
u5*ty
ê would, &c. 6e. jjjj***) or ^jSjj^j they would,
&c. be.
9 C s-
*
Future Subjunctive,
cL^&U Û.
Sing.
Plur.
>
A
I
shall
Awe shall
*
Îb
*tty ^
or *\j *jy1 &c.
^>
or ^b *jy")
'
.! [have been.
--
r
"
[have been.
'\ thou shalt 9
[you shall
&c.
^
or
^{j
*jyi -
&c. job *j.n
>JAe
sAa// 6
, f^cy shall
&c.
0
or Xi,b
*jy1 &c. ^Ju^b *j*n
'
[have been.
*
[forae foe.
Infinitive, jJ^3^.
Present,
jj>y
by contraction J>y to be or remain.
9 O
J-cli Participles.
J^j*^*
9
\jL\j being, (rare.)
*jy
been, having been.
9
105. ^Jw> shudan, to be or become.f
used in forming the Passive voice.
Indicative or Subjunctive Present,
JU-
***--*.
i^j-i* ^jc thou art.
^.j~
ls
3/
ou are
>
&c
jj-i
^
ê ts, &c. Juj-i
^
Jêy ore, &c.
y c *
o o
s-
*
This form sometimes goes by the name of the
^y^*
lJj\.a1*A
/<^Lc.
+ jÂ-i^ and
(j&^Ji
are synonymous with this verb, and are in some ii
stances substituted for it.
OF THE
PERSIAN VERBS.
47
O P s-
Simple Preterite,
J&ô
^lo.
Sing.
Plur.
.
/
9
**& I was.
*i&
we were.
9
f
^J* thou wast.
<x><x you were.
dJS> he was.
JuJ^-i they were.
Preterite Imperfect, ^Jij*l~i\
Û.
P p 9 9 P
t^cSt*
or aSjL ^c,
t/44 <j*
or
LS&&1
&&
^,
&c.
Compound Preterite,
-îy
^Û.
p 9
a\ *Jw> / have been. *j\ *4~ zwe have been.
p p p
^j\
*Jd or *<XL thou hast been. &\ x<xL you have been.
LP o /
lz~~>\ *du& he has been. &i\ *Ju& they have been.
Preterpluperfect, Xkx*
*
L
^t.
99 99
l*jjj
8<\L I had been.
^
j>y
***"" we had been.
99 p p
c<ty
xdJL thou hadst been.
'H^fi
****&
^
0M ^G^ #eew.
P P u p 9
d^j ^Jw> ê /zfld 6ee. JJjjj *X1 Aey /we? 6eera.
Future,
JjJuL^j.
9
p
.XI
*&\p-
/ will be,
Jul
(^y>-
he will be.
9 * /
9 p o
xl dJbtj*. Ae will be. XL J&a>!ji #Acy will be.
48
OF THE PERSIAN
VERBS.
Imperative, ^cl, and
Lfjldti, precative.
"
y
Sing.
Plur.
y y ' ' y y
s s
fjti
or
fj-L^,
j*^-2>
/e me fo. ^yL
^
or
*j^
/e us be.
yL) or
yj
^c,
^
6e ôw. &c. &c. &yL #e ê.
"^ y y ' y yy C^x o^
Jul or JÎj, dj-Lx* j^l /e* fo'm 6e. &c. *iyi*
jjî, /etf êm be.
Subjunctive, or Aorist, ?jla*.
yy y y ^
s-
fjL
ô or pyL I be.
*jy,
^
or m^L we be.
y y
&c. &c.
ijyt,
thou beest. Sec. &c. iXul you be.
yy Oy y
Sec. Sec. Jj-S he be. . &c. &c. ti^L they be.
c
Infinitive, jjwa^.
jSJL to be.
Participles.
yy
9
(rare) \yL being, becoming. xx having been or become.
<* y y
106.
ll
i*>W>-
kh'astan or )AJb\j>. kh'ahidan, to be willing.
Aorist, ^j\*L<.
used in forming the Compound Future of verbs.
y y y y
+b\j-
^g*
or ^t\^- I will.
f+*>\j>-
^j*
or
f**^
we witt*
&c.
fj^f*
thou wilt. Sec. JuJb!^ you will.
&c. dJt>\js>- he will. Sec. Jcjb^ they will.
The other tenses are formed like those of the regular verbs.
OF THE PERSIAN YERBS.
49
OF THE TENSES.
107. It will here be useful to shew in what manner the tenses of Per-
sian verbs are deduced from the infinitives, which are considered by
Oriental grammarians as the spring or fountain of all the moods and
tenses : and hence they are termed thejJus^ masdar, or source.
108. All Persian infinitives end in
c
o, or
J}
;
as, jJu*^ rasidan, to
arrive
;
^ddto nalldan, to grieve
/
jx, to say : just as the preceding
letter happens to be a sonant or a surd respectively.*
109. The third person of the simple preterite is formed by rejecting
j
from the infinitive; as, &+~ij, he arrived; Julto, he grieved;
u^j
9
he said. Examples
:
Ax*)
Jki-
&\jj
C&L*
&\jJ6
to
I said, but the zephyr is arrived
from
the garden, or the caravan
of
musk has come
from the road
of
Khoten.
110. The letter c->, often prefixed to this tense,, is redundant, as
* By a sonant is meant any letter, in the first formation of which, by the
organs of speech, the voice is distinctly heard ; by a surd, any other in which
this is not the case. Hence all vowels will be sonants, as will , d, and the
like
; while
p,
t, &c. will be surds.
H
lu^j
j
Jj-j !j<uU- , Zse oo& ê mantle, and departed. In this case the
c c c
vowel following l->, is often omitted; as, l^~*Ijj for is. v*JL:j
,
Ae sat.
111. From the preterite is formed the imperfect tense, by prefixing
the particles ,<o or
,<>&,
as &+~>j~
or
^*^
i/*^?
ê was a^r^n
g*
These particles, however, imply continuity.
.TO
112. It is also sometimes expressed by adding
^j,
( J^f*)
to the pre-
terite, as ^Jullj, ê was grieving
;
^*>jjdlj, êy têre grieving: this
form is common in prose
;
as,
TZtey OJcre engaged in pleasure and delight, and were continually
listening to the delightful modulation
of
the tongue
of
the lute and
cymbal*
113. The same letter
_?,
added to the persons of the past tense, forms
the potential mood ; as,
^^13
, I might, could, should, or would grieve;
so Firdausi in a love song,
Could I rest one night in thy bosom, I should (seem to) touch the sky
with my delighted head.
And Hafiz,
0\j\
M!^"
***^
^
L^*^?"^ ^ l^'
77m lock, each curl
of
which is worth a hundred musk-bags
of
China,
would be sweet
if
its scent were from
sweetness
of
temper.
114. The participle preterite is formed from the infinitive by chang-
es
ing
j
into *; as, x&*>j, arrived; te&, said; from which participle,
and the auxiliary verbs
jj^
and jXL, are made several compound
tenses, as well as the passive voice ; as, +\
*J^~V, ?
I have sprinkled
;
j*jy
*julb, I had sprinkled; *b *JuÂj, I shall have sprinkled;
*sL &&xZi\i
t
,
I was sprinkled.
p>\ *j^
jjU.
ijJjj Jt
> ^sj jU.
^
*;>l tfjl^J jJkU& J-Ow-O
J
J jlAi
J
J *Jb
JFe also have gwew wp owr soul to those two inchanting narcissuses
[eyes]
;
we also have placed our heart on those two black hyacinths
(locks of hair).
115. The Persians are very fond of the preterite participle ; and it is
very often used by their elegant writers to connect the members of a
sentence, and to suspend the sense till the close of a long period : in
poetry, as well as prose, it sometimes is used like the third person pre-
terite of a verb, as in this fine couplet
:
52
The splendour
of
the cup and goblet has obscured the light
of
the moon
;
the cheek
of
the magian-children (young cup-bearers) has stolen the
splendour
of
the sun.
116. In the ode from which this couplet is taken, every distich ends
with the word *
jj
*
for
jj
, he struck,
117. In composition, the infinitive is contracted by rejecting
j,
as
&&
^^"5
I wiM be
j
so Hafiz,
cXi JJblj^- ê- *,b
yj
^-U JU
T/te breath
of
the western gale will be musk-shedding
;
the old world
will again be young.
118. This short infinitive is likewise used after impersonal verbs ; as,
djs
c;V'
^ ** possible to do
;
Jj **j\j
,
zV is necessary to do : thus
Hafiz, the Anacreon of Persia
;
*
The * terminating this kind of words, is nothing more than the relative
*,
so ajjj, daily
;
aILj, belonging to the year ;
<0!j^^,
manly, like men; &c.
See Hyder Ali's Com. on the c-^J^ll^J^s-, p. 11
It is impossible to bear away the jewel
of
thy wish by thy own
endeavour; thy vain imagination is, that this will come without
assistance.
And the poet quoted in the history of Cazvini,
Your conduct is a register : it is necessary to place there good actions.
119. In order to form the imperative mood of a Persian verb, re-
course has been had to the following expedients. It has been found that
one or other of the seven sonant letters, viz. l-$.j>
j>
f
, ij>j>
or
</?
will precede
jj,
and that one of the four surds, viz.
,
^r,
J^,
or l-J,
will precede
Ji,
of the infinitive. (Art. 108). The verbs have then
been divided into eleven classes, having one or other of these letters,
taken in this order, preceding the termination of the infinitive for its
respective characteristic : and the following rules have been devised ac-
cordingly for finding the imperative.
General Rule.
120. The terminating syllable of the infinitive
jj
or
Jj
will always
be rejected.And, specially, by this process alone, the imperatives of
all verbs of the second, the
fifth,
and of some of those of the eleventh
classes, will be found. Example of the second class, in which^ precedes
jj,
and is therefore the characteristic of that class,
^jtj,
5
to cherish.
c
Imperative,
j^>
, cherish thou: of the
fifth,
in which
^
is the charac-
teristic, ^te, tfo efog, Imper.
^
dig thou : of the eleventh, in which
b
uJ is the characteristic, ^pli*, o split. Imper. cJ\i-, sp&Y Mow.
Special Rules for the remaining Classes.
121. All verbs of the ^r^, seventh,* and wmÂ classes, form their in-
finitives by also rejecting their characteristic letters. Example of the
first, in which \ is the characteristic, jjlL-jt, to stand, Imper. <^>~*
jJ 5
stand thou : of the seventh, where îs, jj^-ijj, Jo m27&. Imper. ^jJ,
ra?7& Mow ; of the ninth, where
{J
*, is the characteristic, ^ju-j
J
, o live*
Imper.
^jj,
live thou.
122. One verb only is generally given of the third class, i. e. having
J
for its characteristic ;+ as,
jjj,
to strike. Imper.
jj,
strike thou.
123. The fourth class having * for its characteristic, presents, only
one verb; as, ^tXt , to come. Imper. \ or
^j\ ,
come thou.%
124. Verbs of the sixth class, having
j
for their characteristic, change
that letter into
J
; as,
u^j-o,
* wear, Imper.
u^?
têar Mow.
*
The causal verbs ending in jJu , come under this class, and are all regular.
+ Meninski also gives jdj\
or
(
jj\,
to plunge a knife. Imp.jU (See
i.
^&*\j\ ,
to rest
s
takes the imperative of
&&-*)j\

as, aIjI, r*#/ Mow.
125. All verbs of the eighth, tenth, and some of those of the eleventh,
classes, change their characteristics, viz. l,
^,
or uJ,
into
j,
j,
c
>,
respectively. Example of the eighth
;
jÂjj), to throw. Imper. j\S\
,
throw thou ; of the tenth,
c
/~&
9
to sow. Imper. jK, sow thou: of the
eleventh,
^f^
to beat. Imper.
<r^,
beat thou.
Exceptions.
126. In verbs of the Jlrst, seventh, and ninth classes.Of the
Jlrst,
^jIj, to give. Imper. *t>, give thou; jJuujj to ta&e, (for ^j\xj*).
* ^ <
b
Imper. jVa-j, tafo J/tow, (from ^jjlJLs).
Of the seventh :
j^j^
to choose. Imper.
^j^
(j*V.^
* Se* Imper.
^
j*&
or c*JL jJu&- o gather.
d^'
^Jui~ to foar.
b
^Juyl to create.
c
Of the mVtf^ ;
^^X-ojjj o adhere to. Imper
b C/
^jx^j to bind.
b
*
Though the regular imperative of this verb, viz. LZ-+~i
,
perhaps never occurs,
the aorist, as well as the present tense formed from it, does ; as, Jk^-o, or ite*d ê,
he takes; ^pUl , to be prepared, has no imperative : some other verbs, having this
characteristic, take their imperatives from verbs of the sixth class; as, ^jlti,
to open. Imp.
cs\Z
from ÂyL^.
56
OF THE PERSIAN VERBS,
j^jLti to break. Imper.
l
Jj^.
^*l> to rise.
J^-
t
jl~~LJ to sit.
A~*a to break.
aJ.
The rest of the verbs usually given as irregulars under this class, viz.
c c ^ o o
<j3u^,
to lessen
;
^Jj^, to desire
;
Ût^
5
o leap
;
J^j^
to escape
;
G P
^9 OP
:^
1
, to wash
;
^jn
^
, o see&
y
^^
, to grow, will appear suffi-
ciently analogous, if we can allow in the four first, the addition of a
silent *,
as in the words && and
<s^,
in order to prevent their ending
in a vowel; for, striking off the terminating syllable with the characteristic,
we shall have K,
^>,
&c. and adding
*,
we have *K, s\j^, &=,
*>,
which
are their imperatives. In the three last, if we strike off the characteristic
with the terminating syllable, and add
^
followed by the ^jIj j^b
9 9 9
(Art.
76),
we shall have
<j>&>
s^t^j
and
t/jijj
fr tneir respective im-
peratives. The two ^ÛKT and
a
L\j
1
j
9
to adorn
;
have regularly
1/
and
^jj,
for the imperatives, and adding the
&j\j
^b,
c^jT$
and
l5^3
eforw thou.*
*
Meninski also gives ^^.ij, to spin. Imp.
(j~jt
j,
as also ^^-aliJ, fo cawse
/o fjgy Imp. ^1-13
: but the latter may have its imperative regularly from
jj^jUj. This is most likely the case; and, that all the irregular imperatives
have thus been derived. Whenever, therefore, the learner cannot find the form
127. Exceptions under the second,
Jifth,
and eleventh, classes.
Under the second :

c
jJ)_/F to bring. Imper.
J\
and
jj\
bring thou.
Âji to bear.
J
UP
jj^c to die.
jfG
c
&&J*
to do.
P
c p
ÂjaJ* to count.
P
ju& (from
p
j\>\
c
UP
tf&j***
to give up.
(j^jW-
Under thejlfth
:
u o
fjSu^ji
to dig a canal.
u
Imper. dj&j (from (jJjâ^).
u
a
Under the eleventh :

u
^j*
to take. Imper.
j.
up
jj&s
t
to accept.
jtH:
JUj
to go.
ir
UP
jxifto say.

ox
t5jf.
of the imperative under one class, he must try another. It is desirable, indeed,
that he should have a complete list of all substitutions of this kind : but
hitherto no such list, I believe, has been made out. The Grammars
present
only the most usual ; and the Dictionaries are quite silent on the subject.
I
C
/ o 9 <> 9
J&*
to bore, Imper. cî^ (j&^~i).
o 9 O / /
^jJuSt- Jo blossom. L~**Ci>. .
^^3
o conceal. none.
128. Exceptions under the WdtfA class.
j^Xi* Jo become. Imper.
y
ox $J*. jJj*J* to hear, jk&
9 9 ,9 9 9 9 9
ijiiy^
to slumber. y*z orî.
jty
to remain.
^
or ^b
99 99 s9 ,
jtyjt*
to reap.
Jjîjj^
or
JJ
J
*
129. Exceptions under the eighth and tenth classes.
Under the eighth :

9 9
j&X+jL to know. Imper.
1.
*
îL**
5
fo weigh.
r
uV'
o
uV
Acu^ to break. jj.*
Under the tenth :

^pgjiy or
^P^J
to aoriYc. Imper.
^.y.
c
^^sJjb 0 graft.
Jjb
(^jJjb),
*
Meninski also gives
{J*>-\,
to draw a sword, Imper. l\, ^sssul id.
Imp. ***!, (See jJuiKX&T).
T
When this verb is used in the sense of sewing, the imperative is regular ;
as,
b
jjt>, seo> thou : so
^.j^jj*)
when it means /o kindle or
inflame,
has the impera-
tive
jjy.
j*JZJ> to kill.
J.
f
jx>t to revolve.
4-
iiaH$$f
C
%
jxJL\^\ to exalt.
M
l&AJh),
^Ji)y*a to mix. none.
^zJ\ to dissolve.
c
,.JLi to sow.
none,
none.*
7
130. The letter
<> is often prefixed to the imperative ; as, s
,
say
c
thou
;
fj^jxi ,+ fear
thou ;
so Firdausi in his noble satire against a king
who had slighted him :
J\j
jjLi jâ^
3
*U, \j\
9 CO
cT
Jtj
Of* #?
j' t^$#p*i
O fo'wg Mahmud, conqueror
of
regions,
if
thou fear
est not me, fear
God ! Why hast thou excited my wrathful temper t Dost thou
not dread my hlood-dropping dagger ?
131. It must here be observed, that the negatives <U nah, and
j
na,
* But here, as in many other cases, the imperative of
i
jjJSJ&
9
to sow, i. e.
J,
may be used.
f And then, as in Art. 110, the following vowel is often omitted; as,
a
aa1j for j^XLLj.
60
are changed in the imperative into <U
mah and * ma, in the second
persons, singular and plural; as,
^j**,
do not ask; but, in all the
rest,
j
will generally be used ; as Ju^-J , let him not ask.
O f s C C
I have drained the dregs
of
one love
;
ask not whose
;
I have tasted
the poison
of
one absence: ask not whose.
132. Verbs commencing with a single or short 1 alif, and prefixing
one of these letters ; viz. c_> ,
*
, or
j
, will change the alif into
^
as
e^>lJut , ê ^ret*>)
/
l^-^M j^jj
, c^>^^
,
jldSJU , ^rozy
;
j\&>+*
9
throw
not, Sec. But, if such initial alif have medda [*-), and consequently
represent two alifs, (Art.
40),
then the first will be changed to
^
as
before, and the second will remain
;
as,
J\
or jU , bring thou
/
jU^j
bring not ; JÛi
,*
he brought not. Examples :
Cupbearer, bring cwp
of
wine
/
bring a cup or two
of
pure wine.
*
In this case, if the measure of the verse should require it, the
^j
will be
rejected; as, Ojj\j sekandar namah, p.
V,
Edit. Calc,
61
CÛ\
t& *-*>- ^jA
&}J** f*^" -T
c o ^ c
Say, bring not /se taper into this assembly
y
for,
to night, the moon
of
my beloved's cheek is (at its) full
in our banquet
;
mix not per-
fume in our assembly
y
for, from
the extremity
of
thy locks, sweet
fragrance is every moment perceptible to the soul.
133. A precative form is made by inserting \ alif, preceded by (-),
between the terminating letter of the third person singular of the aorist
c c
and the root; as, jlilj^S, may he cause (it) to become ! jIjIj^j, may he
perform (it) ! and, occasionally in the first person ; as, aL^, let me die I
It is used also with the particles <-->, *,
or
j.
(Artt. 130-1).
Example :
May the
fame
of
thy lot come to every person^ but may the lot not
pass
from thee to any one I
134. The contracted participle, used in compound epithets, is ex-
actly the same with the imperative
;
as,^Jol, excite thou
;
jj\
<^jLz,
mirth exciting
y
jjj\
, inflame thou
; jjj\
fjjf
9
world inflaming
;
Gayti-
afroz, the name of a fairy in the Persian tales, translated by Colonel Dow,
135. The participles of the present tense are formed by adding \-
,
^ ,
or *Aj
,
to the imperative; as, Û;, L*>, and *A^,, arriving or
arriver
y
which are, the last in particular, often used for nouus.
136. From the imperative also is formed the conjunctive tense or
aorist, by adding to it the usual personal termination, as, from
^$) ,
come
thou,
aj|
,
2"
may or will come,
Sj\ ji M
j\j&
JJL Jajx. fAjj
When the sun
of
the wine arises
from
the east
of
the cup, a thousand
tulips arise
from the garden
of
the cup-bearer
1
s cheek.
By this affected, yet lively allegory, the poet only means, that
"
the
"
cup-bearer will blush, when he shall present the wine to the guests."
For the most part, this form of the Persian verb, which the gram-
marians properly call the aorist, or indefinite tense, answers to the potential
mood of other languages, and is governed by conjunctions, as in Latin
and English : this will be seen more clearly in the following example
taken from the life of Nadir Shah
;
JJjT jli-il^s^ a&j
J**x*i rjs-
j 0^,y.
t J
<&Z&?
(J^T^ t}f3^
*f
cW
l>s o" O^ # ?
y* ? O f
^ji
ijtus
j\
^>J <uLj cl*jl eJjU
j
<t)U,l
^
^j^
t& <ol& a3j(jcJ-
/ o-o / >> o o P3>1?
oo /*c
.S.
*
^CÔ 99 <> b
'
9
J^Xj j\**j
Afi&j,
jCti****
<-fp
ci?U|^
^L^V u~*)jj
(^s*
To (those) learned in the mysteries
of
knowledge, and (to) the subtilty-
discoverers
of
the divine sciences, it is evident, that in every age and
time, in which the affairs of
the world are various and disordered,
and the cycle
of
the oppressor revolves to the wishes
of
the oppres-
sive, the only Lord, who is the governor
of
this workhouse, and the
suhverter
of
the circumstances
of
time, aids
from
his own un-
limited bounty, and makes powerful upon the area
of
the world,
some happy (being) who, with the healings
of
mercies and comfort,
acts
for
the closing up
of
the wounds
of
the oppressed, and sweetens
the palate
of
those embittered by the poison
of
events, with the honey
of
justice.
b 9 C
In this period, the words
aof, ^, Jjlj^, and djL, are the aorists
O CCO b
of
jV.*/, <>?/>
u^Â*
an(
*
cr^"^
5
?
governed by the conjunction i&
9
that.
The present tense is formed by prefixing ^c or ^b, to the aorist;
as, J^^c, I know
; {J\s^, thou knowest ; Jwldu*, he knoweth
:
b/W C
C ^
cJUx ,;
*<
Ls?1
}
&& L \i jc!
O western gale, pass by the place which thou knowest, and speak
openly the circumstances
of
my heart, which thou knowest.
^tlx<j\^>.j
J^
6^j (J*^
^j
With that sweet character which thou drawest on the rose
of
thy
cheek, thou drawest a line over the
leaf of
the garden-rose.
The particles
^*
and
,<*&,
are sometimes joined to the verb, and
sometimes separated from it, according to the pleasure of the writer ;* as,
*)&
\s JV
y J
*******
{*)\j>"
Be engaged in pleasure,
for,
while thou art striking thy eye (lid)
together, the autumn arrives, and the new spring passes away.
137. The letter l_>, prefixed to the aorist, restrains it to the future
tense
; as, t^j , I will, would, or may arrive ;t thus Nakhshebi in his
P
work called the <u0
Jpjb
, or the Tales
of
a Parrot, Night 35.
o ^ o , o
^ ^ 9 ** t* o .?
O ^
/
o
*
They are used only to imply continuity (Art. Ill), and may be omitted,
when that is not intended.
t But, in this case, the first vowel of the verb is often omitted. (See Artt.
110-130).
Nakhshebi ! When men would arrive at their beloved, it becomes (them)
to make
effort
and endeavour. Evert/ one who makes an
effort
in (his)
affairs,
will arrive at last at his object.
138. After having given this analysis of the Persian verb, it will be
necessary to add a table of the moods and tenses, as they answer to those
of European languages.
ACTIVE VOICE,
ujJL.
Of
jJu^j to ask.
Indicative Mood, Present Tense,
JW*
^k^.
x-!j Sing.
f
4
^
Plur*
Of of
**ijj
^
I ask. +*ajj
^
we ask.
of <*?
(StA ls
t^l0U asêsi*
**^ji u*
5
y
ou as^'
of c of
ju*sj
ifc
he asks. &~sy
.<
they ask.
of *
Simple Preterite, jiia* Û.
Of of
*
+A**Sjj I asked.
aj
jju^j we asked.
Of Of
^tXJucy thou askedest. jjou**^ you asked.
of c Of
+ Ju*^> he asked. jjju*^ ^cy asked.
O * Of o ^ of O ^ Of
9
* We sometimes have this form here; viz. JLsJu^, ^^X^sj, c^jJu**^
pi. +Xy~s&A~
/
j
}
&c. but this is rare.
+ Occasionally with a redundant
1
; as, )&, he said : but this is done mostly
by the poets.
K
Compound Preterite, uoi
<V^.
o
^lj Sing.
f*^
Plur
a1 tfdu*^ / Afltfe asked. +A i^>j{ we have asked*
<*9
OP t./>
>ir^,^j
or
^
**~*jl
t
thou hast asked. &\
**V-V
3/
ou have asked.
O OP
c c>> to/
1******^ or L^vJ *Ju*^j Ae to asked. X5l
*VV
^^
^fltJe asked.
o o
Preterite imperfect, c;|^*sJ *,$*U.
*
f*V^/i ^
-^ was asking.
Hî/i
l5*
^
êre as^n
S
m
OP Op
(m
sS
1
î
/
j ^c thou wast asking. jj Ju^j ^c yaw were asking.
OP
o o/>
Ju**jy ^c Ae tu?a^ asking, jJju^y
^
JAey ayere asking.
Preterpluperfect, Ja*j *<<iU.
p
OP P
OP
Aty
sX^ji I had asked.
H^
*'^4
we âd asked.
P op
p
op
^dji *<~*j* thou hadst asked. JjJ^j ******^
ôw had asked,
p
op o p op
jy
*Ju*^ Ae Ac? asked.
**jty
**ir
>
ji
they, had asked.
o
First Future, orîU-
^.
g* op
t a^-j i" sAa# ask.
MPtfii
we sâ
^ as^'
op op
^jf*
thou shalt ask. ^î you shall ask.
op o op
Jw^-j he shall ask.
^^jî
they shall ask.
*
lliis form has a continuative sense, and is equivalent to what is here
also termed
u
the Potential."
t This form is also used for the imperative; as,
**î
let me ask, &c.
67
Second Future,
*>~\j Sing. -*> Plur.
<j9 ^ U> '
<*9 s> 09 ^
îA
iJ^j^
thou wMt ask'
*it*A
*^\p"
#
ow *w// s#.
juuoj jkJblj^ he will ask.
î/i
XJb\j>> they will ask.
O 9
Imperative, Û*
y^9
or i^lei)
?
precative.
*#jq>
or a**5^ fe wze ask,
{#*/*
êt us as^'
G* 09 W
uid
or
ui/*l
as
^
thou.
^yi
as
^
y
ou'
C C9
i)Lj j or Jud j /e* Aim as&. dCuî let them ask*
9
Conjunctive or Aorist,
^jLs*.
L>? <*9
**A
I may ask.
frHji
we ma
y
asâ
<j9 i.9
ifij)
thou mayst ask.
^WA 3/
ou ma
2/
as^m
i>9 O Of
Ju*^ he may ask.
j^-y
they may ask.
Potential, ^jj\j*xA Û, or uilLiJ Û.
<>9 C9
^Ju-^j
I might, S?c. ask.
(jî^^ji
we might, fyc.
ash
% C9
Of
t^^sj thou mightest ask. ^jdjS^y you might ask
9
^ju**j^ he might ask. ^dJju-Mjj they might ask
*
* The first and second persons plural of this form are omitted by some
9
but retained by other, Grammarians. See Hyder Ali's Comment, on the
Compound Future; or, according to some, a doubtful preterite, or,
o
&>*\j Sing. Plur.
^>.
*^b x&+*>j) I shall have asked,
f^V |W*!/i
we sâ^ âve asked.
0<
lb *W^ ôw shalt have asked,
*V*Aj
*'V^ 2/
ou sâ^
âve asked.
jwtb *<Ju>jJ ê shall have asked, Jo^b tfdu**^ they shall have asked,
c
Infinitive, jJua*.
Present, <^XJ** to ask, contracted Ju**^.
Preterite,
^tty
**V**ri
* âtJe asked.
Participles, <u!U- *J and Jxli **A
Present,
J^>j,t
and ffAXw^j asking, who asks.
Preterite,
Jj*JU
^1
, *Ju-o asked, or having asked.
*
By prefixing
^*
to this tense, we have a continuative imperative
(,<*1 Jô^jI),
as, *-$>b **W^
/j*,
fcîwe (constantly) to* Offtetf, fee. Or, if taken as a pre-
terite (^j*la i^l^cJ Û)
9
ii supposed confirmative preterite , (See p. 46,
note.)
OF THE
PERSIAN
VERBS.
M
P o
139. Passive
Voice,
J^.
Indicative
Present,
JU
*dx**.
G
J^lj Sing.
t^T-
Plur.
ijjL
fjc
fduî thou art asked. ^j-$>
ô
*Xty
you are asked.
""
" '
up
u
"
G'
JjA
^
*Juu^ e i twfcrf.
JJjA
^
***4
ftey are asA;etf.
^
. >
OP
Preterite, <jikU>.
P OP 9
<*'
IJ&& x^/l
thou wast asked. ^<^
HHH
#
ow
^
ere as&ed.
P O? O P OP
J^> *<S**4 ê t5 asked. dud**
***
they were asked.
O G S-
Imperfect Tense,
Ufj}/*^
.Û.
/ G* ^
G/
*dw> ô *dJu^> / zoas ^w asked. *jdufc
^
*^*-^4
ê were J/zerc asked,
P OP P OP
^Jja
^*^**V
*ôw zms tfêft asked. dud&
^* ***^
y
ow ^
ere êw asked.
> G/ G / G.P
d*fc
^
**\**^
ê was then asked. dodu$>
^
*du*^ 2/zey têre êw asked.
or,
P Op 9 O?
*
^dtA x*~*j} I had been
fyc.
asked.
/<**& *&>;>
we had been asked.
S- 9 OP ? OP
4^J^ *du*o, ôw âcfo Veerc asked.
L^dudî *duu^j ôw Aad foera asked.
P
op O P OP
<_5dw> *du*a^ ê âd 6ee# asked. ^dtfdjb *duo they had been asked.
*
See note
p.
67.
Compound Preterite,
(--v./ l_s^
G
*x>1j Sing.
^*>.
Plur.
9 09 9 09
*\ x&&
x^f^jl
I have been asked, *A *A-> *Ju^. we have been asked.
9 0/ 9 09
u$\ or *J*& x^+^jj
thou hast been asked. Jul SJ*$- xs+^you have been asked.
O 9 C9 c 9 o9
t^J &<\L
*JV-^J he has been asked. Jul *J*1
*^^
ê
y
have been asked.
s-
Preterpluperfect, Ju*j <j^t<.
9 9 09 9 9 Op
/t)^ *jji ^j^
t
***s
r
> / fozc? foew asked.
^j^j
#jul *Ju*^ t#e had been asked,,
9 9 Op 9 9^?.
l$*>jJ
^JJb *Juj^ #ow âcfoJ #eerc asked. Jo
jy
*J^
**V^
ôw had been asked.
9 9 09 O 9 9 l>9
jy
*J>., aa-*^ ê fozd 6eera asked.
Ju'J^j *j, *Ju^ ê
y
had been asked.
Doubtful Preterite, iJJZjjLLj Û.
' ^
f/ wifly Acrae
' <* Ywe may have
*~S,u sJv, *jow
j^
*^V
*^
^rô n
'
v
L&eerc
as#ed.
'
"
-
[been asked.
> <*
T yow way ^crae
,
'
c
>
f
yow may forae
. <*U *J^ *J^
y
^
^Y
*<^<
*V-rii
* <*
[he may have

' c
>
(they may have
jû *J^ *J~->
j^ ^Y
*^
*4-*^H
"'
I been asked.
'
[been asked.
p
K,p r

/ way toe 6een (constantly,
continually) <w&<?d. See
p. 68,
note.
Aorist, jLi, used also as an imperative.
&>~\j Sing.
<fc^ Plur.
*y tfti***^ / #?oy be asked,
*>
j~
*V*4
ê may be asked.
i^jL
xxk~iji thou mayst be asked.
^,y~
*^~yi y
ou ma
y
oe oskedL
s y 0/ O y s C9
Jjm
**V*^
Ae ^c^ #e asked.
Si^L *Ju*^j ^cy mey 6e asked.
Second Future, Ju&r<.
a *&>^>- *t%*^> i" shall be asked. <\& **kly>
*x*^ aye sâ// 6e asked.
X2
/^^ t'h^jf,
thou shalt be asked. <s& XJb\j>. ^Ju^ yow sâ// #e asked.
&J* JJ&^
**~i;{
he shall be asked. J^ Jojb^^- *Ju*^j they shallbe asked.
Continuative Imperative,
Û^^cl.
'
c
' |/e me be ? w
f let us be
"
'
L
(always) as#ed.
""
"
*
[asked.
p
u fbe thou , op
[fa you
"

[(always) asked.

- '
"
'
[asêtf.
/ c^
J7e
fek #e c
, ^
(let them
-
'
I
(always)
asked.
""
"'
v
[fe<iAtt&
c
Infinitive,
jdua*.
9
Of
Present,
jÂ sJa^
fo 6e <wed
Preterite,
^d^ X&&
^-^ to ^cwe foew asked.
72
140. A prohibition will prefix
^
to the second persons of the impera-
tive; a negation
aj
or
j
to any other person, mode, &c> (See Art. 131)
;
as,
Sing. Jlt>
^
I do not know,
nescio.
^yta
^jf
thou dost not know, nescis.
iX)U>
^
he does not know, nescit.
Plur. *.JL>
^c
we do not know, nescimus.
AxilJ
l^"
y
ou d nt know, nescitis.
c
&ri\d
^c
they do not know. nesciunt.
C^**^)
^\uL\ LJsjj t-^^ *?*j'
H^
U * \ +
y 1 * *
I know not
from what cause there is not the hue
of
friendship to the
cypress-shaped, black-eyed, moon-faced
(damsels).
*> 9 O
The Causal Verb, ÂxL*
J*i.
141. This verb is formed from the primitive by adding to the second
person singular of the imperative the syllable jJu\ or jdoit ; as,
^j,
arrive thou; ^L>j or jjuoL,, to cccwse fo arrive;
*j,
escape thou;
C Co
from
c
yî
J
,
c)^\&j,
to release. This infinitive is termed ^jyS j<x&o,
a derived masdar. Their imperatives are formed according to the rules
given under Classes V. and VII. and they are then regularly conjugated.
Example :
p
c p s-
p^
^
o>
O Heaven! bring that musky
fawn
back to Khoten ; bring back
that tall waving cypress to the garden.
The contracted participles, as it has been before observed, (Art.
134],
are of great use in the composition of words; as,
j+>\
cjyi^c, mirth-
c
exciting
;
from C^Ljb
,
which in Arabick signifies mirth, and the par-
ticiple of
CJ*=&fj\
,
to excite : but of these elegant compounds I shall
speak at large in the next section.
[
74
J
OF THE COMPOSITION
AND
DERIVATION OF WORDS.
142. One of the chief beauties of the Persian language is its frequent
use of compound adjectives
;
in the variety and elegance of which it
surpasses not only the German and English, but even the Greek. These
compounds may be multiplied without end, according to the pleasure and
taste of the writer
;
they are formed either by a noun and the contracted
participle; as, t-^î
J
J or t-ôîij, heart-deceiving; or by prefixing
9C
J
an adjective to a noun; as,
i^w&j-
9
sweet-smelling
y
or lastly, by
o 9
placing one substantive before another; as, jl<\x!T, rose-cheeked.
143. Since one of the nouns in a compound word is often borrowed
from the Arabick, a man who wishes to read the Persian books with
satisfaction, ought to have a competent knowledge of both languages. I
shall subjoin a list of the most elegant compounds that I can recollect
;
but I must express most of them in English by circumlocutions : for
though we have some compound epithets which give a grace to our
poetry, yet, in general, the genius of our language seems averse to them.
C 9 9
<->
Thus JL&- Jb\ from y&t , a
fawn ;
and +~j>-
,
the eye
;
a Persian epithet
which answers to the Greek kXiKtoTug, seems very harsh in English,
if we translate it fawn-eyed , Lady Wortley Montague's translation
OF THE COMPOSITION, &c. 75
stag-eyed* is not much better, and conveys a different idea from what
the Eastern poets mean to express by this epithet.
I. s^\z
Cj\La.
144. Adjectives compounded of nouns and participles.t
(^liil jf shedding
flowers. jj\
S\^
fulfilling
the desire.
O Mi?
jU.il
j&
sprinkling pearls.
jliil j&*f shedding gems.
jl-lil
fj^.
dropping blood.
jljl
Jj
afflicting
the heart.
j\j\
Û wounding the soul.
Jii c->t> darting
flames.
c
^j\ 'f^t
tearing up roots.
c, t
aSI L-XLj casting stones.
JJ
J
Jj
6rave.
Y
adorning the world.
and
\j1
JUJ
Ij! ^r-Lsr
10
gracing the assembly.
*\j\
Jt>
giving rest to the hearts
Ujl t^Ju experienced in battle.
U
-jj
appeasing the spirit.
Ll Û. giving rest to the soul.
&] $
throwing down mountains, jjl \ $jk sprinkled with blood.
^Sh\ Oj-*
overthrowing heroes.
^X\ j^s. full
of
ambergris.
&ifi\
j$j**jfkll of
pleasures.
i}M Li covered with dust.
fc)JI lias- stained with crimes.
u ?
\js\
-jj
refreshing the spirit,
*
See her Letters from Constantinople.
\ We sometimes find the last word of the compound separated from
the
foregoing, by some word or words intervening; as,
^f\ij
J
J
j\ <*&j for
A* )\ tj^!j
W&j
?
one stealing the colour (blood)
from
the heart*
76
OF THE COMPOSITION
O
O A_ o
Ijil <^^# increasing cheerfulness. jXcl <*-^Ci^
mixed with colours* that
4-J7S.I
^^j
disturbing the city
;
is, deceitful.
o ô I
elegantly applied to beauty, to which
J-^^.
darting rays.
o c
likewise the poets give the following jta3\ cîa>j striking with
fear.
O /V_
epithet,
j|jj\
î;] casting out
fire.
/c
fc
C>J^ j^J
increasing daily.
j\jj\ jj3 shooting arrows.
j!/'-/
- ra^n
g
his head.
jj<&\ e^*&
gathering darkness, an
C c^
jlyl
jj/
exalting his neck. epithet of the night.
C CO
j^l JUl jjvXil C^-j:
obtaining example.
c
> enlightening the world.
<, c
"
or
Jy1 c?\v^"
j$*\
<*zJ&&\ exciting respect.
c
U 9 9
jjjs]
fjî enflaming the universe. jt\
^j^-
promoting sincerity.
CO co o
jj^sl <,*,<> kindling the
fight. >&\ &Si raising a tumult.
CO CO
j*js\ jl^-^ inflaming the garden, a >5ji ^^Xs=" causing blushes to rise.
o
beautiful epithet for the anemone. \stj\ )\&JU- making the heart beat.
tA^- C O
j^\
j^Jlc) skilled in science.
J&\
lAfcji producing instruction.
v
.?<*- o,- >>
jl^ j^
expert in
affairs.
Jj^\
^j^
devouring men.
y+*\ sj** mixed with
joyful tidings,
^jR
rfe-
that created the soul.
This participle >x^cl is used in a great j
J
J a ravisher
of
hearts.
o ^
variety of compounds. ..j <)uL 6red
*'
ê shade, an
>^
e^*-|;
giving rest. epithet for an ignorant young man
jj**\
JLi
full
of
threats. who has not seen the world.
AND DERIVATION OF WORDS.
77
j*\
X^t mixed with honey.
JXA c?
nourishing the body.
jta
(J.JLS. sporting with love,
JH UV&
acC
Pti
n
g
an excuse.
j^
Uifi cherishing
learned men,
iJiisPji*
sweetly singing.
c
jU)l^- possessing the world.
0)\d <d.G skilful in subtleties.
j\-ji ti\j composing tunes, a mu-
a
+* xdj>- seeing minute objects.
^\j
^jS^ lengthening his discourse*
sician.
J^ji
^^
composing sentences, an
orator.
jcj
Ji3
compiling narratives, an
cA/'*^
gaining his desires.
Vj
fj^-
shedding blood.
Vj j>*L, dropping sugar.
jjj
j*f
scattering jewels.
historian.
<^j jjic that enslaves his enemies.
Vj CJ>>\ shedding tears,

us 4j3j spreading sedition. 1jj*i dispersing care.
^*j
^kc shedding perfume. \dj
cu-^k
dispelling darkness.
c
5^
^jU collecting memorable events.
^j&j
infesting the way a rob-
*^}H cfl**^
reaching the sky.
c->lJUJlc
inflaming the world, an
epithet of the sun.
^jjsrjj wishing prosperity.
erf?-
J*
gathering roses.
c
^>* ai^l- cropping
flowers.
ber.
jL^.5^ preparing inchantments.
jUJj ravishing hearts.
j^*Jj
inflaming the
heart.
jLi* ^jU- a hunter
of souls.
_& ^*js destroying
life.
78 OF THE COMPOSITION
f
yA
CJ
s^
i
collecting words, an in-
former.
j+&- jjg? rising in the morning.
ijJcJ*
j%
skilful in business.
U*jj* J&*
selling sugar.
Uhj*
^j*"
ooastin
g of
himself.
^^.j
LJ\Sj^\ sitting on a throne.
<^lj3 Jc\j
deceiving the beholder. îJ AiV^j inhabiting a desert.
iJjL
lJu> breaking the ranks*
9 PC
jU^ +js1\ equal to the stars in
number.
Liflj rejoicing the heart.
jy*&
conquering provinces*
9
\\c
^
melting the heart. Ikaj^ showing the way.
j\6s\a*o dispelling a calamity.
\\y <LJ$j& kind to strangers.
p*S\&a spreading light.
+\\&
subduing the world.
j\y
\ziji tuning a lute.
l->L<\ whofinds what he desires*
II
145. Words compounded of adjectives and nouns.
^t, <jus- with a beautiful face.
jfo\
Lpj> with a good voice.
9 s. 9
ijj>- *jj\{
having pure intentions. &s2\jL**y>- with a pleasing scent,
P O /
Z 9
t^s^J.
of
a sweet disposition. Ûu
(j*y>-
with sweet notes
;
an epi*
t\di\j with unblemished virtue. thet of the nightingale
as in this elegant distich,
O (j9 C U U +
U
<* 9 PL? P LP
AND DERIVATION OF WORDS. 79
It is the brightness
of
the season
of
youth again to the gardens
;
the
tidings
of
the rose arrives to the sweet-singing nightingale.
j\j3j ijij>*
walking gracefully, ^J
c^J^
with a sweet mouth.
J&lj+J*
with gentle manners. ^>- *L~s black-eyed.
The compounds of this form are very numerous, and may be invented
at pleasure.
III.
146. Adjectives compounded of two nouns.
Each of these epithets is a short simile.
^jj
tjyO c-^1
te?*' with lips like rose-buds.
Cx
,
"
Iwith the
face of
a fairy.
9
j*{ lSjU u* rT*~>
with the scent
of
jessamine.
j\~*>-j
lJJ
with the cheeks
of
a fairy.
ji
c
^>
with a bosom like jessamine,
*K JuJL^ with the diadem
of
Gemshid.
J&
with cheeks like roses.
c^*-i^ \j\
J with the troops
of
Darius.
lSjJ^
with a rosyface.
jL^^ with legs like silver. ^j^J^c with the scent
of
musk.
cJ
j&
with lips
of
sugar. c-J
^jfy.
w^
^P
s ^
e ruies*
Jcj ^>^3
talking like a parrot
J^jir*
with the heart
of
a lion.
147. When we consider the vast number of epithets that may be com-
pounded after these three forms, and that those epithets are often used
for substantives without a noun being expressed, we must allow that the
Persian language is one of the richest in the world. These compounds
80 OF THE COMPOSITION
are thought so beautiful by the Persian poets, that they sometimes fill
a distich with them ; as,
C s- f O 9 S- ?
A moon-faced^ musk-scented, heart-alluring, soul-delighting, heart-de^
ceiving, moon-like (beauty).
148. The particles *& and ^l?,* together, prefixed to nouns, form
another elegant class of compounds implying society and intimacy
;
as
?
^Li-Ujb
of
the same nest. &Ay*& sleeping together.
i-jCijfcUJi
of
the same inclination.
fXkfc
breathing together.
*)**&
of
the same banquet.
^>\j te\y>>
of
the same master, school-
j^j^Ja lying on the same pillow.
fellow.
149. The particles U, not; J, little; and
^,
without; are placed
before nouns to denote privation ; as, dJ^\ \j, hopeless
;
^J&J* \J ignorant;
<fcii-
13 , not yet blown;
L*** of
little value
;
JiU *,
with little
sense
; cJb
^j> ,
fearless
;
jU\
,j
,
merciless ; this particle is often
joined to Arabick verbs; as,
J^b*
^j>,
inconsiderate;
<-~3J>
^^
irre~
gular.
*
This particle is Turkish.
AND DERIVATION OF WORDS. 81
Example
:
G y y 9u 9 G
Henceforth, wherever I shall write thy name, I will write false, in-
human, and FAITHLESS.
ON THE FORMATION OF NOUNS.
s- o
150. Names of agents
(
JcU
^1**4)
are generally participles
active
g g^
ending in *Ju_ ; as, a jJjL sazandah, a composer
;
or they are formed by
adding
gar, j\f gar, jU ban,

^>- or
^-
9
*
to a substantive ;
as,^f>j
,
a goldsmith
;
jlCdi, a writer
;
jLita , a gardener
;
ijsA , cin ambas-
sador
;
^sÛ*, a mediator,
151. Adjectives (cjU*?) implying possession or plenty are formed by
adding to nouns the termination jL, ^,-f, ^ff, <^*o, cJU,j!j,
jj,
<_$ or
o o c c g
^ J^>-
+
; as, jL^Sj
,
bashful
;
[
^Xas.
,
sorrowful
; ^\ *j& ,
ashamed
;
GO GG (j fi /O
j^JL3lt), learned/ cS\jyt>j, venemous
;
jljju^>l, hopeful; jyU-
?
having
G G
/a/e/ <^Joj&, Indian
J;
*3^- *Ls, blackish: also the terminations!,
"
s y y
9 9 >
9 /C
as, lilj, t2Jê, bj^ , odorous
:jj ;
as, j^jT
,
covetous,
j^j
,
sorrowful:
j^l ; as,^jbJ, robust, jj^J, courageous.
*
These are rather Turkish than Persian terminations.
f This is a Turkish adjunct.
|
With
e>w
i/U
See Art
-
74-
M
82 OF THE FORMATION OF NOUNS.
9 Go
152. The Arabick words ji, l^j-U,
<*^>
and
J.M,
put before
nouns, form likewise adjectives of possession
;
as,
J^ji
, majestic, dig-
nitate praeditus,
JU>-
c-ô-U, beautiful, venustate praeditus,
**jy*>
Sr^VjU
persons
of
exterior
form,
forma gaudentes,
e^<*^
J^5
wise, sapientia
praeditus. We may here observe, that the Indians use a great variety of
phrases purely Arabick, some as proper names and titles of chiefs and
princes, and others as epithets or constant adjuncts to substantives
;
such
are the names A^dJi U~>, 4L*J1
p>
4?^
âL, aJjjJ\
p]/-3
wnicn s*g"
nify in Arabick, the force, the star, the sun, and #e /amp
of
the state
;
such also is the title which they gave Lord Clive, lL$X*H *jjj,
ê cream
of
the kingdom
;
in the same manner they seldom mention the province
of aSI&j, without adding, by way of epithet, Si2\ uu**-, the paradise
of
regions
;
an Arabick title given to that province by t-ôj LJo^jl Aw-
rangzeb.
i
153. Some adjectives are formed from nouns by adding
^>
in ; as,
j^J^jI
,
fieri/
; ^)jj ,
golden
; upj*j
5
made
of
emeralds.
154. The termination silent
*,
(u-ais^
5
)
applied to the end of nouns
either in the singular or plural number, forms a class of relative nouns,
c s-
coming very near in signification to those formed by the
c>^
J
i~f\\
>
or
o o
relative
^,
(Art.
151), as,
c^~^
?
the hand ; <&~ij, belonging to the hand,
a
handful ; or the like.
^J\dj*,men;
&i\^j*, like men, courageously
;
OF THE FORMATION OF NOUNS.
83
ÛLiijb, kings
;
AjULJajb, like kings
9
royally. Words of this class,
when they happen to be the last of two in construction, do not require
that the foregoing have kesrah
;
as, <Ul3j &>-j\j
,
not ajljj
**^b, clothing
proper
for,
or belonging to, women.
155. Adjectives of similitude are formed by adding \J\
,
L, or
^
,
to
substantives; as, L\
j^,
//Are ambergris; \J\ cXi*>, //Are musk;
U cî>., //Are paradise
;
l-^s^j //Are magic
;
^J^
<*^
?
//Are rose-bud
;
o o
/$jj^3 ,
or
(J*jY
'
ê
^
e moon'
156. Some adjectives and adverbs are formed by nouns doubled, with
the letter \ alif put between them; as, u-JUl, lip to lip
;
j~\j*
9
head to
head ;
L-&J&J
, or ^jTbjf
,
colour to colour, i. e. to the top, entirely,
variegated.
Example :

A garden, the water
of
whose rivulets (is) ripling ; an orchard, the
melody
of
whose birds (is) weighed (measured), that
full
of
many co-
loured tulips, and this
full
of
fruits (ofj various hues.
The two first lines of this tetrastich are in pure Arabick.
157. The termination ^li, as well as
^f,
denotes colour; as, aU^
orj^Xif, roê coloured; ^djôj, emerald colour.
Diminutive Nouns, j+k^Z ^JuJ\.
158. These nouns are formed by adding the syllables CJl, te~,
**-*
xj or i-*jj**
j\j 9
to the primitive.
159. The syllable CS- is generally added to primitives signifying
animated beings; as,
jy,
a fl; CJj^, /#/e marc; &?*. or
&,
to nouns signifying either animate or inanimate beings
;
as, _b
,
a gar-
den, dLsPb , a little garden
;
y
,
a goat,
^y,
, a little goat,
160. If the primitive end in silent a
9
(uJisr* Îjb) preceded by a
long syllable, the x is changed into lS
;
as, <uU-, garment ; CJcU-,
sw2// garment. But if a long syllable do not precede, the diminutive
is formed by changing a into
^J
;
as, ô, taste
; cjj*)
some taste.
161.
**
is applicable to inanimate beings only; as, jta or <5Jl^, a
grain; xp\^, a small grain.
g*j
3
is sometimes found to form the dimi-
nutive; as,
J^\>Jire ;
x*gJLj\,
ajirefly.
PL
162. The diminutive in <_-
?^*-*j\}
?
occurs but seldom ; as,jj
,
a sow
/
jj~*{,
a little son; ju>-a
,
daughter
; jj&-6$
/t/e daughter. ,
<fclj ,
*^
, and
1
, are terminations of the diminutive noun
;
but they occur
very rarely.
OF THE FORMATION OF NOUNS. 85
Of the Hasili Masdar, j**a*
J**U..
163. From the compounds above mentioned, or any other adjectives,
compounded or simple, may be formed abstract substantives, by adding
^* (uJijy^, See Art. 35).
j\~**jL bashful
^L^l bashfulness.
CO CO
Jviî^lj learned. ^jc^-IjIj learning.
abuo 6/tfcA:.
(J&V*
8 blackness.
But if the adjective end in (uJisr
10
^la) the silent *,
the abstract is
made by changing * into
^f;
as, <U\o, strange
; ,p^*# ?
strangeness,
<sj!c
j^j,
unconnected; ^s\z
^j,
want
of
connection. If the primitive
end in
[^3*>
Îfc), the aspirated
*, ^
only is added ; as, al&db , a king
y
^jblAdb, royalty.
Many abstract nouns are formed in this manner, expressing the
qualities of the primitives from which they have been derived ; as,
j>
,
an ass
; igj*~
9
stupidity
y
lJ^, a
wolf;
^j?,
the ravenous disposition
of
that animal,
j^,
many
<J^j^
manhood, &c. (This is another
office of the i^-*J <^b )
.
*
It must not be inferred, however, that words not terminating in this
^,
t
are not abstract in signification, for /*u**d is perfectly equivalent to
^-oîXSj kissing the
feet.
164. If the word end in alif \ or
j
, the soft hamza must be introduced
before the final
^
;
as, \j\j
9
wise;
fj\j\^ 9
wisdom/ U-jl,
seeing;
^yli^, sight
;
)j
J>,
rosy-faced;
J3J
jf
?
being rosy-faced
;
yc ,
9
having black hair
;
Jy*
<L~>. But if
j\j
follow fathah ('), hamza is not
introduced; as,
y
9
new;
^
9
novelty.
(See Art. 33.) This
^
is
termed ^Jus-c ^b, ê
^
o/*ê masdar.
165. Another class of these nouns is formed from the third person
preterite of a verb; as, w-^j^
^.y^>
buying and selling; <XLj &*>],
coming and going.
166. A third class of the hasili masdar is formed from the imperative
of verbs ; as,
l
9
conversation
; ijy*-,
search
;
from
i:
Û^, imperative
9 <* 9 9 b S-
f
9 Jâ^9
y*~.
(with
jj!j
^b, Art. 76.)
* / *
167. A few of these nouns are formed by adding silent * (u-aisr*
i/U),
to the primitive; as, aij
^1,
a flint. (See Art. 154).
168. A noun denoting fitness, (^J>U), is often derived from Persian
O <* 9
infinitives by the addition of
Ls
9
(uJjyt*>, Art. 35);
as,
<J^>
5
j^
to
be eaten;
iJ^j^ft
to be done. (This is termed uôU
<^V.?
Art. ^3.)
*
*
As there are also cases, in which the *;J ^b is added to the infinitive,
the student must be careful rightly to distinguish them. (See the Commentary
c
the <ul3jJcX-j, Calcutta,
1812, p. 1).
on
87
169. Others are made, either by adding
j\
to the third person of the
past tense
;
as,jUjJ, sight;
Jsj9
speech
;Jz>j,
motion
;
or, by adding
it- or cJ\ to the contracted participle ; as,
JLU1 ,
rest
;
fj*})**,
praise
;
^13! J, learning
;
tlA~j$,
clothing,
170. The letter 1 alif added to some adjectives, forms other abstracts
;
c c
as, *,f, warm; U,f, warmth
; \j\j4,
length, from j^J, /orag, &c.
171. Nouns denoting place, (i_j> ÛJ) are formed by the termi-
nations ÛJ,
^,
jb, #U,
j\j,
*\f, s^, or U;andjb, jL,
j,
or
1,
so added to words will imply abundance :
e.
g.
^l^W # gallery
of
pictures.* ^L^J afamily.
jlL^l^j ê mansion
of
the spring. *1&jLc a place
of
worship.
jU-JS' Sozsyer
of
roses, x&izJy, a place
of
pleasure.
*
The five following of these names are the titles of as many excellent books :
the Baharistan and Gulistan, are poetical compositions by Jami and Satdi ; the
Nigarhtan is a very entertaining miscellany in prose and verse ; and the Sha-
hardan is a miscellaneous work in Arabick upon the history of Egypt ; as to the
Sumbulistan, I have seen it quoted, but recollect neither the subject, nor the
name of its author. The Greeks sometimes gave these flowery titles to their books
;
thus Pamphilus published a treatise on different subjects, which he called KetjKjjv
jb^<*^>
a meadow
;
and Apostolius compiled an \o)Via
j\j
&Lsuj
,
a garden
of
violets, or a collection of proverbs and sentences.
^J^ rose bush. U- <
>1^,
a place
of
sleep
,
a bed.
tf\Aj{j*
or
"|
j\* Jjjj jp/ce abounding in
c
La c/zes
of
sugar.
JG^JLlJ
rivers.
j^sÂ^î a garden
of
hyacinths. j\~Jb
mountainous.
jlLî, ê country
of
lions.
$*
a place abounding in de>
(
J&mi^
fairy-land.
mons.
lif
bed
of
roses.
$J\
a place abounding infire.
jW^
a border
of
tulips. U>y- rcery happy.
The learner must remember, that, when these compounds are used as
distinct
substantives, the termination
J\
of the plural, and
\j
of the ob-
lique case, will be added to them as occasion may require ; as,
Sing. Nom. Â
l
*^#~0
Obi.
o V(a girl with) a sweet mouth.
Plur. Nom. Jutd
^j**
"]
y(girls with) sweet mouths.
Obi.
\J\jJb4
^tj^)
172. The Persian verbs are compounded either with nouns and ad-
jectives, or with prepositions and other particles.
c
173. The verbs chiefly used in the first sort of composition are
jj*,
to do
;
jS~ZJ>, to draw out
; j6jj\,
to bring;
c
^wlb, to have
;
^>-^,
to make; jJyo^, to order
; j^^-j
to devour;
jj
, to strike
;
ôy,
to bear
;
jj^J , to ^/tozy
;
^lif or
<j&4J>,
to become
;
j&*\ ,
to cowje
/
^Jjj, to see
;
-î/, to take
;
and
^V.j
to
find.
The most common
G
of these is
(j^S, which is joined in all its inflexions to a multitude of
Arabick masdars, or verbal nouns, as well as to Persian adjectives and
C 9 1/
participles : these are termed, tiôx* ,+z jj\*A*
,
invariable masdars.
Examples :*
C)4j*
j\j*\
to confess.
jJ^jUaw! to expect.
<jJj
f^j
to return
c
jj^
aUj to complete.
C ^_ 9 9,
(jAjj)
fj-s^
to assault.
jJiji Jjb to remember.
I j <
-^
fo wonder.
^yli-ljjjjix^ fo excuse.
ijjiji
<s~+>- to envy.
Ô^J jlioc! o believe.
O^j* ji
to
fill,
jj.^ cJy
to leave.
jAjs jJJs to rise (oriri).
c
^Ju-i jUasj! fo expect.
c
^L J #o moisten.
9 C
^j^/fj C-jUHI jfo esteem.
^jJiX ^jJbXc fo 6e astonished.
jJl? j^f LL^î *o #e
afflicted.
ij&*\
jJt\) o appear.
j^t> ^\->"l fo 6e
benefited.
*
It should be observed that the Persians, in adopting words from the Arabick,
frequently alter the vowels, and sometimes the consonants, in order to adapt
them to their own vicious pronunciation : thus we have Lsliu for Ûj,
\j+j
tfJ C Ô ' 9
for
c^xi'j &c. constantly: so, also ^.û for ^j^c, ^jUj>
for ^Û^l, &c.
to which many others might be added.
L 9
CO
jj^ + to grieve.
\$**H
L&toji
t &e educated.
c)t$jj>-
Jo^ to swear,
d^Jj^j*
io ê
confirmed.
o
^^L
^jj
to enlighten.
Thus Hafiz
;
9 9 O C /
9 * o c o
J?
<->t tLS/
^sAW^
J^
<j
_/
/ t morning
;
cup-bearer, fill a cwp oh7A tmVze
;
ê rolling
of
the
heartens makes no delay ; be quick. The sun
of
the wine has
arisen
from
the east
of
the cup
; if
thou seekest the leaf
of
pleasure,
leave sleep.
9 O
174. The verbs
jjj
and j^yojb, are very frequently used in compo-
C 90 C
sition; as,
g&j
xju, to call aloud; ^&y*js
J*s,
to consider : the latter,
however, is generally put into the mouth of a superior : thus Jalaluddin
Rozbahar
;
fup O 9 C-
/ O 9
Until the nightingale have sung aloud in thy praise, I am all ear like
the rose-tree.
And Hafiz;
C A, f C 9 U C
Command [or deign to
afford)
the consideration
of
the intelligent ;
where
is the rose without a thorn ?
175. Some of the particles, with which verbs are compounded, are
significant, others redundant and ornamental ; as,
j^ôljj
to enter, [to come to the
O'^T^ J-
t0 res^
c
door).
f
ji&\j
j\)
to withhold.
C)6jj\
jJ to bring in.
jj^! Jji to descend.
l
^!Li\j>-
j
j
to require.
^-SjIj
lt^j
* detain.
îb
jJ to understand.
^
j]
j -^ Jo banish, to confine
^Jwol
^j
fo ascend.
to a place.
^^S
y,
to return.
176. In the present tense of a compound verb, the particle
^
is in-
serted between the two words of which it is composed ; as, ^dj>
j^
,
to
fill.
Sing. Plur.
9 9 9 9
? 9 9 9
lS^ lS* A
thou
fittest,
&+&
Lgo
j^
you
fill.
9 9 C 9
&&
i^y{
he
fills.
xî
(Â
they
fill.
177. Sometimes the two words, of which a verb is compounded, are
placed at a great distance from each other ; as,
O western breeze, say in kindness to yon tender
fawn,
thou hast con-
fined
us to the hills and deserts
;
where
*^1j^**j, the simple preterite of ^^b^, to confine ;
releguer, is
separated by three words. The noun .^ has a number of different senses,
and is therefore a difficult word in the Persian language ; it signifies the
head, the top, the point, the principal thing, the air, desire, love, will,
intention, SfC, and sometimes, its meaning is so vague, that it seems a
mere expletive, though the Persians undoubtedly feel its force.
[
93
]
OF PERSIAN AND ARABICK NUMERALS, <M* Ju^\.
178. The numerals and invariable parts of speech belong more pro-
perly to a vocabulary than to a grammar
;
but, for the use of such as
will take the trouble to learn them by heart, I will here subjoin the most
common of them.
Arabick.
Cyphers. Persian.
Masc.
Fem.
I
CJl) one.
A*\
9 ^jj u?^5
*^^*
\
h
; ?
,j two.
c&\ cfi\
r j\
<)J
&
1 i *& six,
&~>
V
1
Persian.
^
one.
j*
two.
<Uj three.
Af
four.
c
jive.
six.
LÂJb seven.
&
eight.
9
nine.
Xd ten.
eleven
%-+*>>
A
L^JJb eisrht. <UuU$ ÛJ
S O
ar*> ten. ijLs. ^s.
I i *jjl> eleven. JLc j^-1 irî-e
t/*>-t
*
The tanwin (^), or any vowel following the last letter, as here applied
to the Arabick numerals, is generally omitted when those numerals are used in the
Persick.
94 OF PERSIAN AND ARABICK NUMERALS.
Arabick.
Cyphers. Persian. Masc. Fern.
o ^^ y C c c
ir S*Jj1jJ ê/tJe. JLz uji if^JLc UiSl
c y ^
'
<
C y
\r
^^-
J
thirteen* ^tfi.au
^^
C-?^j
o * ^ c - c o
\f
/
fourteen.
,1**^1
5r*
W^
GO X- * c, x, o y c
u
*jj3b
fifteen.
.,*,. L4> &****>' <*/>
cc ^ /in ^ o -55
n
sjjjU, sixteen.
-*!.. 4lXc
i^c^
c ^ ,. c / o ^ o
|v
#A&fc seventeen. .-L..C &**} if JLc *-^~>
&
* * / o
tA
Jw*& eighteen. JLc JUJ
o / y y
< X C ^
n
WJji
nineteen* ^Le &c*7 4^-luC _*mJ
o ^ / o y 9
<*
r*
S
twenty.
cttr* cULrf
*/
'
C ,. 9 s S
* 9 t * S
ri twenty-one.
Oisî
Mj
03ji*j
*&*.),
r*
&
thirty.
dfa.
'Jli
p*
Jv>-
forty.
s 9
o
y 9 <-
c / 9 c
* 9 <~
0*
SUH
fifty-
CY***-
V
4, '
sixty.
or~;
c y 9
x 9<-
V
jlîjb seventy.
c!^-
8
OS*"?"*
A*
eighty.
y 9
Q
*i
ninety.
cyw
/ 9 O
1"
&*o a hundred.
cX*3jL> two hundred.

OF PERSIAN AND ARABICK NUMERALS. 95
Arabick.
Cyphers. Persian. Masc.
s. 9
Fern.
["
lXd*M0 three hundred. Lie llJ^j LI* <:>%
p*
c
du*jl^>. ybwr hundred.
s- 9 C
Llo
+-*j\
S- 9 o
&*
o
V
Jive
hundred.
$. 9 O
$ 9 O
V
o
six hundred.
s. i>
V
CO
seven hundred.
A*
cXnwalJUwJb eight hundred.
$
Lie
^toÛJ&jUJ
V nine hundred.
!>
jtjfc one thousand.
<J1
1

*
jj^w ten thousand.
uJDi ljU.
!
jjj"fc dw? one hundred
thousand
or ii<J
179. ORDINALS,
JeU
djj
J*
jjudt
^
ffiuuH ;UJL
Arabick.
Persian.
n
'
f
first.
Masc. Fem.
second.
/
third.
tijtt
fourth.
U
Aoh
f*
fifth.
3
^Lm^cIc^
96 PERSIAN ADVERBS.
All the other Persian ordinals are formed in the same manner by adding
/ to the cardinal numbers.
180. Arabick numerals of fraction and alternation are of the forms
Ô 9 SPp S^s? 5 & 09 S 99 S <^s9
<J*i
,
jjî
, l)?*-
;
j
an(l
J*^
j
as
?
<-^Jj or wJ^Jj or ti*-i5
,
f^sV^
;
(the
s o
last is the diminutive form), and uuU, eêrj/ ^Vrf (hour, day, &c.)
9
181. Numerals of the form
JUi
imply multiples of any thing
; as,
9 9
tp$,
containing three
;
,/V J?
containingfour. Distributives are formed
by the mere repetition of the cardinal numbers
;
<^!j JÛ, one by one.
PERSIAN ADVERBS.
182. We have no forms peculiar to adverbs, either in this or in the
Arabick language : words used for this purpose being nouns construed
with, or without particles, as occasion shall require, e.
g.
coo
><-
j\+~>much. Clti] little. \&xA this place, here. Is? I that place, there,
OA o
o 9
<\L\j *S>- .âlsT Â5L
J
J\
If
I could also send my soul (to) that place that trifling present,
what would it be !
o
\s*i\j\ hence. Ld
I
j^
thence.
/ ^ 0.^.
j*-.*^
hither. j~*A
thither.
Uf where or Isf
jl whence.
U? -& wheresoever.
whither.
9
fjjj+J
without.
9 o
jj
j*^\ within, to which manj
others might be added.
PERSIAN ADVERBS.
97
77*e warbling nightingale (is) within the garden ; the deer proudly
walking within the meadows,
ji or Jjy below. % above.
That would not be an evil which comes from
above.
jIjÎj, Mjs? or^sr
5
,
(in) the morning.
*l*L2>, (in) the evening.
b
^J yesterday. \&js to-morrow.
JL^
before. ^-j
after.
f c c /
o
<^l rcoa). *l&l then.
j^
zpêw. AjuUjb directly.
iSâ eaer. 43 ja never. jyjb yet.
J\
j\
**] afterward.
c
\j until. tÂ^Jb always.
^jj\j
once.
j^Ji,^
again.
b
*& also.
jj
even. *& and
w
together. l^J alone.
The following adverbs are nearly synonymous, and signify, as, //Are,
2W the same manner as, &c.
.? o .PC /> .PC O ? O / /
j?^>
cttf^> c^t>
^
5
<fî *9
U
^' ^'
? 9 C CO c
183. INTERROGATIVES, ^L\ ÛJ.
jS where ?
\jj>- wherefore ? <Xks>- how many P
*?*
j^
j\
on wnat acc<>unt
?
jj>.
how $ &p>- how or what.
98 PERSIAN ADVERBS.
184. CONJUNCTIONS,
J^
or ujL lJjjL.
*- or
j
and. *fe or
^
^50'
Vt
or*
J*\
or
j>
if*
&
o
o o
a^-jfl or
^^
though. \*\
,
jLJt
,
î , t!L\j but, moreover.
CO
o c
*Na*-j or 4&&j>j}b although,
^j*^
therefore.
^
then, so.
&& since.
tyj
because. j>,*
unless. >. except.
taL lest by chance. *\y>- whether.
185. PREPOSITIONS, ^jT** or
JL
ujj^.
j\
ox
j
from, by,
of. j\
ox
j
wpow.
^-j
a/iter.
(JL-o
before.
<ôru> joined to the noun, to. U bmYA.
^
without.
v^L^
wer. jJ 2W.
i^ly
or
c^^
^/br, or account
of
L^w>-jl <>r
^J^
ow account
of.
jL* between,
^sy*
toward.
jjî beneath. j
tj
under.
j)j
above. JjJ we^r.
186. INTERJECTIONS, cdIÎ
UT or
l^J
o^ / *T ah
!
fcU**
or
Wj^
^5 '
(JJojI
behold ! î would.
Thus in the tale of the merchant and the parrot by Jalaluddin Rumi.
9 Si.
Alas ! alas ! alas ! that such a moon should be hidden under the cloud!
PERSIAN ADVERBS. 99
jUi and yt$yJ*\ are likewise interjections that express grief : thus in
a tetrastich by the sultan Togrul Bin Erslan
;
9 O
yu c 9 c c
'
/ c ^. c
Yesterday^ such a soul-delighting enjoyment ! and to day, such a
world-inflaming
absence ! alas ! that time upon the register
of
my
life,
writes that one day, this one (another) day
!
This great hero and poet was the last king of the Seljukian race : he
was extremely fond of Firdausi's poetry, and in the battle in which he
lost his life, he was heard to repeat aloud the following verses from the
S hahnamah
:
O fc c o
?
o o o /
c c o o of
ceo o
* 6 9 9
* These lines are quoted by d'Herbelot,
p. 1029, but they are written differently
in my manuscript of Firdausi, which I have here followed.
100 PERSIAN ADVERBS.
When the dust arose
from
the numerous army, the cheeks
of
our name-
possessing (heroes) turned pale
;
I raised this mace, (and with) a
single stroke, I left
the foot-soldiery in that place
;
my steed raged
like the elephant, and the ground became agitated like the river
Nile.
[
101
]
OF THE PERSIAN SYNTAX.
ON THE USE OF NOUNS.
187. Nouns being the names of things or events taken either simply or
metaphorically, may be arranged under two heads : viz. generic and
specific. Generic nouns, whether simple or compound, substantive or at-
tributive, (See Art. 299, note), are those which designate whole genera,
species, classes, or the like, either of things or events.
Specific
nouns
are those which designate individuals as such : of this sort are proper
names of men, places, kingdoms, &c.
188. Generic nouns may be considered as definite, so far as they dis-
tinguish the genera, species, &c. of persons or things, for which they
are used. Specific nouns will always be definite, unless made vague
for the purpose of expressing the character of some one person or thing
generally : e.
g.
J^
will mean the rose generally, including the whole
species of flowers so called; so Û-, the thorn. When we speak thus
far definitely of these, we may say, <A,lj jU
j
jf, the rose is not
without the thorn
;
i. e. every rose, or the whole species of the rose,
has its thorn.
189. But if we wish, in any way, to limit ourselves in the use of these
nouns, we must use some other word or particle for this purpose. If we
102 OF THE PERSIAN SYNTAX.
would express the idea of one, or any, in a vague sense, we must use
the cjj^-j ^b, or jjsiuj
,
(Art. 66, &c.) if other shades of meaning, then
such qualifying words as will suit our purpose : e. gi
**
c *
c/JJ
^
or*
y
~T
-^
For what purpose comes to thee a basket
of
roses?
From my rose-garden bear (away) one leaf.
In this example,
J<T
signifies the rose, or roses generally, as before
:
jjut
5
has the j^&J ^b , attached to it, and therefore will signify a basket,
any basket, or one basket, the same may be said of
jjyj
(from
jjj).
In
the next place, in the phrase,
^ i
Jc^,
my rose garden, the word
jl^J^, is restricted by the addition of the pronoun
a
r<
;
the
fj^^y
*XjJ*
intervening. (Art. 58).
190. Nouns, already introduced into any discourse, (1st.) or (2nd.)
Nouns implying things with which we are familiar, will require no re-
stricting particles or words : ( Art. 68. ) e.
g.
1st.
***j,
uiX
*&*'+* VÛjb
/ have heard
of
a King, &c The King asked,
tyc.
2nd. ^JlusJ j Ûr Îj
j1/j
^^n
j^
The father smiled wc? the brothers were pained to the soul
ON THE USE OF NOUNS. 103
191. Abstract generic nouns, unrestricted, are used in the singular
number only
;
as,
Life is (as) the snow.
192. Other generic nouns may be used, either in the singular or
plural; as,
0<J
tfjbj f-<*b V
***jj
The religious with avarice is a highway-robber.
Or,
The worshippers require the reward
of
(their) obedience.
193. Of two nouns in construction, the Persians seem to prefer the
first's being in the singular number ; as,
J&jj?
c^*^
3
the favour, or
favours,
of
the great : but the plural is sometimes used
;
as, jjlU-1
pj&-<y
excellent manners.
194. Collective nouns, as
JJtl
9
an army
; >*y,
a people
/
<UjIL, a
tribe, Sec. are nothing more than generic nouns, and are used in the
same way, i. e. may be considered as singulars or plurals, as the writer
may choose, and may be qualified just as other nouns are.
195. Specific nouns, such as proper names, will necessarily be ap-
plied like others taken definitely ; but, when they are made indefinite
by receiving the jti ^b , &c. they will be considered as other indefinite
nouns; as,
^^^^
an Abraham, one like Abraham,
faithful, &c. so
^*LU-
5
a Hatim, liberal, &c.
196. Proper names (*L) are such as Juj , Zaid
;
or they may be titu-
OP ? C Oil 9
lar
(c^^,)
or patronymic, (c-j^â^)
;
as, first,
&^\
JAc ÛJ.
197. In conformity, perhaps, with the principle that generic nouns
involve whole species, and consequently plurality in their signification,
it is, that when construed with the numerals they are invariably placed
in the singular number ; as, * lIJo
,
J^-* j*S,
^^
&-;, owe ttzaw, ftô me/z,
three men
;
yj*
j\j3b s*a, a hundred thousand persons
;
and so on, in
which the numeral generally precedes. If, however, the thing numbered
precede, it receives the j&J ^b
;
as,
jj
,A*ai> ^0 sections. The
o c c
word 4*i>- requires the same government; as,
J^j
^^5
or Au>-
u^jjjy,
some days.
198. As ordinals, they are construed like other attributives; and taken
as fractions,
l!&
one is preceded by the number required ; as, cib <U,
a third; cJj *
j
, tfewtf/j, &c.
Of Nouns qualifying one another.
199. Substantives or attributives, used as substantives, (Arte 299,
note),
may be qualified by others following placed in apposition

as, ^liil Jf,
9 9
>
rose scattering
;
gy
c-^>, good
(
of) face
; ij$j
^jji
,
fairy (in) face
;
(Art. 144, &c.)
200. An alif is sometimes introduced (Art. 156) between two such
words; as,
1>^j,
head (to) foot
; j>}j,
breast (to) breast, level, &c.
when addition, progress, entireness, or the like seems to be intimated.
These are usually considered as compounds.
201. Substantive nouns, or attributives used as substantives, may
qualify one another, in the relation of the genitive case. When this
takes place, and the qualifying word follows in the order, the foregoing
c
one will receive the vowel kesrah : (Art.
59),
e.
g.
llX-J dj* a good man
;
%99
<j C
^j}\
**i U-, a great house
;
ll~**>\j t\j, a true or right way
;
jlfcl&jlj
,
qôj, kings
of
the earth;
<*-Aj>-
ls\&\-,
ruined houses.
202. This holds good however the qualifying' words may be formed,
or, how
T
numerous soever the words subsequently qualifying one another
c > 9
may be; as, j\*L <j^J!jl&
Ûl&db,
justice-renowned kings
;
jlyx*
imJja
^\
c33U^, the governors
of
the regions
of
those parts : or, with
any of the separate pronouns following
;
as,
j\^\
VDj&> *-iJ
3
the re-
O 9 <*9
pelting
of
the injury
of
them. So also, J
1*3
^x;j&
e^j\fb
<&}P
f*K ^.j^^f
'j& jkj
**rf
?
the weo
f
those who twist the ring-
lets
idol
of
Indian extraction
characterized by inflaming and blan-

dishmentbitter-wordedsweetly-accented, #c
203. The infinitive being a noun, is subject to the same construction
;
as,
j\ gj*-
jtXJL5~, the pardoning
of
his blood
:
and to the declension
and construction of nouns generally
204. If, however, the qualifying word stands first in the order, the
kesrah is not added, (i. e. the i^^sUl, does not take place), as
&j< *>>
a good man
;
*\L jl#s-, world-king, for king
of
the world.
205. So the demonstrative pronouns jT that, and Â this, which
always stand first in the order; as also the words t-^r^L?; e.g.
J
J c-^^L,
a sahibdil, i. e. a Sufi, so styled
;
j~*,
in such compounds, as
cu**k/*>j
an event
;
(
jjJ.'A
^,
a dish
of
barley-meal, so called, &c.
206. So also words construed with attributives ending in 43
1,
or the
o s- c
l^juJ ,_^l>, although these follow in the order; as/ ti\jj >^l>, not
*3L>; xS^b, women's clothing
;
^sîb j^c, not ,_&*& d^c, an Indian
c
Trcarc ; (Artt. 75-154) ; words preceding the relative *f; as, < jô, ê
man who: as also all the particles, except Ax),
after;
(Jô,
before;
o
go
i>*J and
LLÂJi,
wery
^,
ow account
of;
e^f->
ow account
of;
j\j^c
,
between
; y>,
towards
;
jj,
below
; %
, above
;
&\j*Ji>, with
;
^
,
behind; jUi^, after.
207. According to the Oriental Grammarians, when one word is added
for the purpose of qualifying another in the relation of the genitive,
neither of them need have the ^C? ^b
,
(Art. 69) . Cases of the contrary
b
however, seem to occur; as,
jJ^JU*,
two years
;
Jo^ -A}', some per-
y 9 C
sons
;
jjjs? ij^j),
a naked Darvesh : (if this
^j
does not really re-
present the
c>Uj
which I suspect is the case). When, however, the
order is preserved, the
^
is not added ; as, +&++J* \jXj\j tiXU, I heard
of
a king's son. But, if these words be considered as compounds, the
o c /
f
will be regularly added to the last ; as, ,Û- Ju-i*^ js***L*.
^
Jjy
,
a Feridun in pomp, a Jemshid in dignity.
208. This relation is often marked by the addition of a particle ; as,
/ 9 O^
j))\
î'l^, a ring
of
gold; (jJjUj\ jjo, one
of
the kings
; \j &)jj^
t ,
son to Zaid, or Zaid's son. (See Art. 59.)
209. The inseparable pronouns are added with
(-)
; as, ^J\,my
horse, &c. But, if the preceding word end in
\
9
or inj not pre-
^ 9
ceded by
(-), ^j
will be added; as, *->Li3, my
fate
;
{J*l}j\
his
face.
If the silent a precede, \ will be added ; as, *\ <uU. , my garment.
(Art. 92).
Of the Use of the Comparative and Superlative Degrees,
or of the
J-*aJ ÛJ.
.*
210. The superiority of one of any two things, &c. compared, may be
intimated by the insertion of the particles jl,
<, or of the <îU|, which
last seldom occurs : as,
More fresh than the young branch
of
desire.
C fc o
Job jtalj ^ & jJ^j^*- al^*
The intelligent dwarf (is) foêr than the tall dunce.
FFff/fc owe /ess than
self it is improper to institute equality.
211. But, when these words are construed as nouns with others, the
LîUl , will be used, as in other cases : e.
g.
/ c f o /c b
The worst of men zs the person, who, grounded on bad opinion,
trusts no one.
212. In this case we sometimes have an ellipsis, as in other languages s
e.g.
c f o ^ o
O^l Crjk
c//
trf*
CTP'V
Firdausl is the most eloquent
of
Toos, i. e. /^l?
J&1
^^y
*ai , ê most
eloquent
of
the people
of
Toos**
* This, Mr. Lumsdcn says, may be construed to mean the best of the Persian
poets, taking (j~jb to signify merely the place of his residence. If this be the
case, it may be thus construed : Firdausl is the most eloquent : he is
of
Toos :
Of the Relatives.
f ^ * o
213. These particles (termed by the Persians
Jjfj*
^j{*~>\
,
connec-
tives), i& and &>- (Art.
97), may have any noun or pronoun whatever
Co o c
for an antecedent ; as, t&
6j<
or
^(.y
, ê w?w tiyAo
/
&~o, <^
j! , ^^
?
c.
or te?\j&, &c. as the context may require.
GOO
214. In a few instances <fc>- is used for <&
;
as, jÛu! J&ili^jd
^^v*
x&
t^l?
>
whoever are Darveshes, to them lend. And, vice versa, i is
sometimes used to imply something inanimate ; as, &
AfiT,
that which,
&c.
215. Where no ambiguity would arise, the antecedent may be omitted
;
as, ij^îji
Lgftyji
j~++<* s^\i
^,
( as to ) whatever may be ready, send (it
)
CO P.
quickly, for k>-j& or ^lyfc, whatever. And, after Jb or Uf, the re-
thus, l^w^\
U*$
j\ sÂ
erf,
J
<ff^ lS^J^j*
j
which Mr. Lurasden gives thus :
e^w!
c^
Ûxiil ^f^l /j*i jl^rt jl /<-^ti/ ;
i. e. Firdausi
of
Toos, is the
best
of
the Persian poets," which is incorrect in more respects than one. For,
first, instead of
<*mU ÎjtiSI
P*\ , he ought to have written, &c.
l\j*&
^
a3
\,
it being contrary to the rules of the Arabick Grammar to give the article to the
first of two nouns in the state of construction. And, secondly, if he meant to say
the poets
of
Persia^ as it is evident he did, he should have used gSjj}
,
not
c
U~j\i
Fars being only a province, and one in which Toos is not situated. (Pers.
Gram. Vol. II.
p. 279, &c.)
9 GO
lative itself may be omitted ; as, J^3
jj
câU? <U*j
ltO*
j
every person
(who) places hisface
towards the temple
of
seeking thee, for &L~jb : so
**kcT j;JLc jUaLa U=yb, every place (to which) the sovereign
of
love has
come
,-
for <jIs^j&.
216. Whenever a relative pronoun (and here nouns of time and
place may also be included), is used as a subordinate subject in any
proposition, the corresponding demonstrative pronoun may be inserted
in some following part of the sentence, or not, as the intention of the
c 9*9
writer, or perspicuity, may require: e.g.
m^j*
i-ftyjri
j-^v^V*?
6
(as to) whatever may be ready
,
send (it) quickly. Here
\jj\
may
>p 9
be added after the word
j~++*
; but the sentence is sufficiently clear
without it.
o 9 c
217. In the following, ^jJjU^J gtf# j,1jJ
jj
4&T, (as to) to (man)
who has no gold, they esteem him (good)
for
nothing. It may be
doubtful whether a person or a thing is meant, without the addition of
the pronoun
JZ, ,
him
;
its omission, therefore, would be a fault.
218. But, if these relatives stand in a different relation, the construc-
tion will differ accordingly
;
as,
In the inn
of
the world, which has no permanency, it is not proper to
take rest.
ON THE USE OF NOUNS. Ill
219. With the noun of place, however, taken as a subordinate sub-
ject, the correlative will be inserted.
(As to) ê zw
of
the world, which has no 'permanency, in it it is im-
proper to take rest.
220. On this principle, the insertion or not of the particle
\j
after the
antecedent will be regulated : e.
g.
(As to) any person, whom you may perceive (to be) avaricious, he is
not a seeker
of
virtue.
If the construction differ from this,
\j
will be necessary.
O-6-3J ^>-
U-JIL (^J w^clL l^Jb
Whomsoever you perceive (to be) avaricious, he is not a seeker
of
virtue.
221. In the first case the verb ^û, does not affect the antecedent
c
ij~j&,
hence
\j
cannot be inserted: but, as the verb must have an ob-
jective case,
j\
must be introduced, and it must take
\j
In the second,
the verb affects the antecedent, it therefore takes
\j,
and no necessity
exists for the introduction of the pronoun, [f Mr. Lumsden had ob-
served the operation of this principle, he would have saved himself and
his reader a world of trouble. (Pers. Gram. Vol. II.
pp.
95-106.)
112 ON THE SUBJECT AND
222. It will be seen from the above examples, that where the ante-
cedent happens to stand as the objective case to two verbs, one in the
former, the other in a subsequent part of the construction
;
or, when it is
an objective case to the one, and a nominative to the other, no correla-
tive noun will be introduced, unless perspicuity should require it : e.
g.
That (person) whom he calls, he causes not to run to the door
of
any one.
not &c. JoljjJ
u^jAj \jj\
*\)1^, &
\jj\
Or, as in another example cited above,
c^~~jo
j:
yi. c-^lH? jt, not
c>
>+i
jtf*
u-pJlt
l-Lj
t.^lL?
\j&
That is, wherever words can be spared, they ought not to be inserted.
ON THE SUBJECT AND PREDICATE OF PROPOSITIONS.
223. As the Persian language has no terminations to mark the gender
or case of nouns, and is sparing in the use of articles, it is sometimes
difficult to determine which is the subject, and which the predicate.
Mr. Lumsden
*
has laid it down as a rule, that, the subject will generally
come first in the order, because it has naturally the first place in the
mind. The native Grammarians, however, affirm that no reliance can be
placed on this rule ; but, that we must ascertain which of the two is
*
Pers. Gram. Vol. II.
p. 152, &c.
PREDICATE OF PROPOSITIONS. 113
the more definite, the better known, or the most consonant with the
mind of the writer we may be consulting. The following are the rules
given in the < *J*jA\ jby>~* 1. Of a noun substantive and attributive,
the substantive will be the subject. 2. Of two substantive or attri-
butive nouns, that which is definite. 3. Of two such nouns equally
indefinite in form, that which is less general in signification. 4. Of the
compared, and the compared with, the compared. 5. If both have the
indefinite
&
,
the context must determine. 6. Of such two, that of
which the signification is least known. 7. When every thing else fails,
we must have recourse to the context. The examples given are these :
G O
1. <j^~A 6j** <-r>T
Water is cold.
2. *x*l #jb jl uJ His lip became (red as) wine.
Ci>iii^K ji U .j.l Our insolence is full
of
toil.
3.
c^-J
dW"" cft~**\
Man is an animal.
c
.
c
' ' *
]
The people (are) the root ; the
'
'r
J sultan is the tree.
9
t
5.
J,j
by b
jjj
i-?^/*
Was a man withyou, or a woman?
c
*- 1
^
r
^r is
fire,
(supposing the wordjli
^
J to be less known than the other.
)
u*9/
<J*^*
>**!'
jj^jltfi *<tiU-
_//"
tf^
destructive beauty should
wash the cheek in the sea, the
fisherman
}
s boat would become
(sweet as) a perfumer's shop.
114 ON THE SUBJECT AND
In this last, if we takejlLs **j\s> , as the subject, the verse would imply
censure, and not praise, which does not seem to be the intention of the
c
poet : we must, therefore, take
^jj9
)>Uo *<ulT, for the subject.
Of the Concordance of the Subject and Predicate.
224. The next question will be, how is the concord between the sub-
ject, predicate, and the logical copula to be regulated ? The answer is,
by two considerations. 1st. By the form of such words, which maybe
termed formal. 2dly. By the meaning, which may be termed logical.
225. The formal agreement, by which both the subject and predicate
will be in the same number, takes place, 1st, when the subject inti-
mates any living being or beings ; or, 2dly, if in the plural number it
terminates in
^\ ,
though inanimate : in these cases, the predicate, if a
verb, may be in the plural number ; but, if not a verb, it may, with
the copula, be either singular or plural, optionally : Examples
:
t. C yy t C *S
1. dj\
j&\y
jU-jj or
&'j\j&\y
ÛL>j, they are rich.
+A xjugs
U or fjolfÛsy U, we are helpless.
G .P C
<*
P O C
2. JJJw>
j?~>
J^J^
or rare
ty
^ >**
cft*>j4)
the trees had become fresh.
226. The same will be the case when^fc, <U.fc, <d^, --.*>-,
or the
like accompanies a collective noun; or, when several such nouns are
connected by the conjunction
j
. In every other case, the predicate will
PREDICATE OF PROPOSITIONS. 115
take the singular number : inanimate nouns, being rather taken as col-
lectives, and construed logically as singulars : though cases occur, even
here, in which the predicate takes the plural form.
227. The subject moreover, is often placed absolutely, i. e. has no
grammatical connection with the predicate ; and may be considered as
an elliptical independent sentence. This the Hebrew Grammarians have
termed
"
the nominative absolute." And, perhaps, it is on this account
that the Arabs have termed it the \juu*
3
or beginning
;
because, it is
generally placed first in the order. In this case the concord, &c. will
be as before, either formal or logical. Examples :
? S- Ox- o
Of
"
\)fa
u^J f*rf l> u~*
(As to) a confidant
of
the secret
of
my distracted heart, the person I
see not (either)
of
the nobles or the vulgar.
tty
At,
j\j
AjS?
&)j
ti
jg
Ajj a^jj jjXuid & ^2ij\
(As to) Aristotle, who was the prime minister
of
the court, he was the
confidant
of
the secrets
of
the king in every thing good and bad.
(As to) Alexander, by the counsel
of
his learned minister, he in a little
time, became
possessor
of
the world.
We have some examples of this construction in English, which Lowth,
116 OF THE SUBJECT OF VERBS.
Murray, and other Grammarians, have precipitately, perhaps, condemned
as erroneous. See Lumsden's Pers. Gram. Vol. II.
pp.
155, &c. This
construction is very common in Arabick, and is found also in the Sanscrit
and Bengalee.
228. The copula is often elegantly omitted : e.
g.
liXjjj jl
<u*l; jd
Jfjji
jIff
The impressions
of
greatness (were) apparent on his forehead.
GO C
There is a difference between him, whose beloved ( is ) in his bosom,
With him, whose two eyes
of
expectation (are) upon the door.
OF THE SUBJECT OF VERBS,
ACTIVE AND PASSIVE.
229. The subject, or nominative to a verb, may be the subject of a
proposition, except in those cases, in which the nominative is said to be
absolute,* (Art. 227), and in that case it will be in apposition with the
*
If Mr. Lumsden had observed this distinction, I believe he would have
paid much less regard to the suggestions of his learned native than he has done.
(See Pers. Gram. Vol. II. p. 169, &c.) The distinction he makes is, that the
OF THE SUBJECT OF VERBS. 117
nominative. In every case, therefore, the concordance will be that of the
subject with the predicate of sentences. (See Artt. 224-6.) More ex-
amples need not be given.
230. Examples however are numerous, in which no definite nomina-
tive is expressed; as, jjf #Jj^T, they have related; j\ &1&
y
they have
said.
231. The nominative to a passive verb is never expressed in the
9 9<*
Persian language ; and hence the object of such verb is termed
J^*a-o
&2V3 amJ J U. If it be thought proper to express the agent, the active
voice of the verb can always be used : but, if it be deemed necessary
to conceal it, the passive may be had recourse to : as, first,
\j^j
j*&
c f 9 09 ^y
C>!>5
Omar killed Zaid : in the second, &2 fcxJL&
tX>J,
Zaid was slain.
Mr. Lumsden tells us, that if the nominative be expressed, it must be
accompanied by some intervening word expressive of the instrument
;
9 O 9 9 o c
^
as, iX &1JL& jAS. t^vwoJ
j\
dJj, Zaid was killed
&^
the hand
of
Omar.
Ijcjuc, or nominative absolute, is the subject of a nominal sentence ; while the
J^cU , or agent, is the subject of a verbal sentence only. If Mr. Lumsden had
trusted to his own understanding, he surely would never have been thus imposed
upon. Take, for example, this sentence in Lokman's Fables. lg! l^cK
%\j*>\
iÛo, (as to) a woman, she had a hen : where S[j*\ is the |juu<, and the verb
^jl, occurring, will constitute a verbal sentence, which is opposed to the
whole of his reasoning.
118 OF THE GOVERNMENT OF VERBS.
On the Government of Verbs.
232. Verbs which are neuter or passive, will have no objective case,
as in other languages ; but their influence upon other words will be
marked by the insertion of such particles, as may suit the cases required
;
as,
9 C C 9 c
A certain king was sitting with a Persian slave in a boat.
t>9 c o
A trembling fell upon his body.
9 oj 9 C^ O
T%e king's pleasure was disturbed by fo'ra.
<Ziairf a?ew to Calcutta.
233. Active and transitive verbs, will either prefix one of the particles
or postfix
\j
for the purpose of marking the objective case, whenever
the omission would be productive of obscurity : but, when this would
not be the case, no particle whatever will be introduced.
Examples
:
They bore envy towards him.

*
Is not this an instance of a passive verb construed with jl before the agent,
without any noun of instrument intervening? See Art. 231.
OF
THE GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 119
^w enemy made an attack upon Aem.
j^j
*ji ^-j
jjjj
<d^sl]
ti
Upon the whole, the Vizier carried the boy to the house.
Jo Jkiji & U^j Icjb 4m^j
t:;
i^
s
ôj
yjj
TAe Vizier heard this word, (and) willingly or unwillingly approved.
23&. Of the first and second examples nothing need be said ; the ne-
cessity of the particles being obvious. In the third, as either the subject
fjJjjj)s
or the object
(^~j),
maybe the nominative or accusative to the
verb dji
3
the necessity of some distinguishing particle must be evident
:
and, as the sense of the passage will not allow of one of the preposi-
tions,
\j
is here postfixed to the objective. In the last example, as there
is no possibility of mistaking ^s? for the nominative to the verbs JwJLo
and Jo J^~o <Jo, while the wordjjjj is so near, the introduction of any
particle would be only to multiply words without any necessity : a thing
which is never done in Persian. It must be remembered, that in no case
can a preposition and the particle
\j
be used for the same purpose.
vp -it
In the example (Art.
227),
âIc
3 u^j (^
<J?
uî
tne more re
ular
construction would be *\s.
j
^jo^-j **-J
O
ô
\j^^
but, from a propensity
which the more modern writers have, to place this particle after the
120 OF THE GOVERNMENT OF VERBS.
last word in the construction, this trifling irregularity has been intro-
duced.
235. When the verb is causal, two objective cases are often required.
In this case, a preposition will if necessary precede the one, and
\j
will be attached to the other
;
or, if no obscurity would arise, the one
or the other may have no mark affixed : e.
g.
O ft P c.
?
God .... has made me governor
of
this kingdom.
If, however, it be necessary to introduce the person acted upon by
the causal verb, as well as other objective cases, then, according to Mr.
Lumsden,* such person must be preceded by the preposition
j\
: as,
C. f C C Ox
Zaid caused the carpet to be spread by Bakr.
THE
JU-,
OR TERM OF CIRCUMSTANCE.
236. This sometimes corresponds with our adverbs, at others with
our adjectives. Its office is to qualify any noun whether it be the sub-
ject or object to a verb, and with this it may occasionally be con-
sidered as being in apposition. It often takes (1) a participial form, but
may
(2)
also be any word qualified by a suitable particle, and in that case
*
Pers. Gram. Vol. II.
p.
357.
OF THE NOUN OF CIRCUMSTANCE. 121
it may Lave the Izafut l^-'UI . It very frequently
(3) is an Arabick word
in the objective case. Examples :
1st.
f^j
'&J& J6 q/3
Making (my) pleasure I went out.
2nd. jooÛf^ ÎLA
v
jsH
^
X>
They commissioned some one for the watching
of
them.
c <#o *^c^
3rd.
jkjjk^*^ \jbSj Ujk
Willingly or unwillingly he approved.
1st. and 3rd. dtii W
y
i!
jl
Jj&JLl
\i\k:\
By chance, being a hunting, ê happend to be distant from
the
army.
In imitation of this last form, the Persians sometimes affix the particle
\j
to any word so situated : as,
By fate (i. e. by chance), one
of
his people was present.
On the Noun of Discrimination, or
j+*c*
237. The only difference between this and the preceding is, that the
JU-
must always be an attributive, the
j^--f
5
a noun substantive : many
of the Persian compounds afford instances of this construction : as,
^tj
<^,
good (as to)
face ;
i. e. beautiful,
^clj^b, clean (in) the
skirts
/
i. e. pure, unblemished, 8?c. We have a remarkable instance of
122 OF THE NOUN OF DISCRIMINATION.
this construction, with the
^
of unity following the last in the compound,
in the following example :
c^ o o c , 9
j^kUJ Uj
Jjli)
J^! Lf^
.
&*JLas>- ^<^ZZ>-
Q)jtyt
J*
A Feridun (in) pomp, a Jemshid (in) dignity, an Alexander (in)
glory, a Darius (as to) refuge.
Here, each pair is considered as one compound epithet, and the in-
definite
^j
is necessarily added to the last.
Names of things numbered, measured, weighed, and the like, are sub-
ject to this construction, and do not admit of the cîUI ; as, \jS
j\j&
a-*,
c c
a hundred thousand persons, (Art. 197). Ji3
^\
\^1U JkiW;, this
9 Ox- O
verse will remain (for) years. *Jj*;J jî j\&'&* Â
J*L
i>
^*t
i
<j,-~* >
any person had not
ftp)
this degree, deeply studied the art
of
hunt-
ing, i.e. no* person had so profoundly studied the art
of
hunting.
o
So, <te^lj
J^J^j
tWO YARDS (of) CLOTH, &C.
238. But, if the preceding noun should be used to signify one or
more of a class, sort, &c. or, if it should signify the material out of
which any thing is made, either the LîU! , or a particle will be used,
9 9
e.
g.
jij'j
*i'l^, orjj
j\ ^-fW-, a. seal
of
gold. cJji*j\
^%,
some one
of
THE KINGS, &C.
*
It must be remembered that the Persians never negative the noun, but the
verb, in sentences of this kind. To say, no person had done this or that
t
would with them be considered (as it is truly is) an absurdity.
OF CORROBORATION, EXCHANGE. 123
Of Corroboration, JulJ.
239, This is nothing more than a species of the two preceding, and
is found to consist merely in the repetition of the
JU*
or
V~-f
, for the
purpose of strengthening the expression, or rendering it more clear and
definite
;
as, j^~j u_alij) jl> jUj \j&*b l^^j . . .
j\
dj^
the men bound
the hands
of
all, one (by) one, upon their shoulders. So
^
*zJ6, /
said, I. J>y- ^c *JUf, / said, I myself:
and other expressions of the
same kind : in all of which the sense would be complete without such
additional words, though not sufficiently strong or definite for the au-
thor's purpose.
Of Exchange, or
J
jj .
240. As this is nothing more than a species of the discriminative
noun, or
:^^,
very little need be said about it here. An example or
two will therefore suffice; as, JôT
y
j^\ji
*\>J
5
Zaid thy brother is
come. The example, vji^f^jJLu^J jj;, (as to) âc?, / seized his
hand, adduced under this head by Mr. Lumsden, and proscribed by
him as being unclassical, (Pers. Gram. Vol. II.
p. 230),
belongs pro-
perly to another place ; namely, to that which treats of the nomina-
tive absolute, (Art. 227.) And, in this point of view, no objection can
be made to its authority : Mr. Lumsden himself having defended this
sort of construction, even in the English language. (See Pers. Gram.
Vol. II.
pp.
155-166
)
124 OF THE TENSES OF VERBS.
241. In many cases, in which this construction is resorted to, the word
^j^t
:
\,
(he or it means), or ^j^l, (/ mean), is introduced; as, e^^Lj
f o c c
&*x L~j (jO^ti
f^V,?
h * s s lw> 1T means, he makes much delay.
On the Use of the Tenses of the Vehb.
242. We find in analysing the Persian verb, that there really are no
more than two primitive forms to be found in each root, (Art. 100
)
; the
one constitutes the aorist, the other the simple preterite
;
and, that from
these, by the addition of other words, all the varieties known are formed.
But the aorist is also a participial form ; as,
Js,
making, or maker
;
*J,
giving, or giver. ( See Art. 134. ) This then is a concrete noun. The
simple preterite is of the form of the contracted infinitive, or masdar;
c f
as, jjs, &*\
,
i}J5>
3
&c. which, therefore, should seem to be an abstract
:
and the fact is, it is used as such, (See Art. 165.) If then the termina-
tions added during the process of conjugation, be abbreviated forms
of the personal pronouns, which the native Grammarians universally
affirm to be the case, we shall have +i for
A
J*
, and so on; and the
sense will be, J (am) making, or (am) a maker :*
and with
^
or ^^/r
prefixed ; / (am) continually making, &c. Hence, this form may be
*
So also wiih attributives
fjlfc, cf^l^,
&c. (Art. 102.)
T Supposing ^jc to be an abbreviated form of ^Jb : and this to be similar
in signification with 4jL*4Jb, always, Sec.
OF THE TENSES OF VERBS. 125
very properly taken to designate a present tense generally. But, why
O 9
the other, [jS
9
&~, Sec.) has been taken for a preterite it is out of my
power to say. I can only add, therefore, that it has been allowed to do
so ; and, that the particle ô or
iv&j
gives the idea of continuity to
this, just as it does to the other form. The imperative, will, in this
view of the subject, be nothing more than a participial noun, enounced
with some energy, and may receive these particles like the tenses just
mentioned, for the same reasons.
On the Use of the Present Tense.
243. This tense, (either with or without the particle
^
or ^^Jfc, as
the case may require), will express
(1),
either the time present with that
in which any narration is made, or
(2),
with any other, which may be
introduced by the narrator, like the historical present of the Greek,
Latin, &c. This will
(3)
sometimes be regulated by the general import
of the context ; at others,
(4)
by the insertion of particles pointing out
the time meant.
Examples :
9 t, 9
1st.
*jS**.
*j$
<jVj J^ J&*>:
(Jl*
jV
C O 9 9 O
<J
\>{j*** mVj^ j?i
\fi*jy
t
*-r>\^?\
{
*î
j\
The spring
of
the world
of
his beauty ever refreshes the heart and
soulwith hue, the men
of
(i. e. who admire exterior) form
with
126
OF THE TENSES OF YERBS.
fragrance, those
of
meaning, (i. e. who contemplate it spiritually.
Art. 152.)
2nd. jj\dj
v^*)\$*g c^>^
t& Jl>j teC
9
L-SJj
The young tiger saw, that he has (had) not the power
of
resistance.
P o
a&
^
*V UP*
(i*
*
Exercise not oppression upon the weak poor
;
For, the oppressor goes (will go) to hell, without a word (doubtless).
O
p
3rd. uu^J ^Tj Sj^
Jhj> ^y*
Whoever eats (generally, or may eat, or shall eat) the fruit of
that tree,
says (will say, or may say, as the context may require) to the planter,
O fortunate
!
O
p C.
/
C O y
4th.
*?\)&
J^))J
ti\&
îj*3
fiji
j~*>
#M^
CJb jA fjti
How long do we (shall we) continue in one nest, or (shall) pass our
time in one dwelling?
244. The distinctions of may, can, ought, will, or the like usually
ascribed to the potential mode, or the future tense, are made for the most
part by introducing the verbs, d^b, it is proper/
J\ji
, able ; &&\^,
will, or wishes, &c. in the tense and person required, and putting the
following verb in the contracted, or full, form of the infinitive ;
as, 6Ai
,
CO
o o
jj
or
aJs
9
it is proper to do
;
jAjs, or
&J>
jV^, it, or he, is able to do
;
c c ,
jj^3
or j. Jj&!j>, he will, wishes, or $i7/, do, &c. (Art. 118.)
Of the Simple Preterite Tense.
245. This tense is used like the preterite in other languages ; except
fl) in sentences enouncing general opinions, as also (2) in those which
are hypothetical, the simple preterite will often occupy the place of the
present tense : and,
(3)
when events believed to be certain of occurrence
are mentioned, this preterite may stand for the future. Examples :

O 9 y O C
1.
pj
&[$>.
jlxcU
^
pj
J\^
<s\&j
i&Jb
Whosoever has placed (places) the tray
of
generosity, has become
(becomes) famous (in) the world
of
generosity.
Whenever you have made (may make) war with the apertures
of
a
battlement, you have broken (will break) your own head through
ignorance.
O
c o o o 9 s-
When you see an unworthy person flourishing, (then) J/te intelligent
have given up, cr (will give up) their
free
will.
246. The first two cases may be explained by stating, that the Orien-
tals generally speak of facts, rather than of opinions ; and, on that
account, the verbs will stand naturally in the preterite tense. The third
f
is thus explained ; of what has come to pass, there can naturally be no
128
OF THE TENSES OF VERBS.
doubt. In order, therefore, to enounce a future, which shall appear
to be free from contingency, the preterite will generally be employed.
On the Use of the Preterimperfect and Potential Tenses.
247. These two tenses appear to have the same, or very nearly the
same force, so that they may generally be used the one for the other.
They evidently imply a past tense ; and may be rendered in English,
by had, always, ever, would, usually, or the like, with such nomina-
tives and verbs, as the context may present. Examples from the
Anwaray Soheili
:
c <*9 a- 9
O 9 O 9
When he would confine (his) nicely judging opinion to business.
He would break a thousand armies by one arrangement :
When he would adjust the business
of
the kingdom,
He would subdue a (whole) climate by one dispatch.
$1 ^9 ^ G 9 9<* C C "
'^.
s-
9 O C C G C 9 9 G 9 C9
jd
j\
LJd-o
^j>
A>. \jAjSi
^jd
*
L
^li
'rf^J^'ji
J^-tê
>*JJU
'
j\j&
C/C G * G 2
G G G
G G G >. G G C />
C S O^ C O C* 9 o /
/Z/s world-adorning opinion had always been ê taper
of
the night
of
the kingdom: his rightly-judging thought would by one con-
sideration ever unloose a thousand knots
of difficulty
: his pre-
ponderating mildness would always set at rest the boat
of
insur-
rection on the whirlpool
of
disorder : and, branches laying hold
of
the
skirt
of
the thorn-forest
of
injustice, the strong gale
of
his government
would constantly throw downfrom
the (very) root
of
the
foun-
dation nor,without his permission, would (the king) ever bind
on the girdle
of
warfare in the field of
battle
;
nor, without his signal,
would he sit in the court
of
assembly on the throne
of
pleasure
and delight, (See also Art. 112.)
248. These tenses are very often used in hypothetical sentences ; as,
Could I have rested one night in thy bosom,
My delighted head would have touched the sky.
249. Here a case is put, and a consequence stated as certain ; but,
when any doubt is implied, the aorist will mostly be used ; as,
CO 9 <*9 U * s O 9 9 s>
O (my) heart,
if
you choose humility,
The people
of
(this) world will (possibly) be friendly to you.
ISO OF THE PERSONS OF VERBS.
250. This tense is frequently used after interjections ; as,
9 9 s-
JaJ
jU A^jJ
i&J*
*{j)J J& LT&
Would that, on the day (in) which the thorn
of
death was in thy
foot,
the hand
of
the universe had struck the dagger
of
destruction
upon my head!
Would that he had come to my house ! how happy would it have
BEEN !
On the Use of the Persons.
251. The Deity will be spoken of, and addressed, in the singular
number only; as,
O 9 C 9
O God! the kingdom
of
the world is thine.
O 9 9
i^w*fc
j>* ]jji
yS jJi&J (jJjJU*
No one knows (how) to worship him as he exists.
252. Superiors will often express themselves to inferiors in the plural
number.
G /CO
jbjol L^Jvmbk^
*l&y*J*
C^-^y*
We have graciously ordered the guarding
of
that country,
253. Equals addressing each other, or inferiors addressing superiors,
will ascribe to themselves the terms implying inferiority ; as,
OF THE PARTICLES. 131
o c p c
. . . . " ^*>- Ci^l*> ^^
fk petition
of
the true welUxmsher .... ê circumstances
of
this
poor (person), &c.
254. In addressing, or speaking of, a superior, the third person plural
will often be taken rather than the second ; as,
9 9 c o c
i/" they command (i. e. the king) that he take (it)
from
that place
and make the road empty, it would seem proper.
This use of the plural prevails principally in letter-writing
;
it is also
often found in the histories, &c. written in Hindustan.
On the Use of the Particles.
255. After what has been said on the general construction of words
one with another, it cannot be necessary here to give rules and ex-
amples, as to the use of the particles : for, notwithstanding all that
Mr. Lumsden has said to the contrary, nothing can be more probable,
than that they
were originally nouns, just as significant in their own
c c
right as other nouns can be; as,
a
* djj or
a
c
CJî^y
, the (place
or thing) near me;
^13
JLo, before the kaii, or front of
the kail,
or judge. So, in the Arabick, Sjs^\ ^s, over the mosque, i. e.
132 OF THE PARTICLES.
the high (part)
of
the mosque. Where in each case, we have the marks
proper for the construction of nouns in the relation of the genitive case.
In other cases, where this does not take place, as in
^
j\ ,
from
me
;
the construction may be that of apposition. (Art. 199.) To arrive at
the original meanings of these words now, is perhaps, just as impossible
as it seems absurd to contend, that they never had any.But, we have
no room here for discussions of this kind.
256. To attempt to give the various acceptations of these words,
would also exceed our limits ; we must, therefore, refer the student to
the lexicographers and scholiasts, whose proper business it is to do so
;
believing it to be the duty of the Grammarian rather to unfold the
principles, than to detail the practice, found to prevail in language.
257. As the examples here given are numerous, and some of them of
considerable length, it is left to the industry of the student to examine
for himself the order of the words, the nature of interrogative, relative
or parenthetical sentences, and the manner in which the sense is occa-
sionally suspended, by the use of the participles, &c. (Art. 115).
END OF THE PERSIAN SYNTAX.
[
m ]
APPENDIX I.
ON ARABICK VERBS AND NOUNS.
258. In order to avoid the difficulty and trouble of referring to other
Grammars, it has been thought advisable to give a brief account of the
Arabick verbs and nouns in this place. In treating of the verb, the
regular triliteral verb only will be given, with its various inflections,
accompanied with a few observations on the defects found in others.
The verb has been introduced in order to shew the learner how the
nouns are derived ; and, also to enable him to construe such Arabick
sentences as he will meet with in almost every piece of Persian compo-
sition.
ON THE VERB,
J*k
259. The Arabick verb has but two tenses, the preterite, and the pre-
sent. The first of these in the third person singular masculine, is usually
taken for the root of the verb. The conjugations, or rather species of
the conjugation, usually given, are thirteen in number.
Each tense has a singular, dual, and plural number : the persons are
both of the masculine and feminine genders. The imperative is formed
from the present ; and, what has usually been termed the
itifinitive, is
134 AN ABSTRACT OF
a mere verbal noun. We shall take the verb ^xs, he did; as a para-
digm for all others, since from it, as a mere formula, are taken all the
measures of the nouns, as well as of the feet in prosody, usually cited
by the native grammarians.
260. PARADIGM OF THE FIRST
CONJUGATION.
ACTIVE VOICE, cjjLc.''
Preterite, ÛJI.
Plural.
Fem. Masc. Fem.
Dual. Singular.
Masc. Fem. Masc.
Jj6
IjU U*i
i**
3 Person
J&X3
JkUi 2
- - -
Ll*i UUi uU
Present, ^jUult,
1
- - -
Plural.
Fem. Masc.
x o c f c
Fem.
c
Dual. Singular.
Masc. Fem. Masc.
a
l*& Ûi> jÛiJ
Jk*Ai
lM?
Jaj
3 Person.
^sio
)>*> Jbti JlzJti (ji^xti Jjtij 2 - - -
^c ^c ,?c ô ^c >> c
J*i3 Jjwj J*i) Jau
<J!
<J*il 1 - - -
/CO
Imperative, **%
Dual.
Masc. F(
Jjiil Ûil JUfl JUil ,i*M
J*it
2 Person.
Plural. Dual. Singular.
Fem. Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. Masc,
^G G / O
THE ARABICK GRAMMAR. 135
Verbal Noun jJuaJl (or Infinitive),
J*i,
J*j,
&c.
P c
Participle, JÛIU
Plural. Dual.
Fem. Masc. Fem. Masc.
LUi
$&
jUUi JLti
Singular.
Fem. Masc.
Ji'Ui Jcli
261. The first and last vowels in the leading persons of both tenses
are the same in all verbs ; the second vowel is determined by usage alone,
and is always given in the best Dictionaries. It may, therefore, be either
zum, kesrah, or fathah : and, when this is once determined, that vowel
will remain throughout the conjugation, just as the medial (') fathah
do'js in the above table.
* *>
os c *
262. When j-
or
^j-
is added to the persons of the present, some
emphasis is given to the meaning : as,
Plural. Dual. Singular.
Fem.
m O O
Masc.
S P o
Fem. Masc. Fem. Masc.
^^
3 Person,
&P c
C5
c. 33 c
Ûi? 2
- - -
S O C5
C
C3 C
C5 O
a
ixs6
2nd.
CJ
fjixi] Ûi! 1 - -
-
Plural
Fem. Masc.
c /
Dual.
Fem. Masc.
none.
Singular.
Fem. Masc.
c c o o
^yUtf jjUw ^
Person.
J^xsj
2 - - -
c c
a
\xSL>
o c c c C
^#J
I
" " "
136 AN ABSTRACT OF
Co ^ ^
When the particles
j\,
that;
a
\,
by no means ; A,
,j3, or
J,
in order that
;
rjJl
,
ji, or 1 il , so, therefore
;
i
j^ ,
so that
;
uJ orj,
wtf, 50
/
and a few others precede the persons of the present tense,
the final ('j of those in the singular, will be changed to
(')
-the
^
of
the second person feminine singular, as also that of the third and
second persons dual, and of the third and second persons masculine
plural, will be rejected : and, in the last two cases, alif will be added.
CO c
But, if
J , not ; U! , not yet
;
J
giving an imperative signification,
j\
,
if
precede, then
(
) will take the place of the last vowel in the singu-

lar : and in the dual and plural, the persons will be formed, as in the
last. It should be remembered, that, in forming the imperative, the
middle vowel proper for the present, will always be taken : and that, if
this be zum
(
*
),
the alif which is prefixed, will take z'um likewise ; but,
if it be any other vowel, kesrah (~) will then accompany this alif : which,
however, when following any other word in a discourse, will take its
terminating vowel; as, J*iLi, not J.*ils. But, when the first radical
letter has not the jezma
(
),
which will be the case in most of the de-
fective verbs, this \ alif will not be added ; as,
J5,
say, not
JJl,
263. The participle designates the agent, and is used as the parti-
ciples in Greek and Latin
;
except only, that it is considered as involv-
ing a substantive, and not, as a mere adjective noun. All Arabick and
Persian attributives are of this character.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
26L PASSIVE VOICE,
jj^
of the Verb
J*i.
Preterite, Ûlt.
Plural.
Fern. Masc.
Uu
o 9
Dual. Singular.
Fesif. Masc. Fem. Masc.
^ y
o 9 ^ >>
UUS Ûi uÂ*i
J*i
3 Person.
,*dxi Ualxi
9<* 9 *G >>
liUi
eî^
g y
Ji 2
- -
9 c 9 9 t> 9
"I*.* L^lxi 1
Plural.
Fem. Masc.
Ô C/ y 9 09
O)
i*i>
G GJ>
;7
>> G* / t;
y y^
Present, fjLuli
Dual.
Fem. Masc.
OP (,9
JL&'J
09
<>9
Singular.
Fem. Masc.
9 09 9 09
J&xfy Jx&j J*w
3 Person.
09 y 09 9 C9
JlxSj
cr
J>
*&'
J*AJ 2 - - -
/ G*
9
<-*
J*aj J*ij Jsi> Jii Jxil Juwl 1
/ J> G G
Participle,
J^*a*JL
Plural.
Fem. Masc.
;o ^ 9 90
Dual.
Fem. Masc.
,?G >>G
Singular.
Fem. Masc.
S 90 S 90
cl^^xjU
cl/j****
t^j*^ i$j&*
<0j*a*>
Jy*A^
Past tense.
265. The vowels here accompanying both tenses are constant, what-
ever they may be in the active voice. The only exception is, that the
last vowel in the present tense will be affected by the particles as in the
active voice. (Art. 262.) The participle is used, as the past participles
are in Greek and Latin. (See Art. 263.)
138 AN ABSTRACT OF
966. There are a few verbs which have four letters in the root, and
are thence called quadriliteral ; but, as they are of rare occurrence, we
need not notice them here. We now proceed, therefore, to make a few
observations on the irregular and defective verbs.
267. It has already been remarked (Artt. 5-30), that, when certain
vowels precede the letters \
, ^
, and
^
, these letters will coalesce with
the vowels, and, therefore, lose their powers as consonants. In other cases,
when the concurrence of certain vowels with either of these letters would
produce a combination difficult to be pronounced, some change must
necessarily take place. Upon either of the letters
1, j,
or ^c, there-
fore, being one or more of the original letters of a root, and coming
in contact with the vowels in one or other of the ways just mentioned,
some variation from the regular paradigm is found to take place, in the
process of conjugation.
It is also a rule, in the Arabick, to which, however, there are many
exceptions, that two quiescent letters shall not follow the same vowel.
When, therefore, this would happen in conjugating these verbs, the first
of such quiescents is rejected; and, hence a defect in the verb will
arise. Again, the repetition of the same consonant will generally be
avoided in pronunciation, unless some emphasis be intended
;
and,
by writing no more than one, a defect will also arise. Now the
roots
Jy
and
(
jcj
9
should, according to the above tables, be con-
jugated
Jy
cJy
, &c.
^^
, m~*~cj
,
&c. but, instead of that,
Jy
becomes
JU
c^lli , &c.
O
ôj becomes
,^
, e^*> , &c. A vowel is merged in
both cases ; because the letters
j
and
^j ,
having lost their power as con-
sonants, are unable to act upon one : and, in the first,
^
is changed into
that letter, which is homogeneous with the preceding vowel, and which
is here fathah. Similar anomalies arise in the Present, from the same
causes : and, as the penultimate vowel is in both tenses regulated by
usage alone, the changes taking place in the letters, subject to the rules
alluded to, will be finally regulated by usage likewise. In the present, of
Jy
, for instance, the vowel in the penultimate is found to be
(') z'amma;
9 9 0>
according to the table, therefore, J,xsu
t
must be pointed
J*aj,
and
Jyb
9 /C*r
Jyy,
but, the
^
is not allowed to act upon the
('
) z'amma, for the sake
of euphony, perhaps ; the i'amma will then be drawn back to the pre-
9 9*
ceding radical letter, and the verb will become
Jyy..
In *ne passive
9 yi.9 9 s9
voice, likewise, what should have been
JyL>,
becomes
J\&.
^n the
same manner, any verb having \
9 j,
or
^j
9
for the first, second, or third
radical; or, having two, or all the radicals, consisting of these letters,
will be subject to the same laws : but, when \ alif is one of them, the
O
hamzah is usually written to show, that an alif was originally in the
root. When, therefore, defects occur, not to be accounted for by the
140 AN ABSTRACT OF
above tables, recourse must be had to one or other of these expedients,
in order to find the root, and to account for the form of the word. For
a full consideration of these points, however, the learner must have re-
course to the larger treatises on the Arabick Grammar.
268. Verbs having their two last radical letters the same will reject
one, whenever the last radical letter (see the above tables) has not the
mark j^L: over it; as, for jwV<, we have &* (and ci>jju> regularly), for
9 9 u* $, 9
0*X*;, a*j, &c. ; but, as the teshdid
(") is generally written, it will
immediately be seen, that the root is of this description.
9
269. The triliteral verb is termed by grammarians <jiS, the quadrili-
teral
^j.
\tj . Those which have
\
, ^
, or _ , for either of their radicals,
are termed generally
Jlct, infirm.
Those having
j,
or
^5,
for their
first radical
Jll*,
similar
;
because they undergo but little change in
conjugation: those which havej, or
^,
for the middle radical are
termed
uJ^l , hollow : those which have
j
, or
^,
for their final letters,
^sSli, defective: those of which \ with hamzah is one or other of the
9 o
radical letters,
j^^
hamzated : those which have the two last radicals
9
the same i-gcla^?, doubled ; and those which have any two of the letters
Uj>
or
u5?
in the root
?
are termed uJ-il, mixed.
THE ARABICK GRAMMAR.
141
270. A table of the leading forms of the Derivative Conjugations of
9 c
the Triliteral Verb, which are termed <ui x>ja!1
,
augmented.
ACTIVE VOICE, l_ij/W.
Verbal Noun. Participle. Imperative. Present. Preterite.
s o c ^
*
S 9 / 9
JcU 3.
S O c c.
JJ1
.' c*
jJ>l 4.
s S, 4? < ^ 9 *
J*&>
5.
S 9 -5 ^ 9
JAsu 6.
5" O, c c
J*wt
'
4>
/ c/
o c J> c
S*\
8.
>
J?
IP <*
9
c c i c $ c
J*s\
9.
.? o c 9 o o O / c c
jJjU 10.
o c 05 C
JM
ii.
5"
Cxl/ ceo / c c
Jcjil 12.
ColxC
*\
13.
142 AN ABSTRACT OF
271. PASSIVE VOICE,
J^,
Participle.
S * 9
Present.
JxftJ
Preterite,
y#9
J*
2.
S 9 / 9 ^ 9
3.
$ O 9 9 <-? y ci.
4.
G* 9
JxAJU
5.
& 9
6.
J? 0/
7.
8.
/ CO.?
10.
5-
<>/(. / 9 t/o; y *o*
12.
ylltfttf.
IS.
272. When the first radical letter happens to be
j,
the characteristick
y y y * *
~&
j
of the seventh conjugation coalesces with it by teshdid ; as,
j*&>
,
j*ai\ .
h
y tS y <*
Some verbs beginning with
*, take a similar form ; as, fJLc\
for ^Lwl.
When the first letter of any root happens to be [jo or
Jb,
the charac-
y y C
teristick c^ of the eighth conjugation becomes \s

as, c-jy*
,
c-^Ja*\
.
y y <
When it is b, that letter is doubled; as, ^Js, ^jd?l. When it is
j,
it
becomes
d\ as, d]j, dljjl. When it is J, that letter is doubled; as,
THE
ARABICK GRAMMAR.
143
cSsd) cJto\
When it is c->, tL>,
j
, or
^,
the characteristick CJ is doubled
by teshdld; as, lûj, Ct>A3l ;
,p,
<pl ;
.jfj,
<Ju'l
; ^j,
j~3\.
In the
fifth and sixth conjugation, the prasformative CJ frequently coalesces
with the characteristick cj
;
as, j~J.'J
,
for
^~.^ , <XsL? , for ^-cla?.
273. No verb is found in all the conjugations. What conjugations are
in use, and what precise signification is to be attached to them, can only
be known by usage, which is always given in the best Dictionaries.
Some general rules, however, may be given, as to the force of the several
conjugations. The first, for example, has the sense in which the root
is found to prevail. The second makes that transitive, if not so in the
first ; or gives some emphasis to it, if it is. The third implies association,
as in the Latin verbs prefixing con. The fourth is causative. The fifth
means affectation of the action implied by the root. The sixth implies
reciprocity of action. The seventh is mostly passive. The eighth im-
plies acquisition, or is passive. The ninth and eleventh imply excess
;
and are used only in verbs signifying colour, deformity, and the like.
The tenth implies petition or request. The twelfth and thirteenth are
very seldom used ; but, when they are, they generally denote excess.
The conjugations occurring most frequently are, the first, second, fourth,
eigthth and tenth.
274. In conformity
with these tables, are conjugated all the irregular
144 AN ABSTRACT OF
and defective verbs already alluded to, respect being had to the change-
able properties of the letters \
9 j
,
and
^j
.
275. In the derivative conjugations, it should be remembered, the
vowels will always be affixed according to the tables (Artt. 270-1) ; the
only deviation that can arise, will be from the mutable character of the
letters \
, j
, and
^j
.
276. In filling up these tables, the learner has only to supply such
personal additions as are to be found in the first conjugation
;
and when
he can do this with some degree of facility, he may take such verbs as
t-r^
<^/*4i S-^j
he struck
; *U Am
J^?
he marked; *Lc Am, Jc,
he knew ;
*J>
*jLi *Js,
he was liberal, and fill them up throughout
all the conjugations, for the mere purpose of practice
;
and, when he can
do this accurately, without recurring to the tables, he may rest assured
that he has made progress sufficient for the present. In these examples,
the word first given is the preterite, the second the present, and the
third the verbal noun or infinitive : all of which are generally given in
the Dictionaries.
/V c c^
ON ARABICK NOUNS, JL*-4l
277. It will be seen by a recurrence to the tables (Artt. 260-4), that
the active and passive participles, as well as the verbal nouns or infini-
tives, in all the derivative conjugations, (Artt. 270-1), are regularly
derived from the verb. There are, indeed, a few verbs which are
themselves derived from nouns ; but these may be passed over for the
present.*
vw 9 s- 9
278. The Arabick verbal nouns or masdars J^s-'* ^MjdLn, of most
frequent occurrence in the Persian Language, are those of the first con-
jugation. The forms of these nouns are extremely numerous : Erpenius
has given thirty-three, M. De Sacy thirty-seven, and Mr. Lumsden sixty
;
the following are the most usual.
279. Table of the Forms of the Mas.dars or Infinitives of
the First Conjugation.
1.
Forms.
s c
Examples.
s c
*$i comprehension.
5-0
^-o endeavour.
2.
5" O
so
J.* knowledge. y>
strength.
3.
5-
CP S O 9
li
>-*i- beauty. <--** friendship.
4. L--lk desire.
4"
(î\ injuring.
5.
&
laLi grossness.
lij adultery.
6.
S9 9 & 99
fj^tXs
holiness.
S9 9
ms^j shewing mercy,
*
For my own part, I believe that all verbs are derived from nouns ; and,
under this view, I have treated this subject in my Hebrew Grammar. The Oriental
Grammarians differ on this point, although they agree in calling the verbal
noun the source jduarfJl.
146 AN ABSTRACT OF
7.
Forms.
S s9
Examples.
c5<^Jb direction.
*9
(Jj^
eminence.
8. <U^ mercy.
S Cs
toy repentance.
9.
.00 s c
*-'
science. <j smallness.
10.
oo/ & O 9
Xj&s power. xy strength.
11.
&P-
motion. <UU? obedience.
12. tej~s theft. to& lying.
13. JLa peaceableness. ^Lij faithfulness.
14.
JU;
u->L*>- reckoning. aL0
fasting.
15.
S *9
JUJ
S S-9
JUmo
request. ^Lcj prayer.
16.
Oxv
tozh eloquence.
s
$j\*
enmity.
17. lUi
s
ifdLc worship. to\jj relating.
18.
S' ~9 S 9
h&j heighth.
& 9
jS\js2 suddenness.
19.
S 9 ^ S 9
J^-i
accepting.
9
%j*aj ablution.
20.
S 99
0^
prostrating. jlc heighth.
81.
,2? >/ S -9 9
toyâ
difficulty.
S 9 9
&jxe sweetness.
22.
O *x
Siyti
S 9
*j}j*
necessity. &*j*
subsistence.
23.
s
u^xmJJ walking. JJj
showing.
24.
Z*ij>-
crime.
si
25. aLcli xdsXs rule.
26.
JIUj
G O
jli^c knowledge.
s ô
joU**;
acquiescing,
147
27.
Forms.
S sC9
Examples.
^1^-^-
losing.
SJi.9
jTy reading.
28. JLi
^laA>. palpitation.
29. *!t>\^ abhoring.
JLfcU ease.
30.
*<*
lSÂ
ashing.
^jsi decree.
31.
***
LjjZi
relating. tC|Ci reflexion.
32.
^c*9 ^^9
^jJa
nearness. cjTjijfMi
consultation.
33.
J*
3
fj&ai*
walking fast.
34.
&j
lodging. Xjjjjy* becoming.
35.
5" *-o^ s o
><asU scope. aUa) rfiep.
36.
s o
-^<> mercy. <&Lsr yeflr.
37.
s c
x&a^ praise. i^d^^c apology.
38. irîU power.
39.
JjJU-J
S 9b
j^Xio distraction.
.27 9 C
JyU^
understanding.
S*9Us & 9(j
40. <U& iXl^> perdition.
)\j+*a beating (each other.) 41.
JU.*i JtJ
slaughter.
280. Forms and examples
of
pluriliteral infinitives or masdars.
Forms. Examples.
5>vG> s c 5 o
1. <JiUi
A/>jj
adorning. htxj exciting.
S9 b S 9 C
i? /C
J~1~J
linking. 2.
JJ*7
7rj^^
revolving.
3.
J^*i\
A^Lj>\
assembling. jU**M tranquility*
4.
JE*it JW"*t
vanishing.
148 AN ABSTRACT OF
281. Forms and examples
of
attributives, not found in the Tables
(Artt. 260-4, 270-1.)
s c- s c
Forms.
Examples.
1.
Jj.*i
f^'jf-
wounded.
S s9 S 9
2.
JUi flko. fragment.
S 9s s 9
3.
J^ J^
accepted.
9 sits
9 G
4.
J*i|
>lxc!
greater.
.^.x^
difficult.
j+&. intelligent.
Sl> 9 G <*9
8.
Jxi c^Ltf ^#rd.
9.
J*i ^-^
beautiful.
10.
J*i
^.y
g-/a<.
11.
JUi
eA*f-
coward.
s $ * *r v*i
12.
JUi jj^j
splendid.
13. jixi ^)UjJ penitent.
5.
J.X+3
S G-
6.
J*i
7. jli
J-jj
killed.
S 9
*1jJ>
front.
S 9
*&1 dumb.
(j~o narrow.
y
&t*9
A*- sweet.
s
jW neighbour.
i\j>- desolate.
jU>- 5ze?//5f (camel.)
G o
282. Arabick pluriliteral attributives are not much used in the Persian
G o
language : the following are given by Mr. Lumsden : viz. i\*j~>,
eternal,
of the measure
JUi,
*liUi
?
cfo'e/^ measure
JU*s;
J.^?
corpulent,
& i* y & It 9 S <* y9
measure
JUi, J^xjj,
corpulent, measure, JlUi.
y<s-G O
283. Attributives implying excess, [IûaW jUJ) are generally
of
the following forms : viz.
Forms.
Examples.
1. Jlxi
*ls- very learned.
{J^^
very pleasant.
S 9* S 9
S 9
2.
Jjxi
jyts. very forgiving.
Jj^f-
very foolish.
3. J+xi
*Jx tjcry learned. **-j very merciful.
4.
Jj^ti
J^
êry true.
jjSJ great thinker.
5.
JUi*
*\x^* rery beautiful.
JJAx*
great talker.
284. Forms,
fyc. of
Pluriliteral participial Nouns.
Forms. Examples.
j ox; s ^ 9 a- c /
1. jUiô
,*f-y^
translator. \j*&*%*
a geometrician.
s ^c^
>>
& <* 9
s c
9
2. JUA^j
/f-j^<
translated. J*d."*,e
linked.
3. jUiJU ^^.Ja^j rolling. J-JL-X^
linked,
4. jUô >^
r
s-'
c
assembled.
5.
JUa^
J^^
vanishing.
lir
*k tranquil.
285. Forms and
Examples
of the Nouns which are termed
Jamids,*
(j^cU-).
0/
Triliteral Jdmids.
Forms.
Examples.
1. Jxi ^J.3 com so called. Jiu
garden herbs.
s,^ s & &
t
2. J,xi
u*j3
a horse.
yj
an ox.
jf
fruit.
9
*
Nouns are generally considered as being of three sorts
;
viz* 1.
(j^La^J
masdars, or sources, which are abstracts. 2. (olitf), attributives; and
'
9 s *
"
S. (tVoUs-) Jamids, or names of substances.
150
AN ABSTRACT OF
Forms.
3.
jj
4.
J*i
5.
Jxi
6.
Jxi
7.
J*i
8.
J*i
9.
J*i
10.
J*3
Examples.
jl
the shoulder.
^s?
Ae thigh.
S 9
SO
ink.
a grape.
Jul
a camel.
o9
99
(J.XS.
the neck.
s 09
J
J&-J
a man.
s o
5"
J^? ribs.
J.M
ê 2oa^.
i a tower.
sop
US
^+&
a hyena.
so
Jte$
copper.
s
tJ\ arm-pit.
SO 9
cr
a. a branch.
S9 9
jjji the ear.
Forms.
S * 9
1.
JUi
3.
JUS
4. j2i
6.
JjJi
8. jUit
io. aî
Forms.
1. jl3
9 p09
3. jUi
5. jUi
^jli- Ae temper.
S *9 S*9
&j*a a bird, so called. ^*.c a proper name.
286.
Of
Increased Triliteral Jamids.
Forms. Examples.
S * S
2.
JUi
Uj the brain.
s
* V
*
'i 1
a www
*'
^ <*#*]
ment,
5. J^*i 'ft-\
a water-melon.
7. *lit dl^l
finger-ends.
S 909 S 9 09
9.
Jy^l
j-"*t a
finger.
s c o
j? c c
10. Ji*i! Jjîl
temper (of a sword.)
Examples.
>lî a raven.
Jjji
a
fawn.
s o
j-^^1
a
finger.
s o
aJJH a climate.
s o
jIac! whirlwind.
musical instru-
so called.
<o^sf1 wonder.
287.
0/"
Quadriliteral Jamids.
Examples. Forms.
Examples.
S O SO
2. Jl ^2^ ê little
finger.
SsO SsO
pj3
KXvorfia^theredsea. 4. JLo *fcjtf a com, so called.
^Jji a veil. 6.
Jbw
^k*j> a book case.
s
o
Jix*.
proper name
9909
THE ARABICK
GRAMMAR. 151
288.
Augmented
Quadriliteral Jdmids.
Forms. Examples.
Forms. Examples.
s *<s so
s f 09 s f Of
1.
Jh6 fjJbj
paper. 2.
JjUi
j^k^s. a sparrow.
S 'O* S O
SO so
3. JJA**
J.AV
g
reat cold
* ^' <-^^
J*^
J a /o66y.
<?//t/ 5"
O
SsOsy s o
5. j&be jîcj
saffron.
6.
Jk
îuo a /ow.
7. jLs JiUi ê sea. 8.
jL*i *U**j cfo'e/-
9.
JiUi ^^
ê//. 10. Jîi
jW^^f
old wine.
289.
0/
Quinquiliteral Jdmids.
Forms. Examples. Forms. Examples.
SsOs* SO S O^ / S O 9
1. Jll*i
Jfy***
J fl quince. 2. JiUi
J^^*
foolish
thing.
S /(,/ 5- G SX^G .<? G C
3.
JiUi /Mj^srfr
decrepidly old. 4. JiUi
J*-*>^f-
,/***
camel.
290.
Augmented Quinquiliteral Jdmids.

Forms. Examples. Forms. Examples.
S9sW S 9 G J- .CX. S 9 O
1.
J^lUi
Ljiyic a sor^ o/" lizard. 2.
JjJUi
^/~;?k,5 o misfortune.
s yfcx .jr g ? c^.? sos
3. JJIxi (j-^tJjd fl misfortune. 4. JJi*i J*.*c^>.
a foolish thing.
291. Masdars, which imply unity of action, or some specific mode of
< G / C Gtf / O
it, are called S^j'jLmJI, and *yJJ jjLa*)!, respectively, and are
*
The tanwin has here been preserved, as has also the Arabick final of
feminities : for, although the tanwin is rejected in adopting Arabick words in
the Persian, and the $ changed either to Oor * (Artt. 8,
56-7)
;
yet, as pure
Arabick sentences occasionally occur with these marks, it is proper that they
should be presented to the student in their original forms.
152 AN ABSTRACT OF
so so so so
formed on the measures tXxi and i'Lu ; as, hye^ one blow ; <!>., a
peculiar mode
of
sitting.
THE NOUN OF SUPERIORITY, J^Sf
lj.
292. This noun in Arabick supplies the place of the comparative and
9 oi
superlative in other languages : it is usually formed on the measure Jxit
for the masculine, and Ûi , for the feminine gender, from attributes of
S s S s S ? O
the forms of Jsxs
,
J-cli, &c. :
*^.c, great, for example, becomes Jas\,
^ O 9
greater, or greatest, in the masculine, and ^*&s.
,
in the feminine,
gender. Attributives implying colour or deformity do not admit of this
9 sO
formation, because J*i!
is their original form : in this, and other cases,
<J*\, more, or most, or the like, is usually added.
NOUNS OF INSTRUMENT, TIME, AND PLACE.
C/O^ v-<= 9 99 * sO~ A^~ O
293. These are derived from verbs in the following manner. The
*0~
9 O
first, namely, the noun of instrument, OT .**>!, is formed on the measure
.s ô s *o
S OS o ^
J*iU , or
JUiU ;
as, ^^* or JUL*
?
&ey, from the verb J^ , he opened.
SssO
There are also a few formed on the measure llxsuo, and some others
;
as, sr~^"
<
,
a besom. This noun is derived from the triliteral verb only.
294. The noun of time and place, called
J&aW
j
îoj] <-J^, is formed
from the leading person of the present tense, by substituting * for
^j ;
as,
/ C 5
^-irsr,
he sits
;
^J.jst
,
a place or time
of
sitting, i. e. an assembly
;
? c s o
UJL>, ê 25 occupied
;
JiJL
?
ê fke or p/ace
of
occupation. When
fc'am
(
'
) happens to be in the penultimate it will become (-) in forming
this noun : other verbs having either kesrah or fathah in the penultimate,
will preserve that vowel.
The measures therefore will be J*iU or
J-xi^, and sometimes, but
rarely, i'LuU. This noun when formed from one of the derivative con-
jugations, will take the form of the participle passive. The following
are exceptions :
s o
jL^ô the time or place
of
resi-
dence.
%SU<
the place
of
the rising
of
a
the time or place
of
vege* star,
tation. ii^û^ the place
of
performing di~
s
c
jys* the time or place
ofsacri- vine worship.
s o
ficing
a camel.
j
t* the nostrils.
ksu^ the time or place
of
falling. As?** a mosque.
G C
JiyU
the place
of
separation.
295. Nouns which are said to be correlative of those of time and
place, (called cjU^*)
?
are formed on the measure OXxkk
;
as, ifjudU, a
the east.
s o
the west.
the elbow.
154 AN ABSTRACT OF
s o
place abounding with lions
;
iâ;**, a place wherein
many victories
have been obtained. This noun is called S^fll *-*!, the noun
of
abun-
dance.
THE NOUN OF EXCESS, Ûlllll
296. Examples of these have been given in the table (Art. 283). It
will only be necessary here to state, that the addition of * seems to
augment their force, by attaching to them the notion of unity : as,
s &
LAz, a singularly or most learned (man). Nouns of the form
of
JWi,
also imply trade or occupation; as,j\j^, a baker; ^W, a
carpenter.
THE DIMINUTIVE NOUN, -A*rff, o/.Ll lit.
297. When a word, of which the diminutive form is required, con-
sists of three letters, the measure is
J**i
; as,
J*^
a man,
J~f^
a
little man
;
but, if the word consist of four letters, the measure is then
J.L*i; as, LfjjSfiy a scorpion; t-j^JLc, a little scorpion. In feminine
nouns, however, the terminations
*
, \
,
or \ ,
are not reckoned ; such
words are therefore referable to the measure J+xh
only.
s o
When a feminine noun has a masculine termination as in
^j\
the
earth, or y*J* *Ae saw, the measure of the diminutive is 1\m
;
as,
Nouns of the form of JxlS make the diminutive on the measure
J^y 5
as
5
u*j.j*

frm
Otft*
J
a horseman.
Words of the measure JlxiU form their diminutives on that of
J-.*-i.<>;
as, -.lîo c A:ey, ^Ll*, a little key.
Nouns having \
, j
,
or
^5 ,
quiescent between their second and third
radicals, take the measure J.-xi
for the diminutive ; as, *lc. a . slave
;
m+\s. a little slave.
Nouns derived from the irregular or defective verbs, form their dimi-
nutives on the above measures, after restoring such letters as may have
been dropt or changed in the root, respect being had, at the same time,
to the rules of permutation already alluded to. (Art. 267.)
Of the Formation of the Feminine from the Masculine
Noun.
\, The feminine noun is mostly formed from the masculine by the
addition of * , the tanwin
(
s
)
of the masculine being suppressed;
as, +&is> magnus
;
<Uuks magna. Verbal nouns of the form of
J*i!
,
form their feminines on the measure Ûi
;
as,ôl yellow : fern. lyu?.
Comparatives and superlatives of this form, have the feminine of the
measure ^xi ; as, Jasl greater or greatest, fem.
<Jy*la.
156 AN ABSTRACT OF
9 s<js C>
Some nouns of the form of
Jhxi, will make the feminine ^l*i ; as,
9 C C S *Ij?
^L^si angry
;
J**&,
fern. Others of the measure jÛi, will have
-ff^cy S ^9 S O/
&\xs
;
as,
^Vj^j ^.j^
naked,
S 9s S s
The forms
Jyti
and
Ja^
when derived from intransitive verbs are
common to both genders ; but, when derived from transitive ones, gene-
Ss- S 9 s
rally form the feminine by the addition of * ; as,
J^j
an apostle
;
Ss 9 s
fem. l\y*ij.
Ss<>*> 5> y S^9s S*.s9 Sssl> S *<; S C
Nouns of the forms, i,'!Wi", IWxi, alj*?, aIxs, <l*.i<o,
JUi-,
and JîU,
are generally common, except ,^-C-.^,
fem. i^C-,,*. Those of the forms
JUi,
jUi,
J-*i,
and
J*a*<j,
form their feminines in the usual way.
The Arabians have no neuter gender
;
for this the feminine is gene-
rally substituted.
ON THE RELATIVE NOUN, L->^fi'Z\.
299. This, in the grammars of Europe, is termed the patronymic or
gentile noun*, and in these, as well as in those of Arabia, serves to
*
These are, in our grammars, adjectives, properly so called. In the Arabick
and Persian, however, this sort of word seems not to be recognized ; for, al-
though they term such words LZJ\La
,
[descriptions or describers), they are,
nevertheless, treated as substantives, like our words
fool, dwarf, giant, and the
like ; i. e. they are supposed to involve a real subtantive noun together with its
157
express some relation to the country, family, or sect, &c. of the person,
to which it is applied. Its formation is extremely easy in the Arabick
which is this : after dropping the tanwin
[
s
)
if there be any, add
^,
to
the primitive ; as, qoj)
,
earth
; ^j\
earthy, jo*, Egypt,
vJj^^
a*
1
Egyptian.
If, however, the primitive ends in x
9
or h, these terminations will
be dropt, and the
^j,
annexed to the preceding letter; as, <LC Mecca,
*> oJ S* G ill C
âj, a native
of
that place
;
l
t
hfs\, Africa;
//.^j
an African.
In forming this noun from duals and plurals, the terminations
j)
and
S
"
s
* 9 C mj G x S G me
^jj,
are also to be rejected
;
as,
^\jj\
,
two
;
^Vc^j~*
?
twenty
;
^jLz.
Proper names ending in ciM, will reject it; as, oly, mountain so
called
;
^Jj<,
a native
of
that place.
In nouns of the forms
J+x's and *Lx, both the
^j
and
(J
kesrah
are dropt; as, u-^Ls, a cross, âj, a ship ; relative noun ,^ft~5,
âU. In many cases, however, both are preserved ; as, ^-J**
, (j^~~
.
Proper names of the form
J-.*i
and i.'L*i, generally drop the
^
in
characteristick
properties.
We shall, therefore, term them attributives. See
my Heb, Gram.
p. 298, note. The Commen
Hyder Ali,
p. $&. FreytagY
Hamasa,
p. T.
my Heb. Gram.
p. 298, note. The Commentary on the
L^j^t^f,
by
158 AN ABSTRACT OF
forming the relative noun
;
as,
(J*f,j*
9
a tribe so called;
,<-$>/
5
one
of
that tribe.
S f y S' f y S ' Sy y
Nouns of the forms
Jyw, 4?**> J***?
and <*L*J, derived from de-
ll!/ * V y
fective verbs ; as,
j
ds. , an enemy
;
.<J
,
a prophet, &c. will lose one or
other of the double letters
j
or
^j,
with which they end, and the
second radical letter will take fathah; the letter preceding
^j
final
HI y \t> y
will then be
^
5
as,
uj<^, lS^*
If a primitive word end in hamzah (*)
with medda
(<H
in the place
of a radical
j
or
^,
such hamzah will either be retained, or changed to
A iH u*
j,
at pleasure; as, jU**, heaven; Û^, or l$U-o, heavenly. If,
however, this termination already designate the feminine gender as in
f]j&.,
a virgin, the relative noun will takej in the place of hamzah;
as,
cf^y&Z',
belonging to a virgin.
A few nouns form the relative by adding .jl ; as, **>-, the body,
<P^-0 J >> v^^/S^ HI if
In such compounds as \j*Ja <*, <dl] jus, &c.
sometimes the first,
and sometimes the second, word will be dropt ; and the
^j
of the relative
III C iM O
noun added to the other ; as,
^
jjlc
,
or .^î- ; at others, two letters
*J
Mi (j
of each will be taken, to which the
^j
will be annexed ; as, /<**iê :
but, in these cases, usage alone can determine what is to be done.
c
t>o/
C
<
THE ARTIFICIAL INFINITIVE,
i
*i\
J
&ta*\.
300. From the relative noun may be formed another, which is termed
the artificial infinitive, or
<J^>-
j^*,
the forms of which will, of course,
vary with those of the primitives from which they are derived. This
s * s
noun is formed merely by adding
*
to the relative noun ; as, /^^>, a
servant, relative noun ^cjU, the artificial infinitive, <Uw<jU, service
;
its S& <** y 3>$b s
ujL, how ; <Ua*, mode or quality
;
U, what; Û, quality,
OF NUMBER, j*J1.
S S C9
301. The Arabians have three numbers, the singular J^-lj or JyU;
the dual, h&i or
S
^L*
;
and the plural, .*.
The Dual is formed from the singular by dropping the tanwin
(
ff
),
and adding the syllable
j\
;
and, in the oblique case (hereafter to be ex-
Cv S 9 9 <** 9 S
plained)
î
as,
J-f^jj
a man
;
J^V>
an<
^
ufi^J*
*wo men
> *Â*j
#
ceVy
;
Î^jj^, and ^~Jcjx, a?o cities.
When a short
\
9
or
^,
occurring at the end of a word of three
letters only, occupies the place of a radical
j
, or
<_/,
it will, in forming the
dual number, be restored ; as, Iac
,
a
staff
;
^y^s.
,
jxs
,
a boy
;
^Lsi
;
but, if the word exceed three letters ; as,
^j*
,
the dual will then be
formed thus, ^Lj/*, and not
^^j*.
160 AN ABSTRACT OF
Infeminines of the form of j5Ui, the dual becomes ^h6
;
as,
'\J>*0,
yellow;
J\j\jA^.
If hamzah
(
*
) occur at the end of a word instead of either of the
radical letters
j
or
^5,
it may be retained, or changed to
j,
in forming
the dual; as,
f1<^>
for
lS^
9
a garment; dual jU^>or jlj^; but,
if the hamzah be radical, it must be retained ; as,
f\Js,
a reader;
J\i\J.
302. The plural number is of two kinds, 1st. the regular plural, -**>-
^?,
or JL; and 2nd. the irregular or broken,* ^X
-*^
?
or
f*f-
^-~l!l. The regular plural is formed in the masculine, by dropping
the tanwin and adding
jj
to the singular, and in the feminine gender
S * S y 9 Ss
cl>I
;
as, masculine,
Jnb,
a thief; plural, j^L. Feminine, &.L,
plural cjl^L.
If, however, a noun end in
^j
quiescent after either fathah or kesrah,
or, if the
$$
be dropt, on account of its being derived from a defective
root, it will also be dropt in forming the plural number; as,
^5-^*,
x C^ 9 y * 9 s
Moses; plural ^^yo.
JsiS ,
a judge
;
j^li.
Diminutive nouns form their plural regularly ; as,
(j^>j
7
a little man,
* > >/
*
These are, perhaps, more properly termed collective nouns by some.
C ^ Ss ^ '
Feminine nouns of the forms
J*J
and il*i, form their plurals on the
S "* 9
O
, S
^

measure lSjIUs
;
as, <XcJ, cÎj^cj, the proper name
of
a woman
;
IxJi,
&
S^9 SsC9 S *99 O "9
a saucer', CÛ*aJ. Others of the form
J*i
or <&*i, take CJiUi, c-?Ûi,
or eÛi. And others of the forms
J*i,
and *1xj, become either cÛi,
iff ^ ff ^C
Cplti, or CÛi.
303. All the masdars or verbal nouns of the derivative conjugations,
will form their plurals in lu\
;
as, <_i> *>',
definition,
e^libyy. -Ik^l,
S C
technical language, CjU*lkA Feminines ending in either short or
long alif, generally form their plurals by the addition of dj\ ;
as, A*>-
,
S yO 9 A^. 9 S 9
pregnant, ci?LU>-; 'LJii, a woman in child-bed, culjLJu.
304. The broken plurals are found to prevail in a great number of
nouns both masculine and feminine, and are regulated very much by
usage. The Arabian grammarians divide them into two classes; viz.
the plural of paucity, &!! --*>-
5
anc* *ne plural or
*
multitude, %-*
ij^!. The first is said to signify any number not exceeding ten
;
the
last, any number above ten. This rule however appears not to be much
regarded, particularly by the Persians.
It would be almost endless to give tables and examples of all the
forms of these plurals ; and, as they are given in the best Dictionaries,
it will be unnecessary. The following forms occur most frequently.
162 AN ABSTRACT OF
305.
<t C/O
? <j
Plurals of Paucity,
SM\ u*j
Singula
Form,
r. Plural.
Examples.
Singular.
^r ex
^
?
a a6/e.
Plural.
J*3
.SO /
*^ , an order.
s c
c31id, property. C<fU
s * *
> JUSI
s
j^.^
5
a sforae.
Jxi
c-îLc, #e êe/.
J*5
tfif , ê buttocks.
5" O
& 99
S99
jCl
JUi
5-
jl* , a place. Siiur
jus jU^-
?
a# aw.
5"
^
JUi
c-î, a ralien.
1? c
s *
j+x>, a camel.
S o
St* & 9
dj*
,
a pillar.
s c
^li, a smo// coin.
S -PC
JUi
jUx., a female
kid.
S9 O
JUi
S9(a*
> J
JU-&,
ê /e/fc hand.
JU5
%\J,
a cow's hoof.
& 9
J *
J**^ Jpjt,
a roatf\
S 90
c oo
s o
306. The Plural of Multitude, iîfii
f^.
Form. Examples.
Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural.
/ xOx P
C
SC 9
J1
Jxli
},
red ^,-
O SO/
f5/**">
ree?, fern, jAp
&
S<* 9
\ J.*i
J"****
camel.
J^f-
&4J,
do.
for
sacrifice.
^JO
S so/
Jjb
, do. having cut his
fore
teeth.
Jjj
s xx>
JUi
gU*?, ## artificer.
it x s .?/ /
JUi
jUrs
?
0ft 0SS.
J**-
tSfAjj a cake
of
bread.
S 9
&}*
,
cf pillar*
5-
//
fcfi
4>U
s
? o,
Jk&, subtilty. cLJ
Aj^l, the
first,
fern.
S>0
!
s o
<U*J, bounty.
& Ox
s
164
AN ABSTRACT OF
Form,
Singular. Plural.
i.'Ui
r
J*li
v
S *s9
Examples.
Singular.
kiU*,
guardian.
jU,
warrior.
^S\j
,
bowing.
s
w-^J&lj, monk.
Plural.
s o
roj?e.
*
S s *
Ai7/
%
47 C/
JO J
spear.
4?
a place,
noble,
do. fern.
s
disposition.
Z\*3
j
j
<^j>
the neck.
<>
/
ff 0/
JJtft, understanding.
Ac
j
science.
J>\,
a vestige.
-j. j
?
turret.
5 99
6 99
THE ARABICK
GRAMMAR.
165
Singu
Form,
ar. Plural,
Examples.
Singular.
Plural.
-> s
s- o/
J.î
Jixc;,
a ca&e.
J*b
9 *<*s
S^(.f >> c
S C /
Jt> J^>
^=*l, rerf.
id/**-
S x> 1
.s
if c/
JJ
jJj, a c7y.
flw*
#
l
"1
^? A- /
+>) a philosopher. ;Lk.
J^li, excellent.
J
Lai
s c^
s ^ 0^
*!/*-
9 wounded.
'
jJUM
Jî-tfj ^wre. 'Lkot
^
>>oo
Of the Last of Plurals, ^Jl
^j+>*
307. It is peculiar to the Arabick to form plurals from nouns already
in the plural number ; as,
&y
, a tribe or sect. First plural
jy,
second
ditto,
,J^5
and third ditto, ^jW- The last of these, from which it is
not allowable to form another, is called ? âs^
ls
^-<
,
the last
of
plurals.
The following, which will be sufficient for our purpose, are Mr. Lums-
den's general rules for their formation. (Pers. Gram. vol. i.
p. 344).
The measure of the singular being
JUi
, that of the plural will be
JJUi
;
. *

/ s^c- / s t,
as
?>
îj, o book, pluraly Uj
;
and so also of JxLc, and Jclô
;
as, Xs~
and x=-L^; or *U#
and
JxU?; as, iX)^5, and ti)Jlf>; or <*L*i, and
166 AN ABSTRACT OF
JjUi ; as, iLusi,
pi. JjUi ;
or JUAô,
and J**cU< ; as, .U.JU, and j\<&k*%
5- ^C^ 9 * S yO 9 9
or <Ûi, and ^.-SUi; as, jlLLo, and ,jJ^">>> &c.
ON THE DECLENSION OF NOUNS,
(L\JJk.
308. In the declension of Arabick nouns^ there are only three cases,
which are thus formed :
Singular Number.
Masculine.
Nominative, %J>, Genitive, îU-, Accusative,
<Jf^,
7WW.
J^
i=^.
Feminine.
Any noun having the
(
ff
)
tanwin, loses it when that noun becomes
9 b 9 o c
definite either by construction &UW, or by the article fej&&\
,
being
prefixed; as,
9 9 <H
f y * 9 o
Jf^Jt,
Nominative,
JfÛ
Genitive,
JfJU
Accusative.
CJ>U!! da*
j
ê King's servant, iû\\ du*
cU*!! dox.
309. Nouns not having the tanwin
(
ff
)
iô^î, have only two
cases: nominative jUlc, Othman; genitive and accusative, Ûlc.
These nouns are, 1st. broken plurals having four syllables, of which the
9 "
two first have fathahs, the third kesrah; as, c-ôUf ; 2nd. such as end
in
j^
;- as,
J^^-Sj ;
3rd. others ending in long alif and hamzah ; as,
'Jjte ;
but, if hamzah belong to the root, the tanwln is preserved. 4th. Broken
A *9 Aw OX
plural of the forms tlxh, >^*il. 5th. Comparatives and superla-
9 xcf
tives of the form
J*il,
provided they do not form the feminine by
the addition of *. 6th. Nouns of the form Jixs, of which the feminine
is
JÛi.
7th. Proper names of women ending in
*,
as well as mascu-
line nouns having the same termination. 8th. Foreign names having
more than three letters, or having no more, but the second followed by
a vowel. 9th. Also, proper names formed from quadriliteral appella-
S C 9 c
tives; as, t-^JU, a scorpion; t-îU, a man so called. 10th. Proper
names of the forms
J.** ,
J^xi
,
or of any person of the present tense
;
as,
9 C 9
Jb*&-1,
jjjj. 11th. All proper names compounded of two words; as,
9 C ^ O
"CJyoâ*-, Hadramaut ; and 12th. Adjectives derived from the nume-
rals and some other appellatives, &c. It should be remembered, how-
ever, that these, receiving the article, a pronoun, or being the first of
5 two in construction, will take kesrah in the genitive case.
310. Declension of the Dual Number.
Nominative. Gen. and Ace.
9 Cs 9
J^>-j,
two men.
cr^^*
When the noun becomes definite by construction, the
j
is rejected ; as,
-ill IcU, doers
of
wickedness. -ill
jJÛ,
, There is no irregularity in the Dual in these respects, whatever be the
form of the noun.
168 AN ABSTRACT OF
311. Declension of the Regular Masculine Plural,
Nominative. Gen. and Accus.
ClXf^y
assistants.
cjt.j*^*
And in construction,
*Vj
\)j*\f) the assistants
of
Zaid. djj t^lj.
And with the pronouns,
cJjj*a\j
7
thy assistants.
uio^b.
d5j*\* j
wy assistants.
^j*^*
The Regular Feminine Plural.
lu\j*\j
,
female assistants. Cp\j*\j*
312. When the noun becomes definite, the tanwin is superseded by
the single vowels, viz. {*)
by (/) and
(*)
by
(^),
and \- by (-).
The broken plurals, both masculine and feminine, are declined like
the singular masculine above given, respect being had to the terminating
vowel.
All nouns in the Arabick language are said to be indefinite,
^&
or
îj unless restricted either by the addition of the article
J
I, by con-
struction, or by the addition of one or other of the pronouns. In either
of the two last cases, both the tanwin of the singular (if there be any)
and the terminating
^
of both the dual and the regular plural mascu-
line, will disappear.
ON THE ARABICK PRONOUNS.
313. The Arabick pronouns are of two kinds ; viz. separate and affixed.
The separate pronouns may be considered as in the nominative case;
the affixed pronouns, as in the genitive or accusative.
i.Pts>Ofi&
The Separate Pronouns, Lzk~d\ A***.
1 Person.
Ivlasc.
Singular.
Fem. Masc.
P c
Dual.
Fern.
P c
Masc.
P c
Plural.
Fem.
p
<-
2 - - -
P<- Pi> t>>0 S> Pu
3 - - -
,P
J*
... *
p
The Affixed Pronouns, aLojUJ] ->Ui.
314. These are found attached to both verbs and nouns : in the first
case, they represent the accusative ; in the second, the genitive or pos-
sessive case.
Singular. Dual,
Piural.
Masc. Fem. MasC. Fem. Masc. Fern,
1 Person,
j
d
^J*
u U li li
x-
p / / /
*--
-
v
cJ )
us
U
^
p p <-;>
3 P
3 - - - ar
U
u* La
rt
*
315. In affixing these pronouns to nouns, the tanwin is rejected, as
is also the final
j
of the dual and regular plurals. In verbs also, the
* This is the form
attached to verbs; as,
^^,
he struck me.
z
170 AN ABSTRACT OF
final \ in the third person masculine plural of the preterite, and the
q
of the dual, and frequently in the plural of the present tense, are re-
S s 9
jected. Examples in the noun, uti, a book
;
Û^, my book
;
jjj*\j
,
nominative, ^j^v
5
genitive and accusative, assistants
;
CSjja>\i
9
izX>jJ\j
3
thy assistants;
j\j*\j ,
nominative, genitive and accusative, ^yfo,
tax? assistants; (jS\j*a\j
9
cX>^-s>U , Ay faô assistants. In the verb,
U^2J, fAey assisted,
lij/^J ,
they assisted me
;
^j^t,
they two (masc.)
assist ; (^f\ja^j
9
they two assist thee, &c.
If a noun end in hamzah
(*),
the hamzah will become
j,
or
Lj,
when
the construction shall require z'ammah or kesrah
;
as, ^LJ , women, nom.
*jLj, or gen. and accus. <lLJ, his women.
In the second person plural masculine, a
j
will precede the affixed
c? c ? 9 9<*
pronoun; as, *Jyî, ê assisted (masc.) aywâj, ê assisted him.
i_5
quiescent after fathah, becomes
1
, as
^^
, ê threw, *U^ , ê ^re>
fe; except in the particles, where it takes sukun; as,
(
Js-,
upon
;
<uLc, upon him.
^5
following either of the letters
\
,
j
, or
^
, will take the vowel
fathah ; and in the two latter cases will coalesce, by teshdid, with the
foregoing letter,
(^
in this case becoming
^j)
; as, bU*>
3
siws/ ^blk^,
my sins
;
jUlc , a?o slaves
;
Ûlc , my Zapo slaves, gen. and accus.
l> * 9 $ s 9 s 9 C / -55 <.?
^^cÛ, /<c^; j^L-^, Moslems
;
,*L-,*o, my Moslems.
For greater emphasis the syllables \A , are frequently prefixed to these
pronouns, which are then detached from the governing verbs, and univer-
9 c * & s 9 ?<* X--03
sally represent the objective case ; as, ^.**w cJMj tU*3 cJW
?
thee
we serve, and
of
thee we implore assistance. These pronouns are
called La&*d\
j
liyaJ^S yU*?.
316. The Reflective Pronouns are formed by the addition of
S C, G &Cs 9 C ^
either of the words ^J*J , c^l J, or
CJi
s.
;
as, <);î3
^j
,
7?e J^rezy himself,
&c.
317. The pronoun attached to a verb in the process of conjugation
is always supposed to be included in it; as, w-^^, he wrote, &c. and,
whenever a word is added, which according to European construction,
seems to be the nominative, it should be considered as being in apposi-
tion with this pronoun, and added for the purpose of making the sentence
more definite; as, <d)|
JIj,
he said, (viz.) God. The pronoun, in
this case, is said to be^x**.
*,
or ^L*, concealed.
318. Demonstrative Pronouns, *,UJ1 jUJ.
These are as follows :
Singular. Dual. Plural.
Nora. Gen. and Accus.
Masc. )4,this.
Ji*
î
Jj!,^l, or^l.
Fem. fc,
J,
tf,
j,
^
î,
g\3
^
^\,
ty
%
or
J$j.
172 AN ABSTRACT OF
The letter
*, or syllable la>, is most frequently prefixed ; as,
Nom. Gen. and Accus.
Masc. U&, or lilfc, ^s* or Îfc *â, â, or
i^fy**
Fem. *x&, AjU, <tej&, or <jifc,
jUj& ..Îa ^.j&, ^%,
or
uA*.
The pronoun cJ is sometimes affixed ; and also with
J
preceding
it; as,
Masc. cJta, or cJJj, t*w; cJj^j, cAjjJ, cMU cJJM, (JMjL
or cJjU,.&c.
Fern. cJU,
J\6,
or <2)Jj,
<jjjj, cJj*7,
CW[>U c!U, cWM
cJb*, ,/ly,
.
or cUte,
&c.
This affix cJ may be varied through both genders and numbers ; as,
9 9.
Ufli, Uflti, &c.
319. The Relative Pronouns, c^-^l!, are
i/iSl,j*5',
j^,
J,
iioho
;
U, what ; the two former of which are thus declined :
Nom. Gen. and Accus.
Masc. <^\!l ^JJl jyj^ll îSl
Fern.
Jl
^
^| ^Jl,^,.JS,
i1,
or ^l
^J masculine and feminine is indeclinable, and has neither the dual
nor plural numbers. The feminine singular is however sometimes found
c^j, and the plural eAJ; andjj, gen.
^j,
ace. \o*
% 1 3*1
^j\
makes the feminine LA , and is regularly declined in the singular
;
but has neither dual nor plural. It is often found with U, as U-^,
whatever.
ô is the same in both genders, and is indeclinable.
ARABICK ADVERBS, JfcS
UA
320. These are nothing more than nouns put in the accusative case
;
as, Ub within, UÛ- without ; \jJ& much, 1A3 /?7//e; which will ne-
<r * '
<
eessarily be numerous.
*
Adverbs of Place, jKUH
<_
^.
Ujb or Lj&U êre. La, L&lfc,
cJL&, cJLfcU, or CJJLfc êre. ci^*-
where
;
yA where? js\, ^J near.
JJ before. *U| and *\jo before.
tjii^, *ljj behind, beyond,
jy,
J-c
6oue, c^s^, Ji-sl beneath. ^*<*j
towards the right hand. jUj,
J^-
towards the
left. J
there.
Of Time, ÛjJI uJjjk.
321.
$
wotfl, tal, J\,
^-^ zêw. jlj , ^<, when ?
u
~*\ yesterday.
i> 1
-"

US when, after, never,
Ja^.
sometime, ja^ or ^ M/zce. Jo already. h\
first. J
te, Ujj o/te/z. Jj e*>er. l*l> as o/tew as. J&**>- then. lUo
o
on.that day. 3d>ij ctf
to moment.
174 AN ABSTRACT OF
PREPOSITIONS, ~j$LjjjL.
322. Prepositions universally require a genitive case to follow them,
*
c~
9 9 9
and are called ys'l uJj*^
: they are either attached to the nouns which
they govern, or are written separately. Of those attached are the fol-
lowing : l-j in,
for,
to, 8?c. lzj by,
of
swearing. ^J like.
J ,
J
to,
for.
^
(for
{
j.) from,
* (for
^)
out
of.
The separate prepositions are, A\ to.
<jxs*- even to. I.S-W, L^, and \&>
^ 9 9 9 O 9
excepting, ^c
from.
,ic upon,
J,
in. j^l near. s.<, ik*o since.
a
*
from. &'s.at. *-aj with.
^6,
\j^&? under, j-ji above, j+s. besides.
Jju,
aVj, *U1 before. uJU-,
s
!jj
behind, 8?c. dx.' a/2er.
Jj>-
about.
^
between.
Jz&
towards, j+s. beyond.
CONJUNCTIONS, JLJjjjL.
323.
^
as
/ ^
and
JH
so A. îi in effect.
^
and
^
so that.
-
^
.. ^
U and Li! to.
J\j
although. W, t, ),
Uji,
^1
andîj wrcto, except,
although. uJ therefore, and.
j\ if.
*\ or, whether. LI 0s if respects.
k
Vc\ whether.
$\
or.
^\ ,
j\
that, certainly.
^,
^\
that, because.
J
cer-
tainly.
^
unless,
j
and. Ui\ only, because.
Jj
but, rather.
J&,J&
but.
\i&
and Sa& 2/i^s.
^j]
that is to say.
^Jj,
*xi,
^
j/es. U^, U-u-s3
or U^-j, UjwÎ principally. *j- 5) without doubt.
J*l
perhaps. j+L
175
besides, Ljj, kSi only. K certainly not. U like as, just as,
*$, L, J
,
J
wo, not, by no means. U^ as often as. c_sL ôa> $ * ô^ mawy
Jjfc whether. US or J ^r to, because. U! têw, smce, wo* ê.
INTERJECTIONS, ti^l.
324. i! , *1 ^ / uJl ê / lj , l> O ! \$A or l$>1 b
,
preceding masculines
:
l^jj or \û! 1) preceding feminines, O, observe,
fyc. \ or
^j\
O, if the
person addressed be near. U, !JJU
?
Ijâ,
ljjJ&U see, behold.
325. It would be almost endless to give examples of this kind, but it
is not necessary to do so. Every one will see, that some of these are
simple, others compound, expressions : and, that they are either nouns
or fragments of nouns, it is perhaps equally clear, if we except the
interjections. In this point of view then, they will come more pro-
perly to be considered in the Syntax.
[
173
j
ON THE ARABICK SYNTAX.
326, If we consider verbs as nothing more than nouns of one kind of
other, conjugated with the pronouns, (which appears to me to be the
fact) it will be impossible to conceive any thing more simple and easy
than the Arabick Syntax is : for then we shall find verbs, nouns, and
particles, all regulated by the same laws, and these laws extremely
few. In the first place, words, used for the purpose of qualifying one
another, can be combined in three ways only : namely, 1st, by apposi-
tion
;
Sndly, by the relation of the genitive case
;
and, 3dly, by the last
standing unconnected with the first, by any formal mark of distinction,
but put in the accusative case, which may be termed absolute relation :
e.
g.
re <r
1st.
4j>-j
cr~=*~
a handsome man (in)
face,
2nd. te*.j
j^r-^
a man handsome
of
face.
3rd. l^j ^ps. a handsome man (I speak as to his) face.
327. In all these cases, the first word may be considered as an attri-
butive used as a substantive, and the second as qualifying it. In
the last case, l^j may stand either as a discriminative noun (Art. 343
j,
supposing the preceding word to take the form of a verb ; as,
cr
*>-
U>-j , he was handsome (as to) face : or, if the verb be transitive, as its
accusative case: e.g. \#>-j
<~r^5
he struck (I speak as to) a
face.
Again, if this word be an attributive, it may then stand as an adverb
for
JU-)
; as, U-jU-
A$*
he stood (I speak as to) without : i. e. whether
we consider the first as a verb or a noun, the second having in each
case a similar relation to it, will become its qualifying term.
328. As all particles are either nouns, or fragments of nouns, they
may always be construed with any following noun, in the relation
o^
of the genitive case : e.
g.
&î
,
in a face, fyc.
If then we sub-
stitute this for the second term of the above examples, we shall have
o^ s
d^~y ~+s~, a man handsome in
face,
which will be perfectly equivalent
in meaning to either of them, and may be substituted for it.
329. In these examples both words are indefinite. But, if it be re-
o
quired to make either of them definite, the article
J!
may be added,
or, they may be made definite in some other way, as the sense or
the grammatical
construction of the passage may require : e.
g. we may
say, d>.jl| y~*z~p <U-j
^.sli, or &>J\
a
^^,
by the first mode- or,
6 c<<
" GO/
ÔOJ ^C/O
&^j\\
~*s>.
,
or <x>.jJ!
c/
msL\
,
by the second ; or, a^ll
a
~&.
,
or
\^j
^^^sit,
ô o-o/ O
G
O-O ^
or A>.j)!
a
~+A\
,
by the third ; or, by using the particle u->, <fc>-j!b
cr
^,
O /
<"<3
O C-O /
c
*T$ tf~î
or
*??Jk
qj*^>
the handsome in face, SfC Some of these
constructions are preferred to others, but examples of them all may be
found.
a a
178 AN ABSTRACT OF
330. It must be remembered, however, (1st.) that of two substantive
nouns in the relation of the genitive case, the last only can be made
definite, either by affixing the article
J^,or
otherwise: but if (Sndly.)
an attributive be the first of such nouns, both may be made definite : as,
will be the case, (3dly.) when nouns are in the state of apposition, i. e.
both will be made either definite or indefinite : e.
g,
1st. c)L*S\ &
t
z the servant
of
the king, not jX*\\ Jo*)!.
c C-o 9 w
2nd. dual! l-Jj\A\ the striker
of
the servant.
9 C G~<3 9
*>
3rd. duall i>J<A\
the striking servant
but in this case, as the qualifying word must generally come last in the
order, we shall have L-*XA\ &x)\
;
and in the dual and plural, j^xll
JiijiA] and jjjldW jU*!1.
331. And generally, when the word to be qualified signifies a
rational being, the qualifying
word will agree with in number, case,
and gender, (if possible) ;
but, if it signifies an irrational one, or be
a broken plural or collective noun, then the qualifying word may be
in the feminine singular, or even in the masculine singular
:
e.
g.
for
$$}J\ dL*M, we may write h)A\ tfLifl
or u-Ûill jL*ii. The reason
of this seems to be, that what are termed broken plurals, are really col-
lective abstract nouns, and therefore do not signify rational agents,
but, it may be, the aggregate of such. Hence their qualifying words
maj agree with them, either as to grammatical form, or as to significa-
tion. This kind of agreement is termed by the native grammarians,
(Jaai, belonging to the word, i. e. to its grammatical form; and,
(jy***
belonging to signification, i. e. as to its logical acceptation : e.
g.
The
word Parliament will be a singular noun as to its grammatical form
s s
(jjail) ; but, a plural according to its logical acceptation (i. e.
^j^x*.)
332. And, generally, the concordance (1st.) of the predicate with the
subject: (2nd.) of the verb with its nominative : and (3rd.) of attributives
with the substantives they are intended to qualify, will be regulated by
these principles. Examples.
9 c 9*
1st.
*Lcl 43! God (is) most wise. (Formal accordance.)
y 9 9 C / oi
2nd.
[ô/î
1 {j*\A\ men (are) not thankful. (Logical do.)
{j
tX^\
jj^l
(Jlji
a part (they)
fear men. (Logical do,)
* 9 S
jjjJlU^j HSLc angels succeed each other. (Logical do.)
333. When the predicate
immediately precedes the subject, and re-
lates to a natural masculine or feminine singular noun (i. e. not so hy
mere grammatical form), it will mostly agree in number and gender with
the subject; as,
ÎkjJLil *LJl the devil caused him to forget.
**j*\
i^nM
a woman said.
180 AN ABSTRACT OF
334. But, if any word intervene, the predicate may be masculine
\
as,
'***>'
9 > \
there will be (masc.) to men against you a
" ^>
"J
decision, (fern.)
îXa-lj
^^
î owe
of
you (fern.) toA seduced (masc.) /m,
335. If (1st) the subject be a broken plural, or signify collectively
a whole class or nation, the predicate will be in the feminine singular
;
but if (2nd) it be a dual or regular plural masculine, or signify an intel-
ligent agent, the predicate may be in the masculine or feminine singular.
Examples
:
^jjJi l^~J their hearts were hard,
J~j;
e^^
prophets were belied.
Ju^ll
e^llJs the Jews have said.
.5>C -
2nd. *~3
JIj
women have said.
Jif-j
Jl5
taw me/z Aflue stfse?.
j^jjjll
J
IS /ze aid's have said.
\$J1
a
^\ the fools
believed.
336. The predicate is seldom made dual or plural, except the sub-
ject precede, and be a rational agent. (See Art. 333.)
337. The subject and predicate being only a compendious method
of expression, may be thus resolved : e.g. *M <d!l ,
God (is) most wise,
for As\ ii\ *iH, G5 fo GW, (I speak of God) a God most wise (is he).
From this analysis it will readily be perceived, that a noun which must
agree with the subject, and with which the predicate must be in ap-
position, is omitted by the ellipsis. Hence the relation between the
subject and predicate will be seen. And, as collective nouns or broken
plurals, may supply this by <cU^
?
f-.-^f-,
or the like, a reason will
be seen why the predicates, in these cases, may be of the feminine or
masculine gender, and in the singular number. As the concordance of
substantives with their attributives are regulated entirely by these prin-
ciples, it will be unnecessary to give further examples.
On the Objective Cases of Verbs.
338. The influence of verbs upon their objects will be either immediate
or mediate. Immediate (1st.) when the sense requiring no qualifying
particle to intervene, the accusative case will be used: mediate (2nd.)
when this is not the case. Examples.
{IjjJ
Jjo
he slew Zaid.
lily J Ijuj
Jacl
he gave Zaid a dinar.
c ^ > ' '
^ he went out into Khorasan against
2nd.{
JSL^l
J!
UU-J we entered into the temple.
V
182
AN ABSTRACT OF
On the Use of the Tenses of the Arabick
Verb.
339. The Arabick verb has but two tenses, the past and the present.
In applying these, we may reckon (1st.) either from the period in
which we write or say any thing, or (2nd.) from any other period
already
introduced into the discourse
:*
e.
g.
^ 9 9 uj-3 ^
(j*jlaJ &ij\ c^?U Rashid died in Toos.
9 c~o c^
(Jîl \
u**^
jl should the miser to uch.
1st
{
"-,-,-'
f.
"
O
HE WAS
(
so circumstanced that) he
*
^
J
went out into Khorasan.
Qnr
\
)
6
.
'J
.
c JC"C c
r, -/]
(there) came to to #grrf, #e
'"
** "^ "
" h
"
J
walks upon his back.
9 c<.~0?99 c?
99 ^\wherever you be (or shall bej
-
"
death takes (or will take) you.
In the first example, the author dated the tense of cÛ from the
time in which he wrote. In the second the verb
^r,
seems to be
present to any time. In the third we have two preterites, and the
second being preterite to the first, will form what we generally term a
pluperfect. In the fourth,
(J^f, ,
is evidently present with the preterite
*
See the notes to my Hebrew Grammar,
pp.
344-5, &c.
183
^j\,
which precedes it. And in the last, the particle U^>1, seems evi-
dently to throw the present tenses following into futurity.
340. The preterite is often used (1st.) in prophetical, or (2nd.) in
hypothetical sentences : in the first case, for the purpose of implying
certainty
;
and, in the second, by introducing the mention of one past
event, to indicate the certain occurrence of another : examples.
1st.
rwj; <>>
A nor shall you meet, as Ions; as ijou
J
shall remain, an injury.
"A*
'\
\^
s kingdom snaH remain, or (precatively)
J
MAY IT REMAIN.
\ had God directed us, we had directed
<*? i,s ?<>*> <*,
y
0U i. e. putting the case upon this issue,
2nd. Jtad^l UUfcjl
\
*
'
f the consequence mentioned would as surely
have followed.
341. The present tense will also be occasionally used in these senses,
but then contingency will be implied. The preterite tense too of in-
transitive verbs will often be understood in the present, as in other
languages.
On words used to modify or determine the action &c. of
verbs, termed the ju
?
circumstance, and j-&v
,
noun of
discrimination.
342. These modifying words are applied on one and the same prin-
ciple, the only difference being, that the
JU.
must be an attributive,
184
AN ABSTRACT OF
the
jLf,
a substantive, noun
;
but, as both these amount to the same
thing in their grammatical application (Art. 327), they are necessarily
regulated by the same principles.
343. The rule generally given is, that when a proposition is once
complete, if any qualifying words are to be added, they must either
stand in the accusative case, and so be
(1)
the
JW
or
(2)
the
J+&2
or
they must have some particle in order to show their connection, and
of what sort it is, with such proposition : e.
g.
1st. of the
JU-.
UjU- C-?U he died hungering. U<1j
jjJ
jW-
Zaid came riding.
1 Zaid is happy (as to
2nd of the
jj&c
his) PERSON.
U^>. cl?U he died a hungering.
SO,
3rd. with a particle.
c_><ilj or UiK juj U Zaid is not a liar.
344. Nouns following others which signify weight, measure, number,
&c. (provided the number exceed ten, but not ninety-nine), will require
that the person or thing so designated be put in the accusative case, and
in the singular number : e.
g.
* Ox s c
U>J
JL^
a pound (of) olive-oil.
\j*~* j\a*o two measures ( of) barley.
These cases may all be resolved into that exemplified in l^
a
(Art, 327), which indeed will account for all adverbial expressions
found in this language,
345. If, however, the numeral express a number from three to ten
inclusive, the construction may take either of the two forms following.
1st. The numeral may be construed as a noun substantive governing
that implying the thing &c, numbered, in the relation of genitive
case plural, which, if possible, should be a broken plural of paucity,
.{Artt. 304-5), e.g.
Ju-^
&Mj\
four
prophets.
m\j\ $j three days.
2ndly. The numeral may be treated as an attributive agreeing in case
and gender with the person or thing numbered; as,
u~a>- }Zj\ty
<$3 )yM three sons and five daughters.
346. With respect to the numbers under three. When the thing &c.
numbered is expressed, the singular or dual number, respectively, will
s s.
suffice for determining the number ; but, when it is not expressed, *\>-
\
will be used for the masculine, and
lS^^
fr the feminine : and, if it
be necessary to specify the class &c. of such beings, its name will be
added in the relation of the genitive case ; as, <j-AJI &>.\ one
of
the men,
*LA!t ^s^s>\ one
of
the women.
c
In like manner Û3i masc. or
(
i)\sj&\
fern, is sometimes added to express
B b
186 AN ABSTRACT OF
the dual number : in that case it will follow the name of the thing
numbered, and will agree with it in gender, case, &c. as,
J^j\
Jk>-j
two men, jUuul
Jtij*\
two women.
347. The abstract verbs
J&
he was,
j\*
he became, â\ he was, or
became, in the morning, ^jsf\ he was at noon,
.^
<] he was, or became,
05
in the evening, cp\i he remained during the night,
Jk
he remained
during the day, j^J ê was not,
'
Jlj
U,
uJCrjI U, ,<ito he ceased not,
when used as such, will require their qualifying term, or, what is
predicated of their subject, to stand in the relation of the
JU.
or jLf
-
3
If
you are speakers of the truth.
In the evening the shadow became long.
Zaid did not cease (to be) an Emir.
These verbs may, however, be construed with the predicate in the
nominative case, as other verbs are ; but this takes place only when
they are not used as abstracts; as, j*b\
J&
the
affair
existed.
348. It was remarked (Art. 262),
that certain particles preceding the
persons of the present tense, would have the effect of altering, or en-
tirely rejecting, the final vowel. Those which change the vowel
(
'
) to
G.J
-53 C ^ s- s
G 'CJ
{)
are jl or
^\
that, A by no means,
.
or
.J3
so that, ^mj\
well,
^j^.
until,
J
in order that,
j\
until,
j
and, preceded by a command, prohi-
bition, negation, interrogation, wish, or representation, uJ so that, S?c.
as in the case of
j
:
Examples.
^
9<J
^
<J
9 %
7?j^~
eft
ty\
I desire that you will go out.
^ s<j g
Jxw
J
he will by no means do (it).
1 .aJ
j\
\sA &&& Iwill surely cry out
for
ever, until you hear me*
9 s 9 $* * <* * l> 9 <S%
alL
&>\jj
ljuj
Jiil fo7/ Zaid, and take his property.
ujCoÛ /^-jI come to me, so that I may honour thee.
c
The particles which cause the final vowel to be rejected are, J not,
U) not yet
;
J
used to express a command,
*$
a prohibition, and
eft
iff
as
>
G / G G
G / G UJ
j
U! ê
2*5
not yet gone out.
G f G /-
G / C
r^r^
let him not go out.
x
G* G G/
G
uX</\
<J**J*>
eft if y
ou honour me, I will honour you.
188 AN ABSTRACT OF
The same will be the case when some of these particles are not
expressed, but understood : and hence M. de Sacy has made these ter-
minations distinctive of a subjunctive and conditional mode.* I very
much doubt, however, whether this has simplified the matter.
On the Construction of Passive Verbs.
349. The passive voice of a verb is termed
J^#
unknown, because
the agent is never mentioned, or remains unknown : e.
g.
& C -S3 9
jjj
u^ss- Zaid was loved.
S 9 s ?
J>-j
JoJi a man was killed.
If it be necessary that the agent be known, the active voice may be
used ; as, instead of saying, Zaid was struck by his servant, we shall
have Ijjj
*i\ Ljji the servant struck Zaid
;
or, placing the word
9 9<* ? C s ^ 9 9(.
*1*H, as a nominative absolute, (Art.
227),
Lv>j <jye *L&\ (as to) the
servant, he struck Zaid.
Of Particles which affect the Cases of Nouns.
,
350. It has already been remarked (Art. 328
j
that particles used as
prepositions will require a genitive case to follow them : in other
words, as these are either nouns, or fragments of nouns, they will always
See his Gram. Aiabe. Vol. I.
p.
113.
require the noun following to be in the relation of the genitive case.
It will be superfluous to give examples.
351. Some other particles will require the following noun to be in
the accusative case ; and, when going before propositions, will require
the subject to be in the accusative, and the predicate in the nominative
case. These particles are
JS
or
^\
certainly, that, ^S3 but,
^J&
as
if
C^J
would!
Jxl êrâps.Examples.
<n_>jl ^LjSI
J\
certainly man is a liar.
pji+'o
\&ij fj\
fj^b
it has come to me, that Zaid (is) running away.
&x)
\Sj.J
iJ&
jj*& <J\>.
Amrw is come to me, but Zaid (is)
Jar
away.
& ^ coo
5jJ
fjt.j's jtJS
^
as if man (werej a horse
)
And so on, by substituting the rest of these particles in the place
of either of them.
352. The negative particle $ not, will require the noun immediately
following it to be in the accusative case, provided it be indefinite ; and,
v-o
^ 9
in that case the tanwln will be rejected; as,
jWt
[j
J^-j
X (there is) not
a man in the house.
353. The particle Si
if not, except, will in every case, excepting that
in which it comes between the subject and predicate, or occurs in a
negative proposition,
require the noun following to be in the accusative,
(unless some preposition be expressed or implied :) e.
g.
l*x>j % jc*|
(Js-^f-
U no one came to me except Zaid.
190
AN ABSTRACT OF
Of the Vocative Particles.
354. The particles b,
1^1
, \A, \^\ b or
\&\
\ O, Holla, #c. (Art.
324), will require the following noun to be in the nominative case,
provided it have the definite article, and the person addressed be
supposed to be near ; as,
J^J\
b O man !
355. But if the noun have not the definite article, or the person &c.
so addressed, be supposed to be at a distance, it will be put in the
accusative case ; as, l^j b O man
!
The same will be the case if the noun be in the relation of the
genitive case with another; as, *1H
Jut b O servant
of
God
!
356. An intensitive vocative is made by adding t\ to the accusative
so placed; as, *U!e b O slave!
a^J
b O Zaidl For
^j\
b O my
Father, we occasionally have ll^\ b, Lôl b, &\ b, x\jj\ b, or M
b.
On the Use of the Definite Article,
Jb
357. Particularity seems to be the general force of this particle
;
and if so, perhaps it is nothing more than the Hebrew word 7&
i
strong, &c. whence 7K this, &c. It is said by the native grammarians

to have two properties, one whereby it makes the noun to which it is
prefixed definite ; as,
Jf-jl!
the man, (already introduced to notice) or,
strongly to mark its character or properties; as, &J$\ the lion, a very
lion : just as we use the indefinite article in English, he was a man
;
i. e.
truly a man
;
or, in other cases, to particularize the noun so marked, as
in the phrase, the Fox and the Grapes, where, the animal and
fruit so designated, are not made definite in the usual acceptation of
that term, but contradistinguished from all others. In this last case, it
/Co
is often prefixed to abstract nouns; as,
J.ii*!1
the intellect,* &c. For
its application in construction, see Art. 330.
*
See my Hebrew Grammar,
p.
307.
THE END OF APPENDIX I.
[
192
]
APPENDIX II
THE PERSIAN PROSODY,
J>jj*
^JU.
On the Quantity of the Syllables.
358. Every syllable in Persian prosody ending in a quiescent letter
will be long ; as, \i ba,
jj
bu, *) bo,
^
bi,
^
bay, ji baw,
^
bai,
jj
,
oj
,
jj
,
&c. The same is the case in the Arabick, as also in words
ending in the tanwin; as, Hail lafzan. In the last six instances, the
syllables are long by position.
359. This is also the case when more than one quiescent letter follows
o c 9 c ^
any vowel; as, l^wO,
c^
-p*-
3
or with dljjkx^jlj (Art.
37),
as, <^>-
khab,
ij*lj>-
khish, &c.
) 9 $
360. The silent * (iJils* c^lfc), however not occurring at the end of
c
a line, will be excepted, or not, at the pleasure of the writer ; as, *&+>-
9 9
? 9 O
measure khanda or khandah ; as will also the words
jj, y,
*.=*,
jf^
8
,
read to or to, do or do, &c. but, generally short : in this case, these
O x C 9 9
letters are omitted in scansion
(--LiD'), as, &JJ*, J, CD
9
&c.
361. Alif with meddaT is resolved into two alifs in scansion ; as, X*]\
THE PERSIAN PROSODY. 193
for jj amad, which, however, gives the same measure in both cases.
In like manner, letters doubled by ieshdid are written out at length in
scansion : as, *js>-
,
fjj*
362. Any syllable long by position, (Art. 358) may, upon taking a
c
subsequent vowel, become short; so
J
J with the ifcafut will become
J
J dili, as in
^ Jj
;
^j\i
^
ma-ay ba-kl, of ,*
;
but, this vowel
(however originating) may be made long by what is termed 2j~*$
_V^
;
as,
^
jjj
dilay man ; as may also any other short vowel.
363. Two quiescent letters cannot, generally, follow the same vowel.
Whenever, therefore, this would take place, recourse is had to one or
other of the following expedients.
1st. If the first of such letters be I or
^
, it may be dropt ; as, <L* for
ali, jj for
jy.
This is termed jLî-1 abbreviation.
2ndly. The last of two quiescents, the first being either \
,j
, or
^,
may
take the short vowel kesrah, if not at the end of a line; as, c-?UU or
c_>biT for c-jI^jT
;
so,
j^j
for
j^j ; J\a
forjb
; y^
for
jj.
The same
may take place, when the second is any other consonant ; as,
c^**o for
C
3rdly. The last of such quiescents, not following \
,
j
,
or
^
, and not
occurring at the end of a line, may be rejected in the scansion ; as,
c. c
U*jfc>
for u^-jJ, &c. This will also hold good, when there are three
c c
194 THE PERSIAN PROSODY.
t^v**.>- quiescents, the first of which is
\
9 j
,
or
^,
as in c^J^
^^^
<*^~~j, &c. in which cases, read
^Jf
9
uW*>
^r^?
&c *
36L The letter
j
however, (see Art.
28), will always be cut off after
1, j,
or
^,
quiescent, unless a vowel can be made to follow, for in that
case it may take the vowel kesrah, as before : e.
g. \6 for jta,
^
for
^,
yt for
^yj,
&c. or
a
x> j\j.
365. A medial
^
may be cut off at pleasure
;
as,
&
for ^J,
j^y
p
for
(jjj?i'
This, however, takes place only in a few words.
c %
*
366. The letter
j
with xjAJb
(
*
) is long ; as, Jjta read da-ud
[
Ajj\a)
;
as is also zum
( )
or kesrah () with the Arabick pronouns ; as, a! lahu,
tj bihl. The former of these is termed Ui ?L-ll the
filling
up
of
zum.
c
367. The
J-*j
uill, (Art. 5.) may be neglected (1st), or not (2nd), in
the scansion of a verse, at the pleasure of the writer; as, (1st)
^j>
for
^j1 j\
Ai, or (2nd)
j\
\jte\j
,
measure, nakahra az.
368. Contractions in the vowels, &c. will frequently take place ; as,
,-**-& for ÎjjIJi),
j?
ko, for
jl
< kih o.
369. The vowel attending' the conjunction
(
3
)
may be long or
short at pleasure : e.
g. jWJj
J
J dilo dildar ; or, dilo dildar.
370. A quiescent^ followed by Twill be disregarded ; as,
u^jjT^,
read
^jtl ci/ka azarl. (Art. 368).
371. The letter x is frequently omitted in the middle of words; as,
J&
for jl^,
J>-
for
J^.
fa
ON THE
Jij\
STANDARDS, OR FEET EMPLOYED IN PERSIAN PROSODY.
372. The original number of these standards is eight: namely,
Cy- Ps (j 9 S C 9 '9 t, P <->s<*9
1.
Jiyt3
fa-u-lan. % JisM
fa-i-lun. 3. ^L^lAô mti-fa-i-lun. 4. ^xibu.*
mus-taf-i-lun. 5. ÎLcIjU mu-fa-i-la-tun. 6. Ûli^^c mu-ta-fa-i-lun.
o p^ ^ p * p o ^
7. ^'Icli fa-i-la-tun. 8. C-?âa> maf-u-la-tu. It must be remembered,
that the length of the vowels is the only thing to be regarded in these
measures ; and, that the prosodial marks
-
long, and

short, are ap-
plied here like the corresponding measures in European Prosodies, in
this point of view only.
373. But, as these measures would be too few for all the purposes
of poetry, others have been formed from them, by either adding to,
diminishing, or otherwise varying, their forms. These variations are
generally designated by the term uJU-j sliding, dragging,
fyc.
(as a
camel), or uUf infirmity : the particulars respecting which may be
seen in Clarke's Arabick Prosody, Oxon.
1661, pp.
15-35. A table
exhibiting their changes may also be seen in Mr. Gladwin's work on
the Rhetoric and Prosody of the Persians,
p.
90.
374. These artificial
Jij\
or feet, may be represented by one or other
C ^ 9 Cs <> 9s 9 9s <*st>,
of the following measures : viz. 1. ^.i, 2.
J*i,
3.
J>*i,
4.
Jyw,
5. Ûs,
196
THE PERSIAN PROSODY.
6.
Ju,
7. cl4i,8. gsdSUUj 9. ci>L\i, 10. ÛS, 11. ^jJ, 12.
J^JU,
13. ^yd*, 14. Û*, 15. J*eU*, 16. ^.Uj&i, 17. ^JUJU*, 18. ^sicliU,
19. ÎcUJU, 20. ^'IcUjuj, 21. ^pLclaJU, 22. ^jLvaJu-,^.. We have not
here given all the forms in which these measures are in every case
exhibited ; their values will suffice for our purpose.
9 9
On the measures
[jy
%
seas) of the different kinds of verse.
375. As Mr. Gladwin's dissertation on the Rhetoric and Prosody of
the Persians* is accessible to all, and the Grammar attached to the
King of Oude's Persian Dictionary to many, it will be superfluous
here to exhibit all the different kinds of Terse, and to discuss their
different measures.. We shall confine ourselves, therefore, to the scansion
of a few of the examples contained in this work, and of a few others
extracted from some of the more popular poems of the Persians.
376. The first specimen then, is found in Art. 52. It is composed in
the species of verse termed ta>
j^
,
and contains four feet of the mea-
C 9 s?
sure ^*Ak* in each line ; as,
9 90 C C >-G
*
London, 1801.
Scansion wJaffi
3. 2. 1.
6. 5. 4.
9 C C O O
For numbers 1 and
2, See Art. 361 ; for 3 and
4,
Art. 362 ; for
5,
368 ; for
6,
369. Of the same measure are the couplets at Artt. 82,
93.
377. The next example we shall take, occurs in Art. 64,
which may
thus be scanned.
2. 1.
f c c^-
3.
4.
JSj
Lab & I, cJU-
^
|ji U
Measure.
J^j
J,*iJL^ Jmz~* JlxaL^
Numbers
1 and
3,
Art. 363-2,
362; n.
2,
Art. 361 ; n.
4,
Art. 362;
n.
5,
Art.
364 ; n.
6, Art. 362.
378. We shall now proceed to the Fable, immediately following this
Appendix. The first poetical
specimen we have is the following
:
198 THE PERSIAN PROSODY.
i.
2.
3.
4.
Measure. ^lî ^LcU* ^^.cli^
Number
1,
Art. 360; n.
2,
Artt.
367, 361;
\\j
for Mj
for
Tj
; n. 3
f
Art. 367; n.
4,
Artt. 367, 361,
2. 1.
379.
jV^^. j^^<*
;
W^<-r^
iSAjiJ?
5. 4. 3.
Measure. C-?lcU ^j'lcli ÎsU ^'IcU
Number 1 and
3,
Artt. 363-2 or 362
;
n.
%
Art. 360 ; n. 4, Art,
364
;
n.
5,
Art. 361.
C M Gy
380.
V^J
c$t
ci^
^ ^ Lr ^3
<J^
^î
^
^
J ^
**
-^
vS*
</^"
In Scansion, wJkiijjj.
4. 3. 2. 1.
6.
,5.
U^JsAiJ
^k^ kiMtlg Jtyftb
Measure. cAcli Ûlcti îeli ÎcU
Number 1,
Art. 370 ; n.
2,
Art. 361 ; n. 3. Art. 363-3
;
n. 4 Art. 367
;
n.
5,
Artt. 363, 367
; n. 6. Art. 51,
by Imalah.
381.
ij-^t* f-fjj)
**jjjf duif
c
In Scansion, j-jlajtt jJ
U"
Measure.
*
2.
>> *
1.
5. 4. 3.
c
c^J
o^
i-bLii
Number
1,
Art. 362; n.
2,
Artt. 360, 362; n.
3,
Art. 363-2; n.
4,
Art. 369. The
^
receives teshdld, in order to enounce the (') for
^,
which amounts to the same thing as the applying of hamzah
(
* )
; n.
5,
Art. 363-3.
382. The following are the measures on which the Shah Namah of
Firdausi, the Secandar Namah of Nizami,* the TimOr Namah of
Hatifi, the Bostan and Pand Namah of Satdi, &c. are composed : viz.
*
A very excellent edition of this work, with a Commentary, was printed
at Calcutta in 1812, which is the best work the student can read ; after which
he may read the first part of the Shah Namah, printed at the same place in
1811.
200
THE PERSIAN
PROSODY.
Example Shah Namah
:
Jj**
Ji)** Jjî
J^xi
Measure.
c
Scansion, j-Jaft. Example.
In the name
of
the Lord
of
the soul and
of
wisdom,
Above which imagination cannot pass (go).
383. The Mathnavi of Mawlawi Rum, of Attar, and the counsels of
Attar,* are on the following measure : viz.Example from the Mathnavi
of Mawlawi Rum.
^
JLAi
c
Scansion, *,jdz7.
9
t.
v V
Example.
/ c^.
Hear from
the reed when it tells a tale
;
And
of
separations it laments,
*
Printed by M. de Sacy, Paris, 1819. A fault in this edition, of which
the student should be warned, is, that we often have for
,
and vice-versa.
In other respects the edition is very valuable.
384. Example from the Yusuf and Zulikha of Jaml.
c
In Scansion, îoSj
jj.
Example.
l.
9 $ '
Measure, ^xs Îx-cU*
L;
lxclio
Sôt Jôw owe rose
from
the eternal garden,
1. In this case the short vowel (' ) is lengthened (Art. 362),
by
doubling the consonant following, as <a*\ for JJ^l.
The student will find the Shah Namah, the Secandar Namah, the
Timur Namah of Hatifi, the Bostan and Pand Namah of Satdi, the
Mathnavi of Mawlawi Rum, and the works of Attar, just cited, much
more easy and regular in their measures, than the Odes &c. of Hafiz
;
and, with these he had better commence.
THE END OF APPENDIX II.
j)d
[
202
]
APPENDIX III.
PRAXIS.
A PERSIAN FABLE.
fW / G
The Gardener and the Nightingale.
OS G G//S/G G G G
g / C CO
S- s s
Uj (jl^jjl
^jjj oÔ
^^^j
lS**"*^.
J
!&&!
\jj\>
**~j
JT t_f1y>
^G -55 / C
y g / / c /
i> G G ^
<
"
c
G G * G
G / G/ ^
^jlyjl/1
^-
j
Jj^cK
JV],J'
>*j^
ty
L5^
iP^?" **V
^
J
J
* / G /G/G*' C
A PRAXIS. 203
"
^ * * s *
\'
f set
_
^
* '

^<
^&A& jl
^
jlilMJ
\jj\
J&j)
0l>-
**j\#-* j
dull*
^
Jf
i>6**
go*
/ '
:
.<" * -
c-^kil c^wJJ
^W^ J^Lr
^r^
'^^
lP
J>y Ly^Lri C>V^
s
*
c
t
<-
jo ^
201 A PRAXIS.
c^**
*>* jl **4^
erf
*"
S**?*J*
**.
Lr*
Ji/* ^
o*j
jli ^bj
jjj
/ G
CO f 9 h 9*
W^
bX&J> ^
iJÂXJ jU&J
C^ssT
Cl^^ jf\ **X*
JjU
a
<c ij^JjAXi
<_>& ^J
jxj!^
c-^V,
cA^ ltH L&
17
ftjSpjh* jj\)
t
j\ y
< JjJ July ^Xkfc CÛlCo
J^jIaJ Jac
JT
^\j>
WAjjl
JU
ijo
cfij**\
**j&y*
^<V^
c^V
u^!/
^j
*Ju
^^
(J^v M\ j-
C^
b^fl
Jf^ JW
/ 9U9 o
A PRAXIS. 205
><*9 o
^
/o/ c c i>
j
jllf
c^dtjb
^bj
JJj 4)/
4>!jT |;JjJj
*J*>T jfffc
C^
J
J
J
^
C^ C^
/ G O C C C ''
,.
jj
jt
^j o-^,l ^&bjT **j\~>1 < e^^ti
t:
^^>
yj
jJ < jt<AJ
<.>/
Job
J\
<*9 9 9t*9
9 9 c / c /*> / o
l^;J
J-*b ^rs^j
*Vj^ ^J^
8
c^ tM^ cA
*?/*
<*>*
$J*J*
3J^^ji
9t,
<f
s 9<* O-O

t
j
^JJJ 43
j
X)U
/~j;
\jLlâ} ***X>
J <G Job
Jjj3
-J^
^1
^^'
Cl^
o
9^9 9 O
[
206
]
PRAXIS.
ANALYSIS.
<J-.bj
jUib ê gardener and the nightingale, jL&b C(>mp. of b a
garden, and jb (Art. 150).
j
copulative conjunction uiks uJ^..
JJj
a nightingale. Ju>W (Art. 287, &c.)
9 9' 9-
<* b Co
They have related that a husbandman had a delightful and pleasant
garden,
b C C
4il ^JjjT 3 pers. plural, comp. pret. of jJ^T to flnttg-, re/ate, #c.
9 <j * C fc
^ ^#, conjunction
Jj-^j*
a-^
^llfc^ a villager, indefinite noun (with
o i
o c ^ c
J&J
oV,
Art. 66) of ^la&J. Form
Jfe.
Root .JLfcJ ê se z/p 2/je ^?re-
jfeci
of
a village,
^J\i
indefinite noun of jb garden (Art. 66). c^-ilj.
3 pers. sing. simp. pret. of JJ\ J fo /tare, î^- delightful, S?c. attri-
butive lâ-s. a^ cheerful,
fyc.
For the construction, see Artt. 230,
227,
236.
And a garden more fresh
than the rose-garden
of
Iram.
c c 9
j
conj. and ^b*^ indefinite noun of jb^j garden,
j
xj\j com-
parative form of *jb*
fresh (Art. 87).
j\
from,
than. (89). ÎxJ^comp.
of jf rose, and ^b^ ^/ace. (Art. 171).
j\
Iram, the name (*Lc) of
A PRAXIS. 207
a celebrated garden, said formerly to have existed in Arabia Felix.
These two words are in construction.
c co * yy
t^JuJL^
J
1 Joel
\jj\jtf
*--J
J\
i^fcj the air
of
it equalized the gale
y y y
^
y
yy S yy yy
of
the spring,
|y&
aV, #c. Arab, form
J*i.
Root ^j^b it blew (i. e. the
wind). This word being in construction with
J]
takes
^j
with the
vowel kesrah, (Art. 60). jt demonstrative pronoun that, **J mr,
S y .^ y o
gfl/e. Arab, form
J-5.
Root *3 ft 6/ezy gently,
\jj\g
spring.
\j
is the sign of the objective case, (Art.
63) and properly belongs to
the preceding word ; but when nouns are in construction it is always
added to the last of them. (Art. 234). The following verb requires this
objective case, (Art. 233) : ^SpLJZ Jljocl it equalized.
Jlj&cl equali-
y y y
zation, Magdar or verbal noun of the 8th conjugation active of
J*xe
c
he did justly. ^jS+L^ he or it gave. 3 pers. sing, potential mood of
c
tfJuZJC to give. Cornp. verb. (Art. 173).
y
C .sil fi
'
O y O ?
ij.^Ls Jax*
lyW Uj
Â^l
^jj cJ^*\J
*4*W
ê scerc
of
its
^
y y y
spirit-refreshing odoriferous herb perfumed the sensorium
of
the soul.
Ss yy S3 y
<uU^ scent. Form i.!Ui . Root JL he smelled.
c)^~lj
an odoriferous
O 9 y O ?
herb, sweet basil. Form
^Jkks, Root
r
^j.
^^jil
~jj
its spirit-refresh-
9 SOP O
ing,
^jj
spirit. Arab, form
J*i.
Root
-jj,
Jj ê rested,
fyc, ^jUi\
augmenting, 8?c, contracted participle of
&&}& fa
augment,
fyc, (Art.
135). For similar compounds, see Artt. 146-199.
^J>
conjunct, pronoun.
208 A PRAXIS.
c
3 pers. sing. (Art. 92). Ld the brain, sensorium, S?c. LiU* the
soul. These two last words are in construction, and the syllable
\j
is
added to the latter, to mark the objective case of the following verb.
Ja*~*
perfumed. Participle passive of the 2nd Arab, conjugation of
^kc it was odorous.
c^>^
it made. 3 pers. sing, potential mood of
b
^^L to make, do, fyc.
to which <uUwS- is the nominative.
Jaj a string
of
pearls, verse. Arab, form
J*i.
Root *& he arranged,
A rose garden like the rose bed
of
youth.
Its rose (is) moistened with the water
of
life.
C 9 U 9 9 C
9
^Jl^-lf
indefinite form of
JcJ&.
j&- like.
j\j&
place abounding in
9 * y ' '
roses. Comp. of
Ji
andj^j (Art.
171),
fj\j>-
has.ili masdar of
j\y>-
9
young. (Art. 163). jS its rose,
fyc.
<-r>\j~>
moist, fresh
/
J
forjl
o/J
^/row, prep, c_M water.
rV&tfj
J(/e. Hasili madar from ^&xij
c
/ivt'izg
1
,
#c. (Art, 163)
plural of *JJj Art. 84.
^7 O^
yijL ^k* ^w
A PRAXIS.
The modulation
of
its nightingales exciting delight
;
Its odour-like gale mixing tranquillity.
For the scansion of these verses, see Art. 378.
\y
sound, #c. in construction. (Art. 61). t-^Jjuic nightingale.
^
conjunct, pronoun, his, its,
fyc.
CLikJLs. delight, fyc.
Arab, form <l*i.
y C GO
Root^Lc. -jj\j contracted participle of ^ps^j\ to excite, (Art. 134).
o
jas.
perfume. U particle of similitude, (Art. 155),
the
<_$
is added on
account of the following pronoun
^p.
(Art. 209). u^sAj tranquillity,
S?c. Form lixi. Root
~*j
J,. wT mixing, contr. part, of ^Û\ to
mix.
? o /
jjj jVJb jjiî^ <fcjf cJu
_^j
awe? e'w owe corner
of
his garden there
was a rose-bush.
j
and. ji in, upon, prep. C-b one, z&Lj* corner.
^^
garden.
^
wis.
^y^
# rose-bush, indefinite form of
c
^d jj
,
3rd pers. simp. pret.
>>
sing, of jJ^J to be, remain.
C o c $ c
Ûjl*
**ys~
r^J^yjl/^Lr
5
J L5*^^
JW*
j\j*fi
more fresh than
the young plant
of
desire, and more elevating than the branch
of
the
tree
of
mirth.
o
yxft
more fresh,
as above,
j\
than,
Jlfi
the young plant,
^j^
de~
sire, comp. of *& desire, and
^\j
contr. part, of
^^j\j
to drive, j>j\js\j*).
O
CO
comp. of^ the head, and
\\y\ contr. part, of
{
^>^\
to elevate.
j
as
e e
210
A PRAXIS.
before. ^L branch. %jZ* tree. Arab. form. <Ui. Root ys^ he changed,
Src. Û^ll hasili masdar of Ûjll glad, happy, S?c. (Art. 163).
^^
c;
^ ^^
y>
crcry morning upon the face of
the rose-bush.
j&
every, ^.L^ morning. Form
Jl*i. Root *<*. ji upon,
prep,
g^
the face. ^-^ta the rose-bush.
a coloured rose, like the cheek
of
heart-deceiving damsels
of
gracious
disposition, or (like) A<? cêcA: o/" ê jessamine-bosomed scented with
jessamine, blossomed.
\j>j cX
# fose o/" colour.
/jp-
/t"A:e. j1*X ê
cheek. Arab, form
JUi. Root
j^
ê excused. ^L> Jita. comp.
Jj
Ci
fo Aear^, and v-ôy contr. part, of
l
y*%/
to deceive : plural number.
9 9 9 9 l> 9
gra^. c)jb, comp. of cJjb gracious, and
g^>.
disposition.
j\~*>j
the
yce. ^^tMS comp. of -*: jessamine, and
^j
f/ze bosom. PL num.
^-^.^b jessamine,
^j
scent.
^JJ^Li,
third pers. sing, potential of
Jxs&L
to blossom, with <_> prefixed, which is merely pleonastic.
(Art. 110).
(^9 9
<* O 9 O
.JL&f *j>j,*}
jlcT
tjjb
J^x
Lc,
Jf jT b jUib the gardener beginning
*Ae game
of
love with that beautiful rose, said, b prep. with, lie,
beautiful. Form jlai. Root
^^
Ae adorned himself. jU-c /oê. Form
cJ5.
Root ^s, he loved, gjb game. Ha.s.ili masdar ofjb contr. part.
A PRAXIS.
211
of
rr*"V
*
Fîy
-
j^l
ê beginning, xdyti making,
fyc,
pret. part, of
jj^J (Art. 173).
juS'Srd pers. sing. Potential mood of
^
to say.
tyj&Jo
&&* JUyw w-J
J
t
fi
J?
(As to) the rose, I know not what he
is saying under the lip, (imperceptibly). (Art. 227).
j
t
j>
comp. of <o
in, to, fyc.
jij under. tJ the lip. Jlt3u*j of 43 not. ^c continuative
o
particle, and *3ta / know. 1st pers. sing. pres. of
^s-Jjd to know*
&>-
what,
^.y^*'
^r^
P
ers* sin
g*
pres. of îf to soy.
Jjjl
c5*
iJ*s j^
bV L5^
cWj jV
^ ^^ he brings back the help-
less nightingales in lamentation. t that, conj. (Art. 184.)
j^T - jb
#e brings back, jb 00C&. J;j!
^
3rd. pers. sing. pres. of jJjjT to bring.
JiAi
nightingales, pi. of
JJlj. 1^3
^
helpless.
^
prep, without,
and L3 ê//>. U shews this word to be the objective case to the verb.
(Art. 233).
j
j in, into, 8?c. Ûi lamentation. For the scansion, see
Art. 379.
ju>T jf ^b-UJu jjgjt* ci?jU
^>
^jj
e*W^
ê gardener, (upon) a
day, by established custom, came to see the rose,
^jjj
on a day, in-
definite form of
jy
j day.
j>
prep, upon, S?c. CA>U custom. Form
<Ui. Root fc^s, jlc #e returned,
fyc.
jjgx* established, part. pass, form
Jû**
of &$ he appointed. & tfo,
for.
^lÛi ê S2g-A. J^^T 3rd pers.
sing. simp. pret. of ^xt o come.
212 A PRAXIS.
aJU ^jc
J^
tdJus? j
^jj
a
J$\j
^jj ÎaIj he saw a nightingale
lamenting, which continued rubbing his
face upon the
leaf
of
the rose*
*x> J he saw. 3rd pers. sing. simp. pret. of j*X> J to see.
J$\j
part. pres.
of ^^Jl) to lament
(JU.
Art. 236). aa-js?*
/ea/J
jtrage. Form <L.
Root t-a^f. JuJL ^yc. 3 pers. sing. pret. imperf. of /mJu!U Jo rw&.
9 c
WJ^LjJ
**^
**jb*k
ê binding
of
its gold-coloured volume. xj\jJ#
binding, sewing. <^L>. volume.
Arab.J>jj gold-coloured, comp. of
jj
g-o^ and jl6
painting, contract, participle of
j^,J&
to paint, #c.
\j)\
oblique case of
j\
he, it, governed by the following verb, i^^zsxJ*.
j-J jl&wtJ with sharp bill. Ai:~o (form
JU&>)
noun of instrumentality
from the verb yi3 he perforated, Arab. (Art. 293). jj3
sharp, a Persian
attributive qualifying the foregoing word (Art. 201).
c
jfjt
j\
from
each other.
j\
prep.
from.
cJj one, numeral.
Jjj
other.
osii ^j #e tore, pret. imperf. 3rd. pers. sing, of
lj
x^lS to tear.
j^3
j
j foo&s wj?ow, comp. ofjd and
ji*~>J>J
to look upon, 3rd pers.
sing. pres.
(^
is frequently omitted, (Art.
23),
agreeing with the no-
minative t preceding.
j)j l^w^c becomes intoxicated. c^>^ intoxicated. dyL he becomes.
- 9
3rd pers. sing. pres. or aorist of jJwi>.
A PRAXIS. 213
4&Ljj~i the thread, comp. of
j*
the head, summit, extremity, fyc.
and
thread, (Art. 177).
/A>U^
his power, choice, #c. jl~^ verbal noun or masdar of the
8th Arab, conjugation, from the root
^
or jU- he was in a good con-
dition.
^
is the inseparable pronoun 3rd pers. sing.
9 9 9 Cx S-
l>
^jj^J ^jkJbLi.^
J j\j)\
(J^^
jW^
tne gardener witnessing the
scattered condition
of
the leaves
of
the rose,
<J^^
has.ili masdar of
jU-^j scattered, perplexed, fyc.
J\jj\
collective Arabick form of
jjj
a leaf
(form JUil)
*Jk.fcU*< masdar of the 3rd conjugation of the verb
jî> he witnessed, comp. with
j<ty*J,
(Art. 173) &c.
JJ
cJ^
l-^L^ l^wJj
^J\++L2
J^,j>
he tore the collar
of
patience
with the hand
of
distress.
^lf
the collar.
^Ji+J&L
patience. Hasili
masdar from L.a. very patient, l^-jJo zd?7A /Ae hand,
<-J\Jh*a\ distress.
Masdar of the 8th Arab, conjugation of t^J Ae struck, where L is
inserted after the first radical instead of cj. (Art. 272). Jj cJU- Ac
/ore. (comp. verb. Art. 173).
u>,i^t
jj
4>1/*- J-?
J
^f" J^"- lA^ iir^
J
J
-
aw6
^
suspended the skirt
of
his heart upon the liver-piercing thorn
of
instability, ^llj
cr*^
fAe sfo'rtf o/ to heart. Nouns in construction, with the pronoun ^L
2U A PRAXIS.
attached to the latter
;
j\&
on the thorn, prep. 
a thorn,
jj
j>.
liver-piercing, jL>- the liver, jecur, and Uj contr.
part, of
a
+>}4 to sew, stitch,
tyc. ^j[,5m instability, comp. of
^
prep, without, and
l>\/S
stability,
Sfc, Hasili masdar of
j[p
Arab.
firm,
solid,
Sfc, form
JUi.
l^J^TjJ Zte suspended, 3rd pers. simp.
c
pret. of
^jTjJ. (comp. verb Art. 175).
c^^f ji^j
JU.
Ûfc^jJ
jjj
(On) another day the same circum-
stance assumed existence,
jî^j^j
(on) another day, nouns in construc-
tion.
JU-
Ûib the same circumstance. Û& comp. of *& euerc, a/so,
and jT â.
JU-
state, circumstance, $?c. Arab, form
J*i
from the
root
J^&-
or
JU-
#o go round about,
^y^-j
existence, Masdar of the
form
Jj*s
from the verb ^>-j
Zte found. \^Jji it took, assumed. 3rd
pers. sing. simp. pret. of
y^J*
to take,
? O 9 f
*^V
H
J
cfi J* J lA^
j
J^]
J *
J^jl;*
*a1aj awe? the
flame
of
the separation
of
the rose, placed him another scar upon the head
of
that scar. <&*->
aflame.
Arab, form il*i. Root
J**>
he kindled
aflame.
jUS separation. Arab, form
JUS.
Root jji he separated,
JS
a rose.
The two first of these nouns are in construction with those which follow
them respectively, gta a scr. ^fj for .^jj another, with the conjunct,
pronoun
^
his,
fyc. jj
upon, prep.
j*
the head, summit, Sfc,
g
j ^T
A PRAXIS. 215
of
that scar. jl^> he, or it placed. 3rd pers. sing. simp. pret. of the
verb jjl^j to place.
In the above instances : viz. ^jLjiL*
^1*1^
Îj
^1^,
and
^JsA
?1*3
the
^
which marks the objective case has been omitted, because, the
nominatives and objectives being of different kinds, no ambiguity will
arise from its omission (Art. 233).
c
The
f\j*a*
i. e. hemistich, is here inserted in the middle of a sentence,
which is often the case.
fj*^
jjj
(on) the third day. Prepositions are rarely added in cases
like this. (Art. 237).
Jr
b jliu,< ^JLjg-
m
by the motion
of
the nightingale's bill, l-j or .
motion. Arab, form i'Ui. Root CJj>-
he
moved. j\m*c bill, as above.
jJUj jU-j i^^î;
Jj&
JS'
ê rose twewif w plunder, but the thorn
c
remained. <
^,
^
o, jfor, #c. -Jjlj plunder, k^hj went. 3rd pers.
sing. simp. pret. from îj o go. j\s>-j and, but, the thorn, JuUj of pleonastic, and JuL. 3rd pers. sing. simp. pret. of ^JjU to remain.
yj^ct iXjj ^l&bj ><fci^jj
JJl> ^1 j\
^Sj^-J^^-
inquietude having ap-
peared in the breast
of
the husbandman on account
of
the nightingale.
LgSj^J^-
inquietude. Hasili masdar
j\>J^
unquiet,
fyc.
*<XI *X>Ju comp.
216
A PRAXIS.
verb of && manifest,
fyc. and sj^T having come. Participle past, of
j<\*t to come. jUfcj <U*>
jo in the bosom
of
the husbandman.
<u--*
/c
'

Me breast, bosom.
JjL
J\
j\ from,
or orc account
of,
the nightingale.
fe *
j\$3
^ ^
j
j
15^/
A&
ne placed the trap
of
deception in his way.
**
^
*1 J a Jrap.
êV.j*
deception. Hasili masdar of u-ôy contracted par-
ticiple of ^juuy
o deceive.
^
a]^
j
J /w to yay.
^j
to, him, &c,
(Art. 90). jl^3 he placed, as above.
L^-L yips? fjJis
(j\<tij
j4
X4j Ju^
\jj\
J.-,^
*A}1jjj awe?, having
taken him with the seed (grain)
of
deception, he
confined
him in the
prison
of
a cage. <j with. *3lj seed, grain, &c.
J-^
deception
Arab, masdar of the form
J*i
from the verb
J-^.
deceive, aa
J*
juw?
having taken, participle past of
jj>y
jj^ o Awwf, take by hunting,
&c.
\j}\
oblique case of^l him: governed by the verb
*j
&+*a. ^Sjj
a prison.
Lr
sis a cage, in construction. y*y*sf. Participle passive
JytiU
of ^-a^ he imprisoned. cuo-Ls Ae made; i. e. Ae ?rcae?e 2*m-
prisoned.
Lî^ jll? ^bj ,lj ^^1?
Jjuj
JjJj
Me heartless nightingale opened
to mottM &&e a parrot, and said.
J<A-j
comp. of
^
without and
Jj
Aear^ heartless. jli& ^bj opened (his) tongue.
J^j
tongue. jli&,
<> pleonastic. tfUf
3rd pers. sing. simp. pret. of jjUi' to opew, (vowel
A PRAXIS. 217
omitted by Art. 110).
j\j <J?jk
parrot-like. ^>jb a parrot, and
j\j
a
particle, (Art. 151).
bX^S
lt^
^-^y* tef*
]y
Jt,J
&
*-f\
O s*r
i f
or what reason have you
imprisoned me ? ^j\
O, interjection.
jjjjs Sir. Arab, form (J+xs. Root
jfi powerful, &c.
\j*
me, oblique case of
a
*>,
(Art.
90),
governed by
the following verb. te
t
c> prep, and A>- what, uû cause, active
participle of the fourth conjugation Arab, from
c=^f-j
it was necessary.
CO o
^xdf
fj~+>-
thou hast imprisoned. 2nd pers. sing. comp. pret. of
Ln
^-
c
tfdfi
imprison, comp. verb. (Art. 173).
h
s&&
JjL
^
{j^jaxs
^-r^
*?~ jl
y
r wAa* reason have you been
inclined to punish me P c
T
^JU9 cause, reason. Arab, form
J.*i
from the
root L-^yj
Ae cw, &c.
J.U
participle active of the verb
J**> JU
#e
> ^
inclined. ^^ you have become. 2nd pers. sing. comp. pret of
jj^>
^/
to become, ^c i^jyixj literally,
for
my punishment. <-.> prep, tfo, jfor.
t^jjiic punishment. Form J3j*j from the verb cîlc he
followed, in-
jured, &c.
O CO 9 .
ztejs
^*
iâJv ÛJLj!
cw=?\ ^^j^ j*1
if
you have
figured (to
yourself) the purpose
of
hearing my song.
_f\
if >*&
VDjyc
you
have made a
form,
i. e.
figured.
<^jyo form, from the root jya ,L> he
inclined towards, &c. form *Ui. *xdj 2nd pers. sing. comp. pret. of
Ff
218 A PRAXIS.
jjk /o efo, &c. comp.
jj^
i
^jy
a to
f
orm
i
devise, &c. ÛJLo!
o-=f\ ?
^for,
on.
c^f>-
side, part, purpose, &c. from <U-j /?e turned the face
towards, &c. Form ilxi, but, as the first radical is dropt, the word is
defective. Ûa-sl hearing, Masdar of the eighth conjug. Arab, root
w** Ae heard.
a
*c uâm my song. Root *k) he read or swwg in a
low voice, form 3$j&.
c^
J
cM^j*
j*
cr*
**>^**^
^f^
m
y
nes
*
* s
^
n thy own garden* j**-
reciprocal pronoun, self,
own, &c. <UL-S>I nest. \^*J contraction for
oJy
Atrae is.
y
ÛLK'
^J\Jb\
a
*o
$>ti\J~
Jb
j?
/J at the time
of
dawn, my musical
house (are) the borders
of
thy rose-garden, jss? <*j breath, moment
of,
dawn. Arab. jS?. Form
J*5.
Root jS?* it was early, &c. *j\j
t
J?
music-house.
Of t-jjb music, delight. Arab, form
Jxi. Root c-^t
moved, gently, &c. and <0U- house. Pers. cJI^M parts, sides, &c. col-
lective form JUil
from uJjk, in construction with the word
JcJ&.
^^Jk*3\^3^
J
L^ XJ
(J>*<*j>\)
but,
if
you have caused another object
fo j955 in (your) imagination, ûx^c
(^J****,
see Art. 173, note), mean-
ing, object, &c. Form J*iU.
Root^j^ft intended, in construction.
JL
iw imagination. l_> prep.
J^.
Form
JUi.
Root
J^, JU-
Ae
A PRAXIS.
219
imagined. >*JuJ^d6 2nd pers. sing. comp. pret. of the verb
^Vy^
causative verb of jJ*^ to pass.
*&
ji>-
J^^-aÎ
J
Ujl
^
acquaint me with what (is) iw My
wtnrf. *J
^
g-we intelligence, imperative, 2nd pers. sing, of the com-
pound verb jj>ta
^
(Art. 126) to give intelligence.
j\ of,
from.
U
that, which, &c Arab, j
in, prep. Arab, j***^
Me ?m*WG?.
J!
the de-
finite article (see Art. 50).
,^J mind. Form J-*J-
Root
7
*w, in the
9
fourth conj. he thought. &y>- reciprocal pronoun, own, &c.
-rîJ ^
^yUJ
<^
I) t^
l>UV /$> e^^
^lil&o Me husbandman
said, how long do you injure me f O Lord ! remain not, O rival !
U
that, so that, until, Sec.
^$
how long.
\jj\J\
2nd pers. sing. pres. or
aorist of the verb j^jljt to
afflict,
injure, Sec. L< objective case of ^c,
governed by the verb
iJj\}U
b 0/ Arab, interjection, *^ GW.
<JU3
comp. of ti not, and
cJL remain thou, 2nd pers. sing. aor. of
jjiU Jo remain, mayst thou not remain !
^j\
O, interjection. f^^Jj
rival. Form J-^ci
of the verb l^sj he watched, Sec.
<_>!&
^1
î\
J
l-Jj U
J^=>j <J*$f
(JjIj
for
how long wilt thou cover
his face ? O Lord ! fall O veil !
<Jo
comp. of <Xj to,
for,
and
(J. (J*^
2nd pers, sing. pres. or aor. of ^Ju&y to coêr.
^^
comp. of i> Me
/ace, ^-the insep. pron.
^1y.
2nd pers. sing. aor. of the verb jdW^j
220
A PRAXIS.
to
fall. 4_to a veil, read, by the figure dl<\
(Art.
51),
for the purpose
of rhyming with t-^^j l-ôJU.
For the scansion of this couplet, see
Art. 380.
s>8AJs
>
/*
j^J3j*
&
^V*
tfr^
do you not know what you have
done against my fortune ? ** any thing, mostly used with a nega-
tive, and always implying one. ^\x>s* you know, 2nd pers. sing. pres.
CO c
of
^3!J to know.
Jfyjji.
<-~
P^p.
in,
for,
against, &c.
j)yj
time,
fortune, &c. in construction with ^c my. &> what, as above.
h*6jj\'j\*
&^>*
M^j^ jV.
^^j^*J
\j*j
and how often
you have injured
c
me
5y
# separation
from my amiable friend ?
Jj &&f~
how
often ?
i,xjj\ \j*> you have injured me. *x4jj\
',
2nd pers. sing. comp. pret. of
jjjjT to injure. t^jjliUj. <> prep.
y,
&>,
&c. c^JjlsU separation,
form alcU** masdar of 3rd cohj. Arab, from
jj
he divided.
j\
friend,
lover. ,j*3jl3 delicate, amiable.
t>4j jJl J
jy***
c^telLc
(Jijbi
J**
j!
^l/
-8
ê
^
e punishment
of
that action, by way
of
retribution, may be even this. U* desert, re-
ward, &c. J/^c
action, Arab, form
J*i.
Root
J*.c
ê cftd, Sec.
tfijai
c-> prep.
#y,
in.
(Jijo
way, road, &c. Arab, form
J-**?
Root j^L he
came by night, &c. culittU retribution. Form *LcU^, masdar, 3rd conj.
of & 7 200s sufficient,
&c. ^â comp. of J* even, also, and
^1
Jto,
A PRAXIS.
221
the same, &c. >\y
3rd pers. sing, aorist of ^*Jly to he able. Jy,
9
3rd pers. sing. simp. pret. of
jcty
to be. (Art. 118).
p p c 9 4> $ C 9 O 9
x&L
jj&>
UUij
<gyft?
j\)
*JJU
fj)j^jk*j:Jij\
y
4
that
2/
ou
>
re-
maining excludedfrom
friend and country, and being separated from
p S C y
pleasure and show.
Jjc^
J^
friend and country. Arab.
j\j.
Form J*i.
Root
jjj
jta ê a5ew rowwc? about. jl>
>4
> plural of multitude of jlj.
Form
JUS.
a^js? forbidden, excluded, part. pass. Arab, of *p-
he
for-
5ê, &c. *JjU having remained, part, past of jJuU o remain.
Ju
masdar of the fifth conj. Arab, taking pleasure, of ^ji he divided,
9 C
opened, &c. l>Uj sôay, amusement, Sec. j^s=^ separated. Part. pass.
x 9 9
ofj^ he left,
deserted, &c. *<X2- tewg*, part, past of jjJ fo &e
?
become.
S&Ii t5*
C^J **~*r
J*
^n the corner
of
a prison you continue (to)
complain.
iJ^f
a corner.
sj\j
^c 2nd jpers. sing. pres. of &<toj\j to
complain, with the particle
O
ô. (Art. 111).
o % CO/
p
*<x*i.>- jIjW.
Û *>^ $&+&$
c)\j*P
)
m& wc^ ewe? / afoo, draw-
ing out the dregs
of
desertion, and tasting the pain
of
separation (from
my) beloved. *& also,
jjj
dregs. jlj-s^ desertion. Arab, form jjiUi.
Root .js^ he deserted, &c. #du drawing out, part, past of ^du.
J n2 pain. Lîly separation, &c. Arab, form <0Ui. Root
j>y
Ae separated.
jUW plural of Û. sow/, a term of respect (Art. 86). *Ju*!La
having
tasted, part, past of jjuJL**. to tote.
222 A PRAXIS.
JU
(<<
cfij^^
>
<s
^j^
^ continue to grieve in the cell
of
sorrows.
<ul^ ce//. j^l broken plural, form
JUi!
of
jj*-
Root
jj^
ê aoas'
sad, &c. Jlj 1st pers. sing. pres. of jSj^S to grieve.
l^wJjIj^ l^^*
^^ Jt^ JW
mourn (O) nightingale
if
with me
thou hast a matter
of
love*
JLj
imperative of ^juJU to grieve. 2nd
pers. sing, with i-j prefixed, b aw'M. prep.
a
*> me. ^J~ inseparable
pronoun 2nd pers. sing. (Art. 92). It may be construed here with Û
love. j~i head, principle, &c. ^b hasili masdar of jl>
friend, lover.
c^~>
for
t^d
is.
o
jjtj U
J&j
+)j\j
jÛ
jj
L <^ /or toe re 2ze>o
afflicted lovers,
awe? owr business is
affliction.
U zoc. jJ 2a?o.
J^>U
/ot;cr, part. pres.
Arab, form Jxlj. Root jfJU
Ae /ot)ed. (Art. 263). jtj afflicted, &c *j
for >j\ t#e are. (Art. 102).
j6
m
work, business, ^jjsj
affliction.
Hasili
masdar of
j\j
afflicted, uô for
c^**^
^,
as before.
^^jJol
j]j
j&>j6
fU*
^ji uÂ^J^b
the nightingale said, leave this
standing (resolution) and consider,
^j!
for
^1 j!
jfrom ^g's. *ljU place
of
standing, or resolution. Arab, form J^xiU, noun of place. Root
*y
aU ^c stood.
y&
jA pass away. Imper. of
l
^J*& jd to pass away,
leave.
JL[AJViJ
Imp. 2nd pers. sing, of ^JlJLjJuI^j fo consider.
o >>c c. y o
with this quantity
of
crime, that I had torn a rose, have been im-
A PRAXES. 223
prisoned. ^jJJ for
^j!
<u (Art. 91). jIjJU quantity. Form
JW*U
noun
of instrument, &c. RootjJo ê determined by measure, &c <UJ^f-
m'w
,
crime. Arab, form aLaj. Root
*
^
ê sinned, &c. /*J^
tA-^tji
-^ *ore#
9 C
comp. verb, 1st pers. sing. simp. pret.
^/-^^
imprisoned. Part. pass,
of
u**^
he imprisoned. *\ faJU* I am become. 1st pers. sing. comp.
pret. from
J
to become.
9 9
jy
Jjbî.
j^ y
JU-
u)t~> /<o
^^>^
^(J^
**
f
(
as to) ôw, ze?Ao
continue to tear a heart, what shall your state be? (see Art. 227).
c
^jL
O
ô Ûj^j comp. verb, 2nd pers. sing. pres. of ^pU-L with the
continuative particle
^.
^j<Jj
objective case of
Jj
indefinite form
(having the^x&J ^b) of
J
J ZfearJ, governed by the above verb.
JU-
S> 9 * 9
state, &c. ^>. how P &c.
jy
dJ*ly>. 3rd pers. sing. fut. of
^jy
agree-
ing with the nominative
JU-.
s. 9 c c c/
jfiTe who turns round the vault (of heaven ) by rule, knows the just
retribution
for
both good and evil.
C
V *V
9
9
zti&J
part. pres. of
^&i&
to turn round,
^jj
ôr
i-fJJ $
from or
fty the
face, aspect, mien, &c. (j-A^ analogy, rule. Form
JUi
from
224 A PRAXIS.
c
the root
^-^j t/*G
Zte measured, &c. cu-J& 3rd pers. sing. pres. of
^^Jb to e. t^-Jb is the substantive verb, l^J the mere logical
copula. -
knowing the right, due, Comp. of ^l^fc con-
tracted participle of â^-L* to know, and
^^ *%#*, cto, &c. For the
Scansion, see Art. 381.
S> 9 C
Whoever does good, that shall come to him : and whoever shall do
evil, destruction shall overtake him.
Jb every one. * who.
^jfo
hasili masdar of jLj good. (Art. 78).
JLil
comp. of ^T that, and
^p-
pronoun. &+~ij
3rd pers. sing, pret
of jJ^-^ *o arrive. For the use of the tenses, see Art. 245.
jj
^j&t
has done evil, ^dj hasili masdar of Xi bad, ^tjbj comp. of jl>
j
ruin,
damage, &c. and the pronoun
^,
Judj as before.
^
^li^*
Ix-M-J
***&''J$ d&*<* <J* J
Z*
a
A this discourse becom-
ing operative upon the heart
of
the husbandman, he liberated the
* 9 9 y if
nightingale.
{
^
i
or ys? word, discourse.
j>J&
comp. of
J&
affair, &c.
c
and
effecting,
contract, part, of the verb
Jk^
to become, &c. 2^1
part. past, of j<xT to come. dj> d\j\ 3rd pers. sing. simp. pret. of ÎjT
A PRAXIS. 225
^p^
to se #f liberty
',
comp. of jljl /ree, ^Jij? to wok, &c.
^J*^
ob-
jective case governed by the verb 6js
oljT.
uui^j jli^^^lib ^bj
J.aL
ê nightingale opened his mouth with
freedom and said, jbj ê tongue, i/^ljb comp. of <0 i, &c.
t_^Jl
freedom, Hasili masdar of jljTyrce. jlii 3rd pers. sing. simp. pret.
*
of j^lif to o/?e#.
JfoUbU # JL^-Sl
ill ^L^l 'Uft-
Ja *
*^
<-?<*J(J&
^
V
c#~
c
dj? Job M#ce yow ^t)e ffe# kindly with me, according to [the sen-
timent in the Koran)
"
Is there a requital
of
kindness, except
kindness f
"
it is proper that retribution
of
that be made,
jy>~
since,
&c. ss? by means, according to, &c,
J&
whether,
f\j^
a reward,
requital (Art. 309). jLft.il literally,
of
the doing good (Art. 308).
Jl
the Arabick article (Art. 357). ^L.ft.1 masdar of the 4th conj. of the
b
* 9 * -33
verb
a
~*s>. he was good, &c. 311 unless, except, particle of exception,
and as the sentence is negative requiring a nominative case after it.
(Art. 353,) <jl
c-?lil<j retribution
of
that. Job it is proper, impersonal
verb. 3rd pe| . sing. pres. of
c
^~>b
&J*
contracted infinitive of âi
to do,
/ceo c
JJJ^ji
l
^^*i}
2>teî\ **jL-j! t L^ft-^J <j?+b
j}j
j<3 ^
j\î
know,
that, under the same tree (under) which you stood, is a vessel
full
of
G
g
A PRAXIS.
gold. j\si Imper. 2nd pers. sing, with c_> prefixed. From the verb
ll
p^j\ t} to know,
jj
beneath, &c. prep. jw**b
the same* ^~d~j tree.
< which. zXi}hi) you stood. 2nd pers. sing. comp. pret. of jjl^-jJ
to stand. *<ul&jt a vessel, the
<_?
of unity is here supplied by (*)
(Art. 78-9).
yj
full. j\ of, from,
prep.jj gold.
fi
<-
9
* s 9
J*

v? t>^>- i\}>*
j4j
j\a
A
take up, and expend it in your neces-
gft'e$. j\aj imper. 2nd pers. sing, of Ûb ; to take up. J\^>- neces-
S 9 " *
sities. Broken plural of iÛ. necessity. Form
Jcî. Root
^
,
~\*~
9 C CO
ê tiy5 m ârct
J*
uJ^ expend. Imper. 2nd pers. sing, of ^dj> uJ^
to expend, comp. verb.
&
C C /
>> /G? / 9 oj G
u^sta c^-jiJ
JJ^
^.sr^
*Vj^ ^d*-
5^
<J\ u^^
the husbandman dug
the place, and found the nightingale's word true.
J^si
place, station.
Noun of place, form
J,*jU.
Root
J^.
Ae loosed.
&^>
3rd pers. sing.
C i. 9 9
pret. of
^^
or
&&J&
to search, dig, &c. l^^j tfrwe, Wg'fa, &c.
g c
o^V.
^rc*
P
ers
* sm
g-
simp. pret. of ^lit; to find.
2 GO /C/ G C>>
^Jow\3 cJU- he said, O nightingale, wonderful ! that you see the
vessel
of
gold under the ground, but did not see the trap under the
dust, c^-sf Arab, form ^s. Root c-^-sf he wondered.
^J**)
ground.
Pers.
L
î ^c you see. 2nd pers. sing. pres. of the verb
j&4
to see,
A PRAXIS. 227
making the aorist j^jj (Art. 126). cJU- earth, dust, &c. c-^.Jo comp.
of <tf not, and
LÂjJ
2nd pers. sing. simp. pret. of jx> J o see.
a *<GL-.3^ Jj I jT J u^^f Jjkb
Ae nightingale said, have you not
c c
known that (adage) that .... \jt\ oblique case of
J\
that. xbuJtdJ,
<0 not. jaJuJta, 2nd pers. sing. comp. pret. of ^-Jta Jo know. t&
that . . .
jksj Jiw
jJkSl!
Jjj
\fc)l ^ftew
fate
has descended, caution has become
vain. \Ci\ when, adverb.
Jji
has descended. 3rd pers. sing. pret. Root
h
j&&\ fate.
Jl
the definite article, j^s
fate. Form
J*i.
Rootj^S ê
was powerful.
JLj
27 to become vain. 3rd pers. sing. pret. root.
<\si of
J1
the article, and j^~ caution. Form
J*i. Root jtk>- #e omjs
cautious. Bothjji andjj^- are nominatives to the verbs which pre-
cede them respectively.
the abbreviation for frU***; hemistich. In

delivering opinions, or hypothetical sentences, the preterite is generally
used in a future sense. (Art. 340).
*i^ cfijF* j)lfi
^
V
** ** impossible to contend with fate,
b prep.
o>f7& IdS ,/ate. Form
J*3.
Root ^S Zte decreed, &c. j]jjK battle, en-
gagement. ^Sjhj of <0 wo, and j^J AtWe, contracted participle of
ti
^w!jJ'
*o 6e fl6/e.
43^
contracted infinitive for
jj.
228
A PRAXIS.
the divine decree receives the honour
of
descending, no light remains
to the eye
of
'perception.
^\
relative noun (Art. 299) of &\ a God,
divine, jjb
Jjjj
t^J^
finds
the honour
of
descending. 3rd pers. sing,
pres. of
a
is\j
Jjjj
finding
descent, comp. of
J^jj
descent. Form
J^xi.
Root
Jjj,
as above, and ^b -J,-S> Arab, form
Jxi honour, nobility.
*X>j tfê eye, (also part, past of j*x>J to see), ll^-v^j perception. Form
<L*i. Root ^J ê sao?, perceived, &c.
^
the sign of the dative case.
^^jj
light. Hasili masdar of
a
&jj
light. JoU ti. <G negative particle.
jjU 3rd pers. sing. pres. of ^Û to remain*
i^jLij mJj
j^-j
-jjJJ <Jjj /zor does counsel or wisdom bring (any)
C .2? O
advantage. j+iSJ counsel. Arab, form
J**,
i. e. the masdar of the
second conj. active voice. Root
j)
J he followed, &c.
&j>- understand-
ing, &c. wRi utility, &c. Form
J*.
Root *-&} ê was useful, &c. jJLj,
causes to arrive. 3rd pers. sing. pres. of the causative verb jjjl*^
or
jJuJL, derived from
j+~>j
to arrive, (Art. 141).
This fable has been taken from the Anwarl Suhaili of Husain Vatiif,
and is to be found at
p.
&T of the first Calcutta edition of that work,
and at
p.
I 1 of the last, which has here been generally followed.
END OF THE ANALYSIS.
[
229
]
A PERSIAN SONG.
Sweet maid, if thou wouldst charm my sight,
And bid these arms thy neck infold
;
That rosy cheek, that lily hand
Would give thy poet more delight
Than all Bocara's vaunted gold,
Than all the gems of Samarcand.
Boy, let yon* liquid ruby flow,
And bid thy pensive heart be glad,
Whate'er the frowning zealots say
:
Tell them their Eden cannot show
A stream so clear as Rocnabad,
A bow'r so sweet as Mosellay.
Oh ! when these fair, perfidious maids,
Whose eyes our secret haunts infest,
Their dear destructive charms display,
Each glance my tender breast invades,
And robs my wounded soul of rest,
As Tartars seize their destin'd prey.
*
C->!X<
J>xl
a melted ruby is a common periphrasis for wine in the Per-
sian poetry. See Hafiz, Ode 22. The Persian text is inserted in
p. 18, kc.
230
A PERSIAN SONG.
In vain with love our bosoms glow
;
Can all our tears, can all our sighs
New lustre to those charms impart
?
Can cheeks where living roses blow,

Where nature spreads her richest dies,
Require the borrow'd gloss of art ?
Speak not of fateah ! change the theme,
And talk of odours, talk of wine
;
Talk of the flow'rs that round us bloom
;
'Tis all a cloud, 'tis all a dream
;
To love and joy thy thoughts confine,
Nor hope to pierce the sacred gloom.
Beauty has such resistless pow'r,
That e'en the chaste Egyptian dame*
Sigh'd for the blooming Hebrew boy
:
For her how fatal was the hour,
When to the banks of Nilus came
+ A youth so lovely and so coy
!
But ah ! sweet maid, my counsel hear
(Youth should attend when those advise
Whom long experience renders sage)
;
While music charms the ravish'd ear,
While sparkling cups delights our eyes,
Re gay ; and scorn the frowns of age.
*
Zullkha, Potiphar's wife. t Joseph,
A PERSIAN SONG. 231
What cruel answer have I heard
!
And yet by beav'n, I love thee still
:
Can aught be cruel from thy lip ?
Yet say, how fell that bitter word
From lips which streams of sweetness fill,
Which nought but drops of honey sip ?
Go boldly forth, my simple lay,
Whose accents flow with artless ease,
Like orient pearls at random strung
;
Thy notes are sweet, the damsels say,
But oh, far sweeter, if they please
The nymph for whom these notes are sung.
A Literal Translation
of
this Song, the text
of
which is cited at
page 18.
If that
(
Turk, marauding
)
maid of Shiraz would bear my heart in
(her) hand,
For her black mole I would give Samarkand and Bukhara.
Give, cup-bearer, the remaining wine, for in Paradise you will not find,
The water-banks of Ruknabad, nor the rose-beds of Musalla.
Alas, that these tender, sprightly, delicate, city-disturbing (beauties)
Should so bear away patience from the heart, as the Turks (do) the
tray of plunder.
Of our imperfect love, the beauty of the beloved has no necessity
;
For, of wash, and paint, and patch, and line, what need to a beautiful
face ?
232 A PERSIAN SONG.
Tell the story of the musician and the wine, but the secret of time seek
less,
For no one has opened, or shall open, by science this enigma.
I have known of that daily-increasing beauty which Joseph possessed,
(And) that love, from (behind) the curtain of chastity, brings out Zulikha,
Give the ear of counsel, (my) life ! for more beloved than the soul, hold
Happy young men, the advice of a learned old man.
Thou hast called me bad, and I am content : God forgive thee, thou
hast well spoken
;
(Yet) does the bitter answer become the ruby-sugar-eating lip ?
Thou hast pronounced a ghazel, and hast pierced a pearl. Come and
sweetly sing (it), O Hafiz
!
For upon thy string (of pearls,) do the heavens diffuse the knot of the
Pleiades.
END OF THE GRAMMAR
[
233
]
ADVERTISEMENT.
Abefollowing Vocabulary will, it is hoped, be found
of
considerable
use to learners, and to those in particular who are unprovided with dic-
tionaries. It is not only intended as a literal alphabetical explanation
and analysis
of
the extracts and authorities
from
the various writers
interspersed through the Grammar, but also as a vocabulary which may
be employed to advantage, by imprinting on the memory a number
of
useful words.
It may not be improper, however, to inform those who have made
but little progress in this language, that in consulting any dictionary,
there is a variety
of
inseparable particles prefixed and annexed to
words, which must be analysed or separated before the meaning can be
found: for
example,
Lz~o~**c\Li which literally signifies to desire is, must not be looked
for
under the letter t-j, but under <jj, the l->
prefixed
being the insepa-
table preposition, for, to, in, *^ implying desire, &c. and u^*-> (for
u^wj!) the third person singular present
of
jA^ to be.
It is unnecessary to multiply examples, but it will save the learner
much trouble
if
he keep in mind, that the principal
of
those prefixed
particles are,
J!
the Arabick article the.
h h
234
ADVERTISEMENT.
t-j {or
^
before words beginning with
\
) the characteristick
of
the
first future, and sometimes
of
the imperative,
<o or L-s the preposition to, for, &c.
c->
prefixed
sometimes by way
of
pleonasm, to which no translation
can give any precise meaning*
b with.
^
without.
J
{f
or
)\)
from, with, by, &c.
CJ {for
t
)
which, what.
ô or *& characteristic!^
of
the present tense.
These charade-
risticJcs
of
the present are frequently omitted by the Persian authors.
* {or ..* before words beginning with
\
) the negative
prefixed
to
imperatives.
ti or
j
{or
^J
before words beginning with
\ ) the general negative
prefixed
to all other tenses.*
The particles which are commonly annexed to words are as follow :
The possessive pronouns.
+\ or aj my, mine. U our.
.ij l^\ or <jô thy, thine. U-2> your.
(J*
lA*.
or
J
^s
5
êr
J
ft**
cM*
tne*r
j\
and
$
the plural
of
nouns having reference to living creatures,
$?c.
*
Notwithstanding the above observations, which will save the learner some per-
plexity in consulting dictionaries, many
of
the compounded words, and such oblique
tenses as
differ
most
from their infinitives,
are for
his greater ease and satisfaction
inserted in this Vocabulary.
ADVERTISEMENT. 235
U the plural
of
inanimate nouns.
\ or b the poetic vocative.
\j
the termination
of
the oblique cases.
l^v-j the third person singular present
of
jty
to be.
t_c is sometimes equivalent to our a or one ; and, at other times after
nouns ending with \ or
j
, it shows that thefollowing noun is in the geni-
tive case, and it is then equal to our of.
The Persian writers make frequent use
of
the contracted
infinitive
;
when the learner therefore cannot find such words as Ju-jj
or &+** in
the Index, let him look
for
^-^ji cJ^*V>
&c*
***
The a put after words, shows that they are
of
Arabick original
In this Vocabulary the tanwin
(%
*,
J\,
with which Arabick nouns
generally end, will,
for
the most part, be omitted.
[
236
]
APPENDIX
IV.
VOCABULARY.
t^j\
a. father.
<-jT water, fountain : lustre.
*Xj1 a. always, for ever.
j>\
upon : a cloud.
L-Xj^jT colour, paint, com/?, of cJf
water, owe? C-Xj colour.
J>\
a. son, pL
^yj
lzj\ (annexed to words) thy.
jIjT fire. >-^jT fiery.
UUjI a. concurrently, by chance.
j\
a. he came.
J\
a. a mark, impression,
j)l.J$\
c^)l>-1
a. permission.
dl^'j^J a. religious warfare.
J^t
a. limit, death.
J^l a. one.
jtjol A. >J. ofte&s*-, the eyes.
c
êJ a. pL cares, griefs.
c
^Lî a. present, favour, benefit.
c
JtjJ
a. p/. o/"
JU.
affairs, conditions.
jLx>4 a. choice, liberty, free will.
j^l a. he took.
JA
a. end, finally; another.
Jl,J>\
A. moderns
;
posterity*
it
jSLM a. {pi.
of
jU) manners.
Ul a. when.
J
J\
bringing, bring thou, from
j^jt
s\J\
or
\J\
adorning,
from
c
{^\J\
to adorn.
237
1J"\
r^
T rest.
6jj\
is worth, jfrom
j^Jjt.
c.
dj\ may bring, yrom
O^J^"
*
<jb^ a. persons, lords, pi.
of
l-sj.
c
dtfc^ a. directing, instructing.
*j\
Iram, name
of
a fabulous garden
in the East.
j\
from.
c
dfi
jljT he set at liberty.
la\)\
liberty.
j\j\
afflicting, from
j^JT
*o rebuke, afflict, wound.
^T jl
from that.
c
IsTf jl
thence.
^3
j^
from this.
IsHljl hence.
Ca
jî
j\
on account of.
c
^jî
j\
wherefore ? why ?
^^>-
j\
on account of,
*t>jjT afflicted, jfrom
j^jT.
Ur
j\
whence.
U|l experienced,
yrom jJy)l.
(J^LjT
temptation, experience.
jjJj^jT to try, tempt.
C)W
j^
frm amidst.
Jj&j\
from one another.
LT like, resembling : appeasing.
îjUt rest, both
from jti^l.
c fa
cv-j1 or i^-ol a horse.
V
C G
aI^s^J a. desiring information.
jULst a. hearing, sound.
^jgjj^j
jl^-)l they listened.
o c
icfijAzJi
a. permanency.
^^J A.jp/.
o/^j, secrets.
^
a. name, noun, p/.
A+J\.
238
31
ÛJT heaven.
U$ lj*
or
JL>
[annexed to words) his.
xjVA
a. intimation, signal.
c
gL-M a. filling up.
lL*1 a tear.
jl&tf clear, evident.
u^L&t love, friendship,
familiarity.
t-jjtfi disturbing,
from
jiij&l to disturb.
<tfU-2>T a nest.
<_->ls?I a. persons, pi.
of
k-^sÛ.
c
J*l
a. origin, foundation.
UîAjft a. relation.
>
c
<->! Jail confusion, disorder.
b
uJl^l a. p/. o/* ui^t
,
parts, tracts.
b
jljkcl a. numbers.
Jl^l
a. equality,
temperance.
b
c>UXcl a. belief, faith.
b
Lgj\js\ a. speaking clearly, declension.
b
jUIcl a. reliance.
^Jact
a. he gave.
b
flicl
a. greater; greatest.
? b
*L1 a. most learned or wise.
J
lit the beginning.
b b/
jlail a. |)/.
of
{
jas.
y
branches.
b b >
jLci a. pL
of
J+&,
rivals.
b/
jjlsl a. regions,
^?/. ojf
J^l.
b
<-->Ui7 the sun.
b b
&UiT or <bta7 a bottle ; a coffer.
^dbit to fall.
b b b
jlyt exalting,
from ^LMyl.
b
b
cpeyjft
to inflame.
b
Jjâl
inflaming,
from
the above.
b
j<^yl to create.
b
^^M creating, jfrom ê above.
b b
1^1
or ufljil
increasing, from
jjjjil to increase.
b
j^jil
increasing.
b
fp*\
a. most eloquent.
b
U*yJ>\
alas
!
J^
239
^liil sprinkling, shedding.
^JoLti! to sprinkle, shed.
J&\
throwing,
from
jji6t to throw.
c
f\d3\
a. ^/. of
~Si, cups.
jlyl a. affirmation, confirmation.
c
*Ji! a. climate, region.
A^T or slTf intelligent.
c
jl\ if. <te-jM though.
*^\
a. doing honour, masdar
*!
he honoured, 4th conj. of
+J
was honourable.
jyil now.
Jl
a. the article the.
SI
a. but, except.
i$\ A. an instrument.
c
culibll a. esteem, respect.
aUxI! a. gentleness, lenity.
ÎsLl a. musical notes.
^ju.^l a. the mind.
of
he
/ To
MforM
a. God.
uiSI A. thousand.
IH
U*\d\
of
Jl
and (jJj a. men, mankind.
j>jlt sprinkled, stained, jfrom
jJjlT to stain, sprinkle.
^1
/or jJbS! a. O God, divine.
<JI
a. to, towards.
JulI A. ê ^fnzo. article prefixed to
jj hand, strength, aid, &c.
*1 a or *j [annexed to words) my.
*W a. Imam, prelate.
jUT a. security, safety; sincerity.
J^T he came ; coming.
^M to come, approach : the coming,
approach.
f >.
4X-2bj j^^sT coming and going.
j^<1
a. command.
*^1
a. a woman.
c
Jj^l
to-day.
o
Z+*\ to-night.
240
c /
^7
a. he believed.
o 9
0jyc\ to learn, teach.
jj^T
skilled, teaching.
c
^yû\ to mix.
9 ? I
Jwcl or Ju^l hope, jtjJu^ hopeful,
^xd a prince, noble ; emir.
>^t mixing, jfrom ^ût*
^-^1 a. faithful, confidential.
^T that : time : now. ^l) \ those.
^1
a. if.
^}
that, ut.
jl or
^
a. surely, certainly.
Akwl a. expectation.
Is^T there, in that place. j~J\ thither.
c c
^^jJ! to throw, dart.
c
jlfcXM throwing, jfrom ê above.
c
*\jcl body.
j^jjol within.
cLiJJl little.
jJJ
jJl thinking, considering.
JL&\ a finger; meat so called.
4&T that which ; he who.
<tfji or *lOl then, at that time.
ti
)2j]X)l to excite, raise.
jj&\
raising, exciting.
j\y\
a. Anwar, lights.
lyT those.
O b
jl^l a. /?. o/^y , rivers.
I*y1
a. 7th conj. of
*j&
he put to
flight, i. e. he was put to flight.
jl a. or, or else.
9 9 9
^jj\
or
^
or
j
he, she, it : his. her its.
9 9
^j>-j\
himself, herself.
jVjT or
*}1j7
a voice, sound : fame.
^7
a. pi.
of
J\,
times.
b
jjT bringing, /rom j^jjT.
\jj\
him, her, it : to him, &c.
Ox-
j
jjjT to bring.
9U.I a. ^?/.
q/*^j,
affairs, actions.
Six
J.\
a. first : the beginning.
lS\
241
j^Jjl a. forefathers, the ancients.
c
^r^-jT
to hang.
c
Jj&l
a. people.
c^v*^
J&!
wise, people of science.
9
^T a fawn.
ij\
coming ; come thou,
from jJucT.
^1
or b| O ! sign
of
the voc. case.
j*bj A' times, days, pi.
of *.
^jULjJ
to stand.
C
)\^j\ they; their, jj>. JiL>\ them-
c
selves. Ijilijl them; to them.
ji
t
js.
J\
O Sir
!
{
j4j\
a. the right hand ; safe.
Â this.
J^j\
these,
lacbl here.
îfVj
so, thus.
j~^j1
hither.
ilj\
behold.
U^>,1
a. wherever.
&j7 a mirror.
l^.l>t these.
j^
hall, court.
l-j to, for.
b with, possessed of; since,
b foot, paw.
c-^b a. a gate ; a chapter.
<jl^b to play,
tib the wind, air ; let it be.
\*o jb zephyr ; a gentle gale ; the
east or morning wind.
*jb wine.
jb a load, baggage.
<te^>b cloth, clothing.
c
jj-s^b Persian.
cSj\)
once.
jb playing, play thou, jfrom ^j^b
jb again, anew.
c
^^ta
jb to withhold, keep back.
c
*Jjjb a player, playing.
i i
9
jjtlj being, be thou,yrom
j^.
tXi>b it may be,
from
yty.
_b a garden. jUib a gardener.
(jib a. the remainder, permanent.
cJb fear.
cJb pure, chaste, clean.
% above, upwards.
*fcb
together.
iX>b it is necessary,
from
^J^b.
il
^wjb to be necessary.
i3^J he took or bore up.
tô idol.
(j^Jki
fear thou,yh???z jju~y.
Ju^-J he kissed,
from
j^^
The
first
(-J appears to be redundant*
te, (pi*
J^f)
an mânt
om^!
for, on account of.
c
*
A. metre : the sea.
9
LU Bukhara, waw?e o/ a place.
c
jLjL^ fortunate.
J*
*-^ I would give, yrom
c
jtXj-JL^ to give, forgive, &c.
J-^7
A. avaricious, a miser.
^
bad. *jkj bad of me.
^J&t
or
^yo worst.
u
1<Xj to or for this or these.
jl^ know thou. ^^-JIj^ I might
have known, /rom
a
l~.'Aj.
9
tyj&i
farewell.
Jjj
a. change.
*JJ give thou,
from jj|j.
4X)^; conspicuously, publicly.
^X*l ^j^j to become conspicuous.
j^dJ accepting,
from
i
^KSj>
t
&i
f
to accept.
j full,
^j
the bosom, upon, ci^j thy
bosom.
j
%
carrying, ravishing,
from
jAj
^jyT
j
I should rest.
jxf[
j
to ascend.
^j\ji for, because.
sA
j
t
arises, comes,
from
(
jX<\ ji.
9 C
\a) j a harp, lute.
Jiji
higher.
^jujU-^ to rise, arise.
^jU^j^ to finish, compose.
c
j\<3jl
composing, completing.
o
3)tjjj he finishes, performs.
^jt^j to bear, carry, lead.
O 09
JJj^j they carried off.
c
xdji
a veil, tapestry.
09
(j-y
ask thou, asking.
Ju^ it may or will arrive.
c
^
ji above, on the top or head.
jJu^j to ask.
^>1
*Ju**^ we have asked.
c
uJ^j snow.
c
c^-V
he went away.
Ljfji a leaf; power; arms; orna-
ment
;
a musical instrument.
o y
0Jji
t0 filL
243
^-j
c o
CJ
J^Sji to return, recede.
(
JLiJ
^
to ascend, mount, sit on.
c
ti\jjl
a butterfly, moth.
jjj
a protector, nourisher.
C^JL/i
* educate, nourish.
ô
(j^j
education; nourishment.
jj^j
without, out of.
c
aJ^j together.
j&j!
t
abstinence, chastity.
Ljjl
an angel, fairy.
^Ltjjj ruinous, disordered, scattered.
lJ^H
great, personage.
fjj
A. assembly, banqueting.
jtj)
under, below.
O C
<*9
JojU^j they will give up,
from
tf&j**
9
O
jIL-j a garden, Îi~j a breast.
o
^jwj to bind, shut.
09
^jî
j,
j to pass time, finish.
j~*i a boy, child.
jL~J much, many.
244
J*
(JU&j
it blossomed.
c
*-uij let us break.
c^->*2j a. sight; prudence.
JLi a. vain, fruitless.
fjzj
a. slow.
Joo a. after.
^1 j!
a*j afterwards.
Jo*i a. distant.
-
Ujib second person imperative,
from
jt^/
to command, &c.
lib a. permanency.
jJb a. he remained.
c
e^-~*ta is to (my) desire.
Jojl^j he did dig, from
îK or j^jK.
J
\*& leave thou.
j&
say thou, from
^pa.
6jd&
it shall pass
5v
/rom j^;3o.
Jj
but, but rather.
ita a. misfortune.
jL a. countries, regions.
J-Aj
a nightingale.
j^li a. he arrived.
*L but, rather.
cub high, tall.
L-l>a tiger.
J?
a. yes.
J^j it shall perish, /rom jdô.
ji\î therefore; building upon.
^jiî on this account,
JUj
mourn thou,jôwz ^JuSli.
*Lj asylum, refuge.
c
l^Jj a. a daughter,^/. lzj\u.
j^
a. sons, pi.
of
yi\ son.
c
j^j binding, compiling ; bind thou.
c
Joj advice, counsel.
c o
jjuu can bind, from
^^-j.
c
xxj servant, slave.
fcM*J showed, jfrom jJyw-
dL^j
foundation, basis.
>>
j^jj
to be.
t^jjj^j
they were, /rom
jtty.
L5*
245
L5i
^^j
a kiss.
jl^j a garden.
JJwjjJ he kissed, yrom jju^.
jju-ijj to hide, cover, conceal.
9 9
*jj
an owl. /*^-j
to the owl.
9
u^j
fragrance, smell.
9. S. 9
dî-?y.
rose-scented; scent of the rose.
& good. 1^ the mansion of the spring.
c
i^+srH cheerfulness.
o
^
because, for, on account of; for
all, or every one; fortune.
*$
together, one with another.
^ji without.
Uj come thou, from ^*x<T.
ÎjLj a desert ; uncultivated.
oLj I shall find.
i^w house, distich.
c
j
Lj bring thou, ^rom jt>^T.
^l-j a. white; brightness.
<k)Lj a cup.
cJLmJ fearless.
9 (* 9
iJ)y*\+>
thou shalt learn,from ^>j^T
JÛ-.j
inconsiderate.
c
u-^-Jyaj irregular.
-t^ twisting.
Û*u helpless.
d\js\) without assistance,
prf a root, origin.
jUsy without a thorn.
jAs^j ignorant.
|juj openly; apparent.
oU-J injustice.
Jjuu
heartless, disconsolate.
,* old ; an old man.
9
tfjjM
without, out of doors.
c
jjjj
shedding, sifting^ from J^ssx*.
c
u^~-J twenty.
j^Ly before ; the front.
246
J
i-j art, trade.
innumerable.
jâjj inconstant; afflicted.
4J\Lj new. <j3l*J novelty.
j\Lj battle, engagement.
jLj
f
the face, form.
Jjj
an elephant.
4JU-J goblet.
fjZy
Ûjo goblet-
drinker, destroyer.
ô fear, danger.
Jliî-j unequalled.
^
seeing.
^.j I may see, both from &&
\j*+* helpless, unfortunate.
CD or cd\ (annexed to words) thy.
\j until, that, in order to.
^jU-b* rush upon, attack,
jb' web, dark.
-Xb spoil, prey, ruin.
g-^b* a. a history, chronicle.
lj2
dark.
J&ij3
darker.
*jb fresh, new, young.
jixft
more fresh, &c.
Jub* a. corroborating.
J^b a. consideration, speculation.
jj
*5fT a. searching, watching.
*a^ a. present ; rare, elegant.
c.
j+a&? a. vilifying.
qo**o a. particularizing.
c
^jjJ a. prudence, government; re-
gulation.
JS
moist, fresh.
\j
thee ; to thee.
ti\j harmony, modulation.
op
e^jy
A. a tomb.
u^wy a. order, regularity.
^sJ thou fearest, jfrom
c
^Juy to fear.
c^Ju-y
thon mayst fear.
247
CSj a beautiful man or woman
;
a
c
Turk. cJy a. leaving, relinquishing.
c
aJuJ? a. giving up, surrendering.
C^L^j a. doubting.
a. composition, publication.
j+x*ai A. diminution.
Alii -JUif
a. or
jJUi*
<dll may God be
exalted
!
#-.la*J" a. magnifying.
â!*)* a. hanging, dependant; the
most elegant kind ofPersian hand-writing
j&j a. relaxation, walking.
b
j+~Jij a. explaining.
b
Jjwii;
a. superiority.
b
j:
mJo a.
fraction, breaking.
b
^
bitter,
severely.
+\LsP
bitter in taste.
IfcUJ
diversion ; a spectacle, seeing.
aUj a.
full, perfect; completion,
end;
completely.
Ml
i^+'J
A. wishing.
j***? a. discrimination.
a
J
the body, person.
JcJ rough, fierce.
b
^jj A. making vague, indefinite,
b
l^J alone
5
only; solitary.
9
$
thou ; thy.
j>^ y
thyself.
g^jly a. (>/. o/*
gÔ
histories.
*-?\y a. humility.
y*y b ^x
1
j!y
it is possible,
from j^j]^'.
b *,
s\$ powerful.
b ^
&J a. repentance
;
conversion.
b^
imJ+*y> a. description.
^
empty, void.
âj an arrow ; the river Tigris.
j+j
sharp
;
violent, passionate.
-J a sword, dagger.
t^j
A. moisture.
by a. the constellation Pleiades.
^j*5
a. precious.
J*
248
*U- a. he came.
U- a place.
*U- dignity.
*>U* a remedy.
cJU- a fissure, a breach.
jjj
cJl>- to tear.
f
U-
a cup, glass ; mirror.
<uU- a mantle, robe.
*x*U- a. hard substance.
Û- the soul ; a beautiful woman.
Ûls-
souls; friends, lovers.
lj\j3
jU. delighting the soul.
Jo- a. study, endeavour.
j-jU- hungering, a hungry person.
9
1uX=w separate.
j*~ a. attraction, genitive case.
\j&- wherefore, why ?
wus*!^
(p/. cÛ-V^.) a wound.
b
y>-
fortune ; the globe.
4a^&- a. a crime.
\y>- a. a reward, recompense.
j*- unless, except.
^/if*
toleap, ^û-^- to seek, examine.
c
a-1^- the eye.
c
i^- a fountain.
jJuJL>- to taste, try.
a\ **xJL* I have tasted.
Juto. a. a curling lock.
c
ijxf-
a. artificial.
<tfU>. a lyre, a lute.
J*>-
the liver.
j^J^-
liver-piercing.
Ajj>- how ; what ?
jJl>. a. a volume ; a skin.
JU^
a. beauty, elegance.
Jm*s>-
a. beautiful.
c
A-JU*- Jamshid, proper name,
b
%.*>- a. collection, assembly, plural.
O 9
<&*:=*. the whole.
9 9
.*>. a. multitudes, plurals.
A>-
249
^f^
a garden, meadow.
jb^=- a verdant plain, meadow.
J^>-
in like manner.
C 9
ts^l^
in the same manner.
o 9
<tOL>~ in this manner, thus.
c^>-
a. or . paradise.
c
J^>- how many ?
Jo
x*s*- how often ?
L^l>- a harp, lute.
j=- when, like, as.
^-
seek thou, from
â*-^-*
*>[}>- an answer.
tf\y>-
young", a young man.
<vV^
youth.
y&\j*>-
a. [pi.
of
jby*) jewels.
9
*ys~ a. hungering, hunger.
C^
how ? when ?
<tu.>- when that.
.4^-
thou mayst seek,
from
^^-f
^ what, which.
c^f-
the world.
UJjl^>- conqueror of the world.
jljul^. possessing the world.
c
<X^. a. diligence, solicitude.
c
e^
^ what is it ?
s
t
^- he gathered,
from
^<s*&~.
^>. China ; a wrinkle.
I may gather,
from jJu>-.
*!>U- ring, seal.
cô-U* a. necessity.
J-cU- a. obtaining; harvest, profit.
j*a\>- a. present, at hand.
iaiW a. Hafiz (a man of great me-
mory) name
of
a poet,
JU-
a. a condition, state ; time pre-
sent.
*JU- relating to time present.
e^JU-
motion, action ; state.
tf 9
u-^r*- a. he was loved, passive of
i_^>- he loved.
t k
CJ~
250 U.
a. imprisonment.
a. an Abyssinian.
s?^ a. a decision.
^.sf*- a. a stone, pi. *>ls?\
JÛrs. a. [pi. qftlb&s*) gardens.
jAc*, a. caution.
u^*-*^ a. guarding.
{JD^j^-
a. a lizard.
hj>- a. a letter,
P
i.
\*j>* a. motion ; a vowel.
Jw~*- a. envy.
c 9
^~s>- a. beauty.
^^
beautiful.
c
c^**-^
a. pomp.
m
tjz*.
a. true; true God.
LZ^Jb&>~ a. sincerity; truth.
(JuS.
-
- a. true.
c>^>*
a. story, relation.
*>. a. he decreed.
**- a. a decree : means.
c
a. science; wisdom.
**^ a. wise ; a philosopher, physi-
cian.
JL*
a. lawful.
c
*U~ a. mildness.
c
tX*^ a. praise.
0->j!^ a. [pi. o/^SjU*) accidents.
&\f~
a. assistance, support.
<\j>"
a. (pi.
of
e^=*-U-) necessaries,
necessities.
cÛ>. a. life; an entrance.
Jjo.
a. [pi of&Lte*.) frauds.
^jt*>-
a. living, an animal.
t
jU a thorn.
c
jliÛ- place of thorns.
c
UjfJ^J^
anguish, resentment.
-. .U- a. being without, going out.
HI
.Û. a. pure, excellent, noble.
.LU- a. mind, heart, disposition.
cJl>-
earth, dust.
J^
251
JU-
a. a mole on the face.
jÛ- a. the Creator.
<JU-
void, empty.
jU- a lord, grandee
;
an inn.
lÛ-
(/?/. o/*&U) houses.
j-*- a. history, news, fame.
aJ
^^
relate thou, /rom
jjl J ^j^- to inform, relate.
y* a. bread.
^pU- Khotan, Tartar?/.
J^
a. ashamed, blushing, envious.
tj^sLsr" a. a blush, shame.
Ui God.
j^jtj^- a prince, lord, patron.
C^ 9
IjJjU^ O God! O heaven!
ajlw JjjIdcJ. the only Lord God.
j>
jW*fc>- friend of God, 'proper name.
<>[/> a. ruined, desolate.
C-^>. a. murmured; fell, /rom^.
TLf
a. he went out,
&j>- intellect.
&J*
small.
^ê
j^p-
wise, intelligent.
o 9
z&J*
minute, subtile ; minutiae.
^^-^
contented. Aiteu-yS. 1 am con-
tented, ^jx**^ contentment.
*,>
charming, pleasant.
9 9
(Jjj>-
rage, emotion ; an attack.
&ft
j- buying ; he bought.
^\j>-
the autumn.
iJ*&-
a. he feared.
j*as- a. Khizar, proper name.
la^ a. mustacho ; a line, rule.
Ua>- a. crime, error.
jliti^- palpitation of the heart.
^J.^
a. concealed.
9
t^-vdU- a. the best part of any thing,
the substance.
jj>.
a. he created. ^L> people.
^J^ a. sincerity, purity.
c
c
jUv^- smiling, pleasant.
252
Id
jJljAa^ to smile.
ci\j>- sleep ; a dream.
Jjll c->^> drowned in sleep.
U- <j1jj>- the place of rest ; a bed.
Sj\j>- eating, devouring.
1
mSm-U>
to desire, to want.
tj\j>-
a reader, singer, singing ; a tray.
^jj|^>
to read, sing.
x\j>> ask, wisher, wish for ; whether.
ijAj**
yOU will, jfrOtfZ
t
^-a^>.
<>}> pleasant, fair, gentle, good,
jljj^- more beautiful, &c.
rjlj**y>>
most beautiful.
jjr^ 4--^>- fair-faced.
jj>. or
\J^}>-
one's-self ; his.
O^JP"
*
eat
>
devour.
c
Ju^> the sun.
/J^
sweet; happy.
l^> great joy.
ijrv^^>
sweet-scented.
lSjs^j*. sweet-tempered.
j^-
blood.
j>
t
y}>-
blood-dropping.
i^y^
disposition, temper.
JU^
imagination, phantasy.
^>. a. good, virtue.
j^
rising, from
î**jU or
jjjj^
to rise, spring up.
c^x>j^
thou hast risen.
JJ darkness, night.
jIj
equity; a gift.
^1*>
to give.
c
jlj having, /rom ^li-tj.
j!j
a. a family; house.
\j\j
Dara, Darius.
JjI have, enjoy, possess.
c
<A3j!t> they have or hold,
u^vlU he had,
c
C
jjJ&\a to have, hold.
^lj a wound, scar, mark.
J
4
253
U*4
a- j a net, snare, trap.
*!j a. it has remained.
^r^j
a fold, lappet, or hem, skirt,
border of a garment.
jl J knowing; a vessel ; sheath.
lilt) a wise or learned man.
43 Mi! J prudently, wisely.
c
*jLj!j I knew.
^^JuJlj to know.
(JUta
learning.
jc^-L)1j learned; a doctor.
c o
^joîitj learning, literature.
JcjIj they know,
from jx-'Aa.
<01j grain.
^yld thou knowest, dost thou know.
l^J
a. dominion, administration of
justice.
J^j
a, he entered.
j
j in, above; around; a door.
. j (/?/. of
Ijd) a. pearls.
j^^l
j
J to enter.
c
j<3jj\
j
J to carry in.
{
j^z^\
j J to suspend; contend; pro-
voke.
c
c^>^j a tree, a plant.
^jLsIj^-
j*3
to require, demand.
j; J pain, torment.
j,j dregs.
l^v^j right, complete.
CSjA a. he took, seized.
*lffd court.
L-&j6 slowness, hesitation.
^jXijJ he beholds, jfrom
jx^^j
j
j to view, behold.
jjjj
within, the heart, entrails.
c.
(j-jjjt> a Darvesh.
^j
the Persian language.
l>
, J the sea.
^.jUU jJ to understand.
UjjJ
or
tr^
J alas
!
^^û>
the hand.
J'
254
*
jyujj manual.
^**s*3 an enemy.
^j
a register, journal ; index.
us-Jui'd a. smallness
;
subtilty.
9
ji^jj depart from, leave.
b y
o*2>3^j^
it passes away.
b
*Jj a. resistance, driving back.
^fj again; another.
J
J the Iieart.
y
n
p^
ravishing, delightful, comp.
of
b
Jd
and
j^
participle ofjxjzji to hang,
suspend.
*Aj agreeable,
pleasant, comp.
of Jd
b ?
a;?d j>-
pflrt. o/
^
to desire, ask,
seek.
b
^dJd a mistress ;
heart-possessing,
c
comp.
of Jd
andj\*particip. ofjJti*
to have, hold.
c
;*Jj
heart-burning, comp.
0/ Jd
and
j*~i part,
of ^,1^^
to burn.
côyld heart-deceiving, comp.
o/Jd
b
awe? l-
ôy
|?arf.
of
ji&jb to deceive.
îXlfc) heart-drawing, comp.
0/
Jj
and ^S
from 0&*&
to draw.
*J breath ; time
;
pleasure.
Ud the brain, the palate.
b
jL-^j a friend ; harmonious, comp.
of
b
f
J breath, and jLs ^/rom ^pU-Ls to do,
make.
b .?
IjJt) a. the world, present state, op-
posed to xj>\ hereafter.
jtXjljj to cause to run.
b^
c^js-jJ a. a species of large trees
y
an
orchard.
jjt> a. a circle, orbit, revolution ; rol-
ling. j}d p. far off, distant.
9
ujj^
distance, absence.
b
j^J sewing, piercing,
[from
J^*4).
J hell.
b
i^-^t) a friend, mistress.
255
C
jUX-ijt) friendly.
j~}j6 dearer, more friendly.
u^Jji) or aIj j a. felicity
;
riches
;
a
kingdom, state.
*J a village ; a giver.
c
j^J fortune, fate, time, world.
jUjbJ a village-chief.
t^j
winter, first winter month, De-
cember. 4_?J yesterday.
jbj
(>/. ofj\d)
friends, families, ha-
bitations
;
a country.
Juj
he saw, /row
jtXj J to see.
j\&l&
sight.
j^.
J yesterday.
_^j
j another.
J^j^&
again.
jUjJ a. a dinar.
j\yA
a wall.
ji a. possessed of, endowed with.
J^jj
a. majestic.
(^^sfcJ gold.
J
e^r^lj a. tranquillity.
jlj a secret, mystery.
cîj^ a. compassion, favour.
i*&\j a. riding, a rider.
jjJl^ to drive, banish.
&\j
a way, path.
Js^
a. a man,
^/.
JU-,
.
j^yj *^
to rob, steal, infest the high-
way.
ij\j
a. opinion.
jj=^
a. returning.
c
l^v*>.j a. mercy.
f
j
a cheek, face,
fj
the sound of a
musical instrument.
jL^ a cheek.
aJj
combat, battle.
dlLj a. a letter, a mandate.
Oj
256
V
jjAj)Ly to cause to arrive.
.J^j
to grow.
a
'^j
to be delivered.
9 9
J~>j
a.
messengers,
prophets, pL
of
py
a.
manner,
law, regulation.
^--s,
arrived,
from
(J*t~ij
to arrive.
<fc~> a line,
thread.
c
Jk,
a. pound
weight.
Lc, a. tender, delicate, lovely.
c^-c; a.
people, farmers.
uij motion.
Tom Jiij
I went,
fr
^sij to go
;
departure.
c
*.ij a. elevation, nomination.
<-~"J^>j a. a rival.
jbl^ Ruknabad, the name
of
a place.
9 9 t
jy<j
a.
(p/.
ofj*j)
enigmas.
^jcj a. he threw
;
throwing.
^j
sorrow, pain.
jA-,5sTj
to be pained.
c
^jj
a wanton, dissolute, drunken, per-
son.
L-&j colour, paint.
L-ZjJ&j
many-coloured, various.
jjjîj coloured.
!jj
a. right, competent, worthy.
cMj
proceeding, flowing.
9
-jj
a. the soul, life, spirit.
C / 9C
\ji\
T
%j
spirit-raising, from gAjj*]*
tVy, u>^3 ^th con
J*
J
L^
ne w*Ued, de-
sired,
jjy
a day.
9C
03j*\
JV
increasing daily.
J^JV
frtune, world, time, an age.
b
<uli
j^jjj
a journal.
jj?Ui one day ; fortune.
^Ljj splendid, evident.
jîjj more splendid.
257
JJ
ijAjj
light, splendour.
i2~*0*j a garden.
(Jjjj
a. beauty, elegance.
ijjj
or
jj
face, top, surface,
^j
thou dost go, from
^j
^j3jj
thou dost grow,
from
c
/^>j>
tj or
*\j
a road, way.
j&\j
highway robber.
ÛsTj
a. herbs [in general) properly
sweet basil.
c
^/^j
to pour.
jlj
pouring, dropping.
J
j
(/or
j!
) from : than.
jlj a complaint

a bed, a place.
&'Hj
i
j
t complain.
jj^j a. a religious.
tXjj a. increase.
^bj the tongue ; language,
jij above, high, superior.
+-j a wound, blow, stroke.
tjAj
to strike, hurt, impel.
JJ
gold.
o
&j)
pale, yellow.
J >L)
ornauiented with gold,
ttijj
golden.
A&j
from
whom ?
cJlj a lock of hair, ringlet.
Ikiij Zulikha, Potiphafs
wife,
(jUj a. time.
/Xidjôj emerald-coloured.
9i> P
^^/^j
made of emeralds.
<*)
ground, earth.
uj
striking, disturbing,
from
jjj
to
strike ; a woman.
AjVjj belonging to women.
^\Sij a prison.
o
^Jlfjjj life.
Jijj
A. decay, misery.
jjj
quick.
lJ6j)
quickness.
tl
258
Jbj
poison, venom.
cJliy&J
poisonous.
~jj
A. a husband, pi. Jjgjt.
s^Jbj Venus. Xj&j courage
;
gall.
jbj loss, damage.
oj an ornament ; beauty.
U>J
beautiful.
yL>J
more beautiful.
JujJ
agrees, suits, from
^Jujuj to suit, agree with.
<Lj a. oil-olive.
jy
under, below.
\jjj
because, for.
L like, resembling.
J^-Lj
a. a shore, coast, bank.
&
^j^-L- to prepare, make.
Lj full of.
jL preparing.
JjL he makes, both from
i
ji>La.
jLi a cup.
jL a. the leg.
<JL>
a. a cup-bearer, water-carrier.
^L a. resting, residing.
/ 9
fjjL*
a. rest.
cJJlw a. a traveller
;
going.
JLs a. sound, sane.
<fc!L belonging to a year, age.
<L>Lo a shade.
c^<-> a. a cause, motive.
^jî to resign, give up.
a*o fresh, green.
9
CSi~z light of weight.
jÎ-Xm-o bearers of light burthens.
s- 9
ÎjI^j praise,
from gdjxâ.
(jjo-j to take.
aX-j injury, oppression.
jlfjjJk^Juo the injured, afflicted.
jI*juj or
jCtz~i a tyrant.
JlSa^
a tyrannical.
J*
259
cr>
^df**
to praise.
y
i
9
sjls^ a. a sacred carpet.
wss*
8
a. rhyme, melody ; the cooing
of doves.
9 9
d^sz* a, adoration.
jsz* a. the morning, crepuscle.
jg?
inchantment.
sl^sr
5
or A^sr
5
the morning.
i^S/s^
a. belonging to the morning.
c
.JLs^ adversity, danger, poverty.
9 9
^s?
3
or ^sz* speech ; a word.
j~i head, end, extremity.
\j*a inn, lodging.
-\j*
a. lamp, lantern; the sun.
jJ\ja from beginning to end.
G
\\jhj* lofty, tall
;
glorious.
c
&j*
cold.
l^S)i^~j an occurrence, accident.
sltj~> wanton ; astonished, confused
;
a
vagabond.
jj*
a cypress-tree ; a horn.
99 y C.
j.^yj
a. joy.
jjj*
a prince, chief.
\y*
convenient, proper.
M>*
proper, due.
j^^JjU^ happy-disposition, happy,
jjM
a. an endeavour,
diligence.
^-*- a. barley.
jxsl** thou piercest, /rottz
ji-o to pierce, bore.
/^_ s9
Igi-s a. fools, pi.

of
<UJLs.
<jj~j
a. quiet, resignation.
JL*Ls
a. pure water

a chain.
^L.Lj a. a chain, series, lineage.
ÎLL a. power. Sultan.
^JoJj^-o a native of Samarcand.
-*^ a. he heard.
a
*~i jessamine.
jo**b jessamine-bosomed.
^
a. a tooth. 4i~; a year.
Jju*
a hyacinth.
260
jIaLjwj a garden of hyacinths.
C\L*> a stone.
c
^Sowo stony.
j**s a. bad, wicked.
d\y*
a. blackness ; melancholy.
jy*>
profit.
13j**j a. black.
c
jjS^-i to burn, inflame.
J^*j
inflaming, yrom ^x>-**3.
tj:js towards ; a place, part, side.
\^-s Soha, name
of
a star.
^-o tall, erect.
J^î
tf/b star Canopus.
v^wiUj a. government.
b\+~s or &~3 black.
,J&L<-> blackness.
>]^
bathed, full of water.
***>
silver.
the face, colour.
silvered.
the bosom, breast.
ij^\
or
ija
[annexed to words) his,
her; to him, to her.
l& a branch, twig, horn.
G
ÛjUj mirth.
cM> (f
or
cAlU
they; their.
jÛ> to comb.
sl> a king, emperor.
c
jLfcU the hawk.
j^&U royal, princely.
c_^~ night.
c-jUib a. youth.
j^^+J* night, place of night.
^j+J* one night.
c-?!^) haste.
,.<-A.& or .
c
jL1 make haste.
c
^SU-* to make haste.
-s*> a. a tree.
tX&hewas; going,
from
j^-k to be, go, &c.
cl& 261
<>^ wine.
cc
J~~cji bashful.
CO
^L-^^l bashfulness.
jU-> a. mark, symbol.
\jxJSt A. poets, ^Z.
ofj\Z>.
<&*-> a. light, flame, splendour.
L-olC& a. a complaint.
jli> hunting.
^->
sugar.
î> a. he was thankful.
UUjs^Cw eating sugar.
o
JW
.XjyJ
a chest of sugar.
c-^-C* sugar-lipped.
c
^x-Ci to break, defeat.
c
&~*.C& Shikestah (broken) the current
Persian hand-writing.
jx&i to blossom, to admire.
<Gj&j a flower.
L*-2> patient.
^Lj.Li patience, toleration.
* ft
L-> you, your, jyJ. U^> yourselves.
jU-i number; numerous.
9
\J\a&
ye, you; to you.
<uU-> A. odour, fragrance.
jj^j
or j^jU-Ss to number, enu-
merate.
uâ^
the sun.
c
j
+"*& a scymitar.
* s
C
^*-> a. a candle, wax taper.
<U-S> a. odour; nature, custom; an
atom.
jj^l^ to understand.
IÛij
knowing,
from the above.
yZ&uJ* or j^y-fc to hear.
1 *j.i I have heard.
JjJuii> they heard,
from
jJu^>.
fji
jovial, gay, wanton, bold, inso-
s
lent. j-2i impurity.
e^->
a. glory, splendor.
262
<X^> a. honey, honey-comb.
jY*
a. a city ; the moon ; a knave,
9 C
a month, pi.
j%&\.
ljui> insane; enamoured.
jX* a lion.
xj\jJ* the top band of a book.
i^^-i Shirazi, a native of Shlraz.
Ûî? the habitation of lions.
yjUâ a lioness.
c
J^Jj a lion.
ylj+Z*
Shlrin (sweet, gentle) proper
name
<
jK&jjJb of gentle manners.
jlk5a A. Satan.
t^^L a. lord, master, possessor,
friend ; endowed with.
JU>.
^>>-L beautiful.
jjL a. speaking truth, true man.
1-** a. the zephyr.
â or Js*a a. morning, aurora,
C9
aJ ? morning-time.
O (j 9
^Jusu? one morning.
j\*a a. patience.
c^jLsf company, society.
**s*
a. true, sound.
&a+? a. a leaf, book, page.
y
o c
jAj* uy
to expend, employ.
l.
^t*tf a. difficult, severe.
Ik* a. attribute, pi. ci>U**.
ja a. he did, performed.
c_^1j^ a. truth, rectitude.
CJy> a. voice, sound, in gram, inter-
jection, pi. cl>\js>\.
9
CJj)*a a. fancy, image, form.
C 9
^J
i-Ujye to feign, fancy.
*L* a. fasting.
ô -U a. he cried out.
Ox
a. hunting; prey.
>
963 &
^jZ Ju^ to take prisoner.
*x+*a a. inflection, conjugation.
J
3
<*-jjla a. striking, striker.
c-^ a. he struck.
j*
A. injury.
ujL*** a. weak, infirm.
j-wfci A. mind, conscience, pronoun.
L^ a. light, splendour.
!
t-jlt a. he was happy.
c^>clk a. obedience.
uujjlk a. power.
^Xb a. avaricious, lustful.
c-^JlL a. enquirer, seeker.
j;aL a. a dish.
t-^t a. joy, mirth, festivity.
ajU^t the house of mirth.
ui^ a. a border, margin, part.
xjo A. a lock of hair.
J^
jt a. custom, way, manner.
*xt a. he tasted.
jcjJi thou askest, /rom jJ^Ji.
? ?
pjlb A. rising, as #e sun,
*t a. desire, avarice.
(j~jb name of a place.
/W*
a parrot.
U.L a. obediently.
^)\sAs the deluge
;
a storm.
Jj^L
a. long.
y
C x
L a. a fold, ply
;
folding.
^J? a. a bird.
!
Jfe a. oppressing, oppressor.
ti^ a. container, pL
<-JjJ&'
j&o a. victory.
Jk
a. shadow.
c^-viJib a. darkness.
Js
a. opinion, surmise.
_^k a. the back.
264
jolc a. a religious.
e^jU a. custom, usage.
ijoj\s. a. a check ; an accident.
jUbU a. a lover.
s
b^
^^wLfcU a two lovers.
ajolc a. the end, issue, event.
JJslc a. intelligent.
Jlc a. the world. JU learned.
Ljjyi
Jlc world-inflaming.
aU a. universal, plebeian, public.
tUc a. a slave, pi. ctac.
u^sf a. wonder, admiration,
^sf foreign; Persian.
^J\ss. a. justice.
,>Xp a. number.
j&&
a. an enemy.
+&. non-existence.
j\. a. a cheek, face, temples.
teyi a. field, court, area; an empty
space ; a dice-table.
l^wJj A^ê
representation, petition.
Jj
a. he spun.
jijs-
a. magnificent, incomparable.
ULijJLz a. mirth, conversation ; the
pleasures
of the table.
o
iJJLb.
a. love.
C
t_^)b
j;i* fondness.
XjJLs. a. a fruit so called.
a. chastity, integrity; de-
fence, safeguard.
jlkc a. perfumer.
.kc a. perfume, ottar of roses.
c
L ^L.c perfume-like, fragrant.
b
uJk.c
a. conjunction.
*U\ cMz a. God preserve thee.
i^&e a. he followed, 3rd conj. u^lU.
C b
j&c a. string of pearls. <>&c a knot.
*jJLc a. a knot.
c
JiU
a. prudence, intelligence, know-
ledge.
265 li
tt^JjiLc a. punishment, torment.
c
*U a. knowledge, science, art.
Ajltf pL sciences.
ULc a. (pL
of
JU) learned men.
As. a. upon, against.
Of G.P
î^ a. life. *jA& my life.
J^s
a. action, operation,
^-^c a. amber, ambergris,
oa^ A. at, with, near
f
c
<^*-Lu.c a. a nightingale.
u-Jty: a.
(
pL
of
l-^s) vices.
c
&^s a. age, time ; compact, promise.
jLc a. a touchstone, proof.
l-~+s a. vice, crime, stain.
sX*x. a. festival, solemnity
;
joy.
Jl^s
a. mirth, delight; life.
^-.fi a. a fountain; an eye, look;
essence.
wjU a. absent, invisible, concealed.
j\
t
. a. dust ; a thick vapour.
^c
A. he has deceived.
e-Ôjc
a. a stranger, foreigner; a
poor man ; extraordinary.
Jlji
a. fawn.
c
J^p
a. an ode.
C-?lJji. A. (>/.
of
the above) odes.
4*2 a. vexation, anger.
aHjs a. a boy, servant, slave.
*i a. care, grief, terror.
yS+z sorrowful.
cJâs afflicted.
<fcs^ a rose-bud ; a bud.
<U.c a. sounding through the nose;
nasal.
j^h. A. depth.
c
^j^>li Fars, a province of Persia so
called.
JAs a. agent, doer.
li a. overflowed, yrom Û.
m m
J
266
Jli a. an omen, presage.
*\i coloured.
tiJs} a. a tumult, faction, discord,
mischief, scandal.
j?
a. glory, ornament.
Ui A. ransom, redemption.
j\ji a. absence, separation.
(J*y*\j3
oblivion,
from
j&+J*yo\ji to forget.
jy
a. individual, j?/.
jjîl.
tjyi to-morrow.
jj-sj^S Firdausi, proper name.
fj^J
a. he tore,
^-y
a horse, pi.
b
^jlî to send.
c
gî a. a parasang, >/. g*
9
!/.
b
jjS^ a. a carpet.
b
aliy an angel, messenger ; fairy.
j>y
a. difference.
Li^Sji a. absence ; <0y a troop ; a
sect.
jj^cy to command.
jj
below ; dejected.
L^î selling; he sold, ^/rom
b
î^jy to sell.
jJ^T t)y to descend.
^.i (jfrr
ugjjyft)
inflamed, from
G b
c
^y
selling, both
from
^>î.
jjî A. splendour.
c
jJuUjî to be dejected.
j^-^î or côy deceit, from
^^j**
b
^Îftjy to deceive.
(J.iji
a. a part, tribe.
b C b
jliil scattering,
from
^jJjliit.
^wj a. eloquent.
a
iyâi
most
eloquent.
c
J^j
excellence.
J*i
a. action, verb.
&3 67 cJ
Ûj complaint ; alas !
Jxi
a. he did, performed.
j&
a. consideration, care.
GO G
Lyb Ô consider; U^j is the im-
/g
perative
of ^Sycf.
f
Jih
a. some one, any one.
CJ>li a. heaven ; the world ; fortune.
tg
a. in, into.
jj-i a. abundance ; bounty.
J-j
an elephant.
J
j-pB a. a judge.
Jli'
a. he said.
aIj a. he stood.
*j\jj a. standing.
c
*\f ^La placetowards which one prays
:
Father.
Ji5
a. he slew.
dJS a. a form, figure, shape, stature.
-di a. a cup, goblet.
jdi a. fate, predestination
;
quantity
;
value ; dignity, power.
j\Js
a. constancy, consistency, con-
firmation; quiet,
c-ôy a. near.
.-Js a. it was hard.
o
j*ai a. a palace.
in
&&s a. a tale ; an action.
Ias a. fate, death, judgment.
o
*JaS a. cut, passing over.
îS a cage.
<ii a. paucity.
c>jSi
(|?/. o/'l-^Jj) hearts.
^j-Lj a. measure, analogy, advice,
argument; a syllogism.
fLi
a. station, standing ; resurrec-
tion
;
confusion, tumult.
g^.
jxlj a. Cesar, an emperor.
cJ a. as, like, in the same manner.
w^ 268
J
<*-jJ6 lying? a liar.
Ji
business, necessity, jls a maker.
<OU^K a work-shop, place of business
;
the world.
J\jji
a battle, contest.
o
fji
expert ; one who labours.
b
jXt[
j>J&
to penetrate, labour, &c.
b
<jl^ a caravan.
^K would 1
ajUaK a house, hall, gallery, chamber.
^1&
to dig.
JK
a curling lock.
jaili' the body
;
a form, model.
*K desire, wish.
b
^^K desire ; obtaining one's wish.
Ji
a. he was.
cfi
f
or
c^
5
a*so a mme*
alf a place, *l a straw, lessening.
^
a. pride, magnificence.
y^jk? a dove.
(-Jc& a. a book, letter, writing.
i!? a. the shoulder.
b
ll^ a. abundance.
U? where ? whither ? how I
b ?
^M^to melt, dispel.
jUf melting, jfrom *Ae above.
f b /
*|j which ? v^~+*\^
who is there 2
b /
^jXMi^to leave, neglect.
L-id& a. he lied*
^\S\jîo cause to pass.
^^
jf to pass
;
to leave.
^
if ; a performer, maker.
|^
whom
;
to whom ? a. hire, rent.
^\J
heavy.
<^>-ji though,
b
j> j> he made.
cjb/a whirlpool, gulf.
b
j!t>^
action, labour, profession ; life.
b
îjuilj^to cause to become
b
*j^
I
made, from
jO^ to do, make.
c
^dj> the neck.
j/a battle-axe, mace.
^J>
to take.
U^f a wolf.
* A. generosity.
A^f warm, U^ warmth.
Ik^ A. abhorring, detesting.
jf a measure so called, used for
measuring cloth, land, &c. a cubit.
tf&lj*
to choose.
j^jS" to bite.
t&l
if select, most excellent.
\j
a person, any one.
c
v^*^
acquisition.
U9
jjujÎ^to cause to spread.
^kxJ* io break, tear.
J
breaking,
from
the above.
lis conquering, opening, Sue.
from
j
t>li^ to open, discover, conquer, to
rejoice.
269
Jf
^t
LiS
he discovers, from the above.
^-ii
to become. j^Li to kill.
Î-ii
a boat.
^fnumerous.
9 9
&y
he has discovered, &c.
from
9
9,
fj^^L^
to discover, open, conquer.
jyt a region, climate, country.
a\ *Ju-i I have drawn out,
c
<U* a. temple at Mecca, temple.
uJi the hand, the palm.
O 9 t>9
eîf he said.
Jc
speech.
*IiiI said,
îfto speak, say; speaking.
\.9 Of
j+kf thou hast said, ^kt he said.
*K a. speech.
9
J^
(gul) a rose.
Jf
(gil) clay.
>?jjlf Gulandam (rose-resembling,
jfrom JS
a rose, and aIju! form, figure,
&c.) a proper name.
<t
270
llJ
-lf a rose-bush.
l5jJT
rose-scented.
<l! a closet, cottage, hut.
o
<ul^ a fisherman's boat.
j!^L a bed of roses.
*
/
ÎxJ^ Gulistan (a rose-garden, bower
of roses) fo'i/c o/* a celebrated book.
jlj^ rose-cheeked.
^liilf strewing flowers.
u^JL&f a rose-walk
;
bower.
^^1^
rose-coloured.
\\Si\ l brick-caster, the apertures
in a fortification, through which they
throw down bricks, stones, &c. upon the
head of an enemy.
J> little ; defective.
^-iU^ place, charge, commission.
JU
a. perfection, accomplishment,
finishing.
jLii less.
j&
a girdle, belt.
^
do thou ; doing, jfrom jt)/.
jlif doing.
jL a boundary, margin, side, part,
shore; an embrace.
'&*&
a vault, arch, tower, cupola.
where ?
jf say thou,
from
^yuf.
*lJj short, dwarf.
c
CS^-f
small.
J&&-
smaller.
^ji' an ear.
^
\j>
listen thou,
^07?*
cJ^
u*!r
* listen.
AAjâ corner.
*sij I smote, ^/rom
b
^Pj?
to smite.
^^
a. a star.
^jfl}jf various, many-coloured.
& a mountain.
b ,
j**f a jewel, pearl ; lustre, essence.
J
271
*& who, which ; since.
fjS
the universe.
j
taking.
Ci
6j
might take, 00^ ^-om
J**J>.
c
e^~-
who is it ? comp.
of
t
who,
u^*J #A/r^ person present
of j
<3j4
.
<uj or
^
hatred, revenge, rancour.
yZ See Art. 151, Gram.
^S that, these, comp,
of
& and
a
>y
J
J
a. to, for.
J
certainly.
S a. no
a
not.
*jb a. necessary, in Gram, intransi-
tive.
$ a tulip.
JijM
a border or bed of tulips.
^
A.
(pi. jUS) a lip; margin.
t_J a. the heart, pith, marrow.
UjJU up to the brim.
*>j)
trembling.
jLLl an army.
uJLJ a. benignity, gentleness, grace.
<J*J
a ruby, ruby lip.
jjd a. he met.
c
J A. not.
Ul a. not yet.
J a. not, by no means.
j!
a. were it so, perhaps.
Ûj! a. beautiful women, prostitutes.
-J
of
J
to, for, aw^
^
affix. 1st pers.
Arab, to or for, one.
c^jU a. fitness.
^J but.
JJ
a. or <dJ night.
r
*
(
annexed to words) my.
Û a. water.
U a. that which, also, no, not.
U we ; our. j>j>U we, ourselves.
272
4*
cÛ a. he died.
*i)U female.
jUj a serpent.
\jl* us; to us.
Û a. preterite.
JU
a.
property.
tiMU a. possessor, proprietor.
jtxJU
to rub, grind, polish.
j^jU to remain.
c
Î~Jlc to resemble.
a;jL they remain, jfrom jJoU.
sU the moon ; a month.
rj*\*
with cheeks like the moon.
^jA* with a face like the moon.
Û lunar, monthly ; a fish.
JjU
a. inclining, havinga propensity.
<UlL a. excess.
!^L lest, by chance.
!?*** a. extended, dilated, spread.
\jj+x> do not ask,
from j<A-~y,
Ai/a^B
a. varied, declined.
c^J*jU a. passing, transitive.
Jô A. the speaker, 1st person.
Jl^c A. similitude, resemblance.
6y??
a. stripped, naked.
c
^^-Lsr
A. an assembly, banquet.
f-As?
a. a place where people as-
semble
;
a collection, junction,
J^jsr
a. unknown.
c^Jjls?
1
a. making war.
<>j*s2 a. friend; beloved.
<j~y*i* a. confined, imprisoned.
/^.sc a. a friend, counsellor.
Jsr a. place, time, opportunity,
uuis? a. affliction, disgrace.
jtazs? a. contracted, an epitome.
uJU^r a. discordant, confused.
(Jtls? A. concealing.
<ca^ a. made light.
^Ju a. governing, a governor.
(J""
273
^ a. a measure, so called.
CD<\* a. a space of time.
\j*
me
;
to me.
c
*>\j*
A
* I ft*
f
u^***^) favours,
graces.
9
d\j* a. desire, will, affection.
(jAj* a. [pi.
of+&j*o)
remedies, plasters.
c
o^-ô
a. mercy, favour.
4)^0
or
**$j<
a man.
<tf \ dj* courageously, manfully.
b 9
jjj^>
to die ; to be extinguished.
j*
a. he passed by.
z? 9
<*tyj>
a. manhood, generosity.
op
xdu joyful tidings.
Lr
^ a. he touched.
c^-^
intoxicated.
J-ajL** a. future.
*\s?~* a. mosque.
^jjLw a. disdainful ; rich ; content.
tXs?^ a. place of worship
;
mosque.
ij+L**
a. poor.
fif**~*
a. poisoned.
Ja***->: a. throne.
*LL<} a. perfumed ; the palate.
*t\fclJL a. witnessing.
jj^J *^j&lJL to witness.
J^**
a. the east.
JâJLô a. friend.
9 o
JjxIaj
a. attentive, attention.
C 9 9 C 9
CJlL< musk. ^sLL* smelling of
musk.
a
+LL* musky.
ji*> a. difficult.
iJL'O
a. he walked.
L
or
Si/**
A
*
an hemistich.
# 9
jk*a* a. diminished.
b
j*xx a. a source ; infinitive.
9
Lau Musalla, wame
of
a place.
9
%j\*d* a. term for the aorist.
CLJpa* a. damage, disadvantage.
C. 9
jAî a. included, concealed
c-^ko a. a singer, musician.
jiia**A.
absolute.
w n
274
cr*
jyJa^j a. thought, surmised.
G j>
j4^<
a. made apparent.
9i>
jj<\*ô a. excused.
tijx* a. knowledge, definite article.
c
<^^> a. a battle, field of battle.
9 C
-J^ A. known.
9 c
jj-ix^ a. a friend, beloved.
4JsyL*^3 a. a mistress.
-S3 /
J&x*
a. scented, perfumed.
9 c
Jî**
a. reasonable, rational, pro-
bable, pertinent.
Ujô a. an enigma, mystery.
^j^xaj a. sense, meaning, signification.
ijôt^j a. belonging to sense, &c.
ji^^c a. established, appointed.
9
w< a. a priest of the Parsees,
Guebres or worshippers of fire, one of
the Magi.
j&\kso infant-magi.
c
jx* the brain.
9
c^JÛ* a. separation, alienation.
fj^xLc a. done, acted upon.
Û*o a. condition, station.
e^vojUo a. resistance.
c
jljJU a. quantity, space, number.
9 O
jyîU a. intention, object.
o> 9
i^JXo a. a conductor, revolver.
ÎC a. pi.
of
jLc laudable.
<jl*>
A. place.
9
c^lilC* a. a recompense, reward.
L-spLe a. written, letter, book.
jCo perhaps, by chance
\
unless.
U~*
a fly.
9
irlSilo a. a meeting.
J^r*
a. inserted, adhesive.
jJL* a. broken.
C)<L<: a. a kingdom.
/>
9
CJj^c
a. a king, pi. cJ^Lc.
Cilc an angel, pi. <KjL.
9 C
e^L**>
a. kingdom, pi. cJJU*.
^
I; my. dp-
y*
I, myself.
275
V
^
A. of, OUt Of.
c-^-sL^ a. proper.
\^^
a. finished, concluded.
c
JCw endowed with.
c
Jjx*
a. an inn ; a stage.
tejua^* a. variable, declinable.
L
T
ij*ax>o a. related.
ijaku*>
a. agitated.
o
c^*ju,o a. advantage.
c
Ûx*> a. a bird's bill.
cu^ a. death.
4^) a. a wave.
c-^f-y*
a. a cause ; an acceptor.
jjjj^
a. adjusted, arranged, weighed.
Of
wô a. time, season.
Jô
a. Maus.il, wze o/* a place,
JU*yc
a. person or thing connected.
uJjtyo a. dependent, stayed.
, f
icy*
hair.
duj* a. assisted, confirmed.
jysrG* a. separated, repudiated.
JY^
the sun
;
love, jâ a seal-ring
;
a gold coin about 1/. 16s.
(J>3Y
^ê
*
ne moon*
ijc
wine.
jj*
characteristick
of
thepresent tense.
jlx* do not bring, the negative im~
perative
of &6jj\
jlx* between, among ; middle.
j^cLa) do not mix or sprinkle, the
c
negative imperative o/*
e
^ku7.
^-j
^
thou seest, second person
present
of
jJuJ.
^^k\^s a wine drinker; an earthen
drinking vessel.
jIju* a. an area, plain, square.
Îju* thou knowest.
^
dying, /row jJ^c.
^j*j*
thou dost grow, from
j^j*
d>j~<>
thou strikest.
Ij 276
J^-j
j**
is it becoming ?
** a. easy to be had, obtained.
*_*,<> a cloud, a fog.
^jâ-ô a seller of wine, comp.
-o wine, crad contr. part,
of
^y^^<
îX-^j thou drawest, bearest.
JL-ô I complain,
from
^Julli.
*
fruity ^?/. bb^c.
U not. &**\ U hopeless.
t->l3 pure, sincere, like.
>UjU imperfect.
^jo- U worthless, despicable.
^jlj ignorant.
8jii\j
a. memorable event; rare.
Jj
a. fire.
jli blandishments ; wantonness.
9
cJjU gentle, tender, delicate.
^jli elegant, delicate, amiable.
\j*\j improper, unbecoming.
of
&lsi&i\j
unblown, unblemished.
^li-2>0 ignorant.
jJ[) a. a conqueror, defender.
<U^l3 a. the forehead.
Jsl) a* spectator, superintendant.
4iU a bag (of musk) ; the navel.
CJU Art. 151, Gram.
<j\j or *\"U suddenly.
jVyfli unexpectedly.
^t) plaintive, complaining.
jjJl) to complain.
aU a name.
\JLc\j
thy name.
c
j\&*>\j illustrious, name-possessing.
<wU a book, history.
jjU bread.
c-^jO a. a viceroy, deputy.
<^J was not. ^cJ^-J I would not have
been.
iM
^3
a. a prophet.
c
^yj
do you not fear ?
LT
J 277
J\jjj
impossible.
jli) A. scattering, dispersing.
c
jlJ a. prose
;
to diffuse, strew.
*^*:sr
I would not have sought.
c
l^
a. a star, planet : fortune.
jjxsT a. syntax.
c:
i~ first.
c
^jJL^' Nakhshabi, proper name.
IjJ a. calling.
J>
male.
c
^r-iy
a narcissus.
c
*y
gentle, tame
;
light ; soft.
c
jj)
near.
Ju
a. descending : hospitality.
Jjjjj
a. descent, happening.
d\ft
family, extraction.
sLJ a. women.
c
c^^-i A. relation.*
^r*j Niskhi, Ae character in which
Arabick manuscripts are generally writ-
ten.
5j3 a. women, pi. irr. of'i\j.<\.
jj-J a. he forgot, 4th conj. ^*J\ he
caused to forget.
p+~+j
a. a gale.
tlli a. alacrity, pleasure.
c
jjîlii to fix, plant.
c
*JcJlj planter.
b
i to sit down.
cjr
9 b
^jjxLJ you do not hear.
b
^^JLJ sitting, /rora ^pLJLj.
c
c-^^2J a. relation, accusative case.
cu*SU2J a. a counsel, exhortation.
îaJ or
Jai
A. the sight, the eye.
CO
jlj^laj opening the eyes, ogling.
b
JaJ a. verse ; a string of pearls.
jjj
û to call or sing aloud.
c*^*.-o
a. a benefit ; favour,
b
:*j beautiful, good ; swift.
b
c^-^j
a. music, harmony.
uJo
a. soul, self.
fjJu
breath,
278
*-a3 a. gain, utility.
c-jlft a. a veil.
c
jJi) a. ready money.
fjjj
a. painting, embroidery.
J&
a. narration, report.
jl a picture, ornament ; a beautiful
woman.
<&j subtlety, mystery.
^w)
ij to view.
<_j)
or ^) good.
& or tj custody, care,
observation.
jld* preserve thou, imperat.
of
Ui showing. ^)Jjî they show.
^dyM to show.
iy melody, voice ; wealth.
J^\y
to soothe.
j\y
soothing, from
the above.
utyy
(pl-
u~>\tyy)
a favour.
*JjjlJ soothing, warbling
?t
/row
^^j*
<)d!jJ a benefit.
o^y
a. a turn, change, watch, cen-
tinel.
jjj
e^Jy to relieve guard.
j\y* y
the early spring.
9
-y
a. the prophet Noah.
by
-y
a. a complaint.
jy
a. light, brightness.
<jy
jjjy
the first day of spring.
^y
drinking, a drinker ; any thing
drinkable, from
^Ju-fcy.
e^Jy or
y
to write.
u^y
write thou, jfrom *fo above.
<0 placing, jfrom
^jL) to place.
^
*jly we have placed.
Jly
a tree, shrub.
c/
0^3
hidden, /rom ^^xAyJ.
c
j*j
a. a river ; flowing.
c
pX^ to hide, lie hid.
_} a pipe, flute ; reed.
JJ
279
J>
jJ even, also ; again.
i~*m*j there is not.
dj good, excellent.
u^kiLj well-fortuned, lucky.
9
jLj bright, beautiful, elegant.
i5>j*3
reputation, goodness.
J-i
the river Nile.
j
and ; he, she, it.
*x*-ij a. one, singular
fern,
xd*J\j.
o
*&2>-j A. unity.
^!j
a. evident.
oj\x3\j a. actions, occurrences, events.
9 9
6y>>j
a. substance, existence.
J&j> &f?3
to become, to assume being.
j\j
or
jj
like, possessing.
*!j
loan.
&>.j a. the face.
jjj
a. a leaf o/ a tree or paper.
<x>Jj
it blows,
from
d
>j
3
.
jjjj
a. Vizier.
(jij like, resembling.
JUj
a. enjoyment; arrival; meeting.
c
J-tfj obtaining, enjoyment.
c
*^j
a. placing, action
;
gesture.
Uj a. good faith.
^Jj
a. but.
^
he, she, it.
jl^jj desert, deranged.
ti\j*j a desert; depopulated.
JjU
a. dreadful, terrible.
j$
or
cflj^*
A* separation, absence.
9 9
}*> a. an assault; impetuosity.
CS&b
a. he hath led.
Ja
or
tf\jb
every; soever.
&&>j& wherever.
tey*> or te \jn whatsoever.
CO o c c
&&j>~jb or A^y> although.
Ueyb wherever.
r*
<slsfy&
wheresoever.
jfj*
ever.
j&
never.
c c
^fc or &&\j!b whosoever.
j\yb a thousand
;
a nightingale.
^*J& to be, exist.
Jjfe
a. whether, but.
cJi& a. destruction,
*Jb and, also; together; both.
P&
a. (annexed to words) their.
jU-Ûa of the same nest.
jU& the same.
b
ajJUj* directly, same time.
<*Si&U.fc> of .the same inclination.
a^*a of the same banquet.
j~++AJb of the same pillow.
even so.
9 C / O
jjf^
or ^s*-* like, as.
Ajujb breathing together.
c
j^jb of the same secret.
j+*& equal, ^jâa equality.
c
^JLâ sitting together
;
a com-
panion.
<u& all, universal.
&+~ij*AJt> it arrived, came.
Aii^Jb I went,
from
r
jjj>
i*L+*Jb always.
2&*& black ; an Indian.
^JcJb or
ufj*^&
Indian.
*\j& time, season.
jyjb yet.
La a. air, wind; sound.
**
no, never.
fj\^^
g-^ dost thou not know ? from
cr~
iJ
J^jJb
a. a temple.
l> or : Arab. O !
i*j\* or jbb finding.
>jl> I may find, both
from
jiib
ck
281
t>b memory, recollection.
jl> a friend, mistress.
*--^
V.
O Lord ! o/bOl afltf <_>,
a lord, master.
^^^V.
jessamine.
cuîb he found,
from
ûib to find.
CJyb a ruby.
Ju a. the hand ; aid, power, strength.
c
,^>
that is to say, viz.
U*j prey, spoil, booty,
uio one.
*il> singular, unique.
o
c/UJj precious, valuable, rare.
ti\d6j inestimable, rare.
*aj one moment.
j*x& one or two, a few.
j5oiô one another.
c
Jjô
one day.
cr
*j
t
Yemen, Arabia the happy
jj
A. a Jew, Jews.
f
p
<mJ~*t
Joseph.
THE END.
O O
282 CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS.
The letter e, wherever occurring, is to be pronounced like ay in day,
or a in same.
The last line in the Persian couplet in page
26, will be better pointed
and translated thus
:
9 9
In the interval this distracted body was not a wall.
9
Page 35, to jlAo and jÛ-i add jUUj), all of which appear to occur
only in the writers of Hindustan.
&y * 9 s9 9 y y 9 9 G ^
To Art. 377, apply the measure
cjlcli
J-*cli
c^lsli
Jk**,
which
is the proper one.
C y. O y
Page 210, line
3,
read
^
^j
-L^ js* every morning upon it.
^
it,
9
instead of
^jjj
,
&c.
Page. Line.
12,
Read.
taraj.
.JR./*. A A.
Page.
23,
Line.
16,
Read.
s,
14,
f^l
23, 21,
C
8, 5,
ayak.
24, 21,
Lrr4
,
21,
/ o
d**
1
28, 7,18,
Art. 35.
15, 20,
c
29, 11,
Art. 61.
16, 17,
29, 15,
19,
7,
11,
c
30,
37,
2,
12,
20, 12,
conjunctive.
39,
4,
ERRATA.
Page. Line. Read. Page. Line.
40, 3,
r
w
128, 15,
40, 10, c,Urf 128, 18,
41, 2,
s. ?
130,
7,
45, 17,
UP
164, 12,
57, 15,
d*j>A
167, 20,
61, 3,
c
>
181, 17,
81, 16,
c
;t
jrjjy. 190,&c.
2,
&c,
82, 10, 203, 20,
102, 19,
d>^ji;
217, 8,
126, 10,
283
Read.
hundred,
o
^--
London: Printed by W. Nicol,
Cleveland Row, St, James's.
i*L
*
_*y'
'
OJ
i
7v
cvo>
u
vy
c
7
?
^
^
_<j
/^
**
I
W
/
*
v
J
't-r^M
w
:
. v.
JSngravsd ~bv T.S-waim
&*&$
u
LfHJ^'.
ttftr&H
i>
-J^tM.
Ev.grccesL
r
/y ,
r
.
'"-'
k
. .*.
^W-^t
*
*
:: .
Plfi'ftSIAN
WlITING,
cIUj
^/V/.
.c-
\
^7U A
y
V-1 X*
jikgffi' ^^
l=>
*T
wmmm&w
f
ypfMMM
4
4/^
&
Mpm
^>&gS3^Pfe^
i
I
Af

j^pg
% #>>
^^j
f^'-TS
;/

Grammar of Persian Jones

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Grammar of Persian Jones

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Grammar of Persian Jones

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A

3. I have made the greatest use, perhaps, of a very

5. I have also consulted the grammatical trea-

is formed in the throat, and produces that kind of inarticulate

Lumsden's Grammar, Vol. I. page 38. For the several sorts

28 OF THE NOUNS, &c.

Under the second :

Under the eleventh :

Under the eighth :

Under the tenth :

gar, j\f gar, jU ban,

cX*3jL> two hundred.

characterized by inflaming and blan-

They bore envy towards him.

) will take the place of the last vowel in the singu-

Augmented Quinquiliteral Jdmids.

strong, &c. whence 7K this, &c. It is said by the native grammarians

the abbreviation for frU***; hemistich. In

Can cheeks where living roses blow,

Igi-s a. fools, pi.

You might also like